Sei sulla pagina 1di 147

 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Extremely  Young    Incredibly  Wise:  
The  Function  of  Child  Narrators  in  Adult  Fiction  
 
 
  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Acknowledgments  
 
  
 
I   would   like   to   express   my   thanks   and   wholehearted   appreciation   to   my  
supervisor,   Professor   Justin   Edwards,   for   his   useful   support   and   continued  
guidance  during  the  dissertation  research.  
My  special  thanks  go  to  my  family  and  friends  for  their  sustained  encouragement  
and  incessant  patience  during  the  writing  of  this  thesis.  

 
 
 
 
 

Author  Declarations  

 
  
 
I   hereby   declare   that   the   present   work   is   the   result   of   my   own   individual   research  
and   effort   and   that   I   have   written   it   myself.   The   material   included   in   this  
dissertation  has  not  been  submitted  wholly  or  in  part  for  any  academic  award  or  
qualification  other  than  for  which  it  is  submitted  now.  All  elements  borrowed  from  
other  writers  are  given  their  due  credit.  

 
 
Linda  STEINMETZ  
May  2011  
 
 
 2  
 

 
Linda  STEINMETZ  
professeur-­‐candidate  au  
Atert-­‐Lycée  Redange  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Extremely  Young    Incredibly  Wise:  


The  Function  of  Child  Narrators  in  Adult  Fiction  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Redange,  2011  
 
 
 
 
 
 

  3  
 

Abstract  
 
  
 
The  following  research  focuses  on  the  function  of  child  narrators  in  adult  fiction.  My  
thesis  first  defines  the  notions  of  ‘narrator,’  child,’  and  ‘adult  literature:’  what  is  a  
narrator  and  which  types  of  narrators  are  there?  What  are  the  preconceived  ideas  
that  readers  have  in  mind  when  they  think  of  child  narrators?  At  what  point  in  time  
did  adults  start  to  analyze  the  child’s  individual  psychology  and  to  define  young  
people  as  different  from  grown-­‐ups?  And  finally,  what  is  an  adult  and  which  texts  do  
we  characterize  as  ‘adult  literature?’  
Subsequently,  I  am  answering  the  question  why  an  author  would  choose  a  child  
as  the  narrator  of  his  story,  rather  than  an  adult.  Which  literary  message  can  a  child  
transmit  that  an  adult  fails  to  impart?  And  finally,  which  influence  does  the  author  
and  the  reader’s  background  and  prior  experience  have  on  the  reading  process?    
In  order  to  answer  the  foregoing  questions,  I  have  discussed  two  novels  in  
particular:  The  Life  Before  Us,  by  the  French  writer  Romain  Gary  and  Extremely  Loud  
and  Incredibly  Close,  by  the  young  American  author  Jonathan  Safran  Foer.  
Furthermore,  my  thesis  incorporates  secondary  literature  and  analyses  other  critics’  
points  of  view  in  relation  to  child  narrators,  in  order  to  assure  an  extended  outlook  
on  the  discussion  at  hand.  
Finally,  my  research  paper  ends  with  the  debate  whether  there  is  such  a  literary  
device  as  a  stereotypical  child  narrator  or  whether  all  child  narrators  differ  according  
to  the  author  who  created  them  and  according  to  their  literary  function?  Can  a  child  
narrator  keep  all  the  characteristics  of  an  average  child  or  does  the  young  narrator  
need  to  lose  part  of  his  childlike  mannerism  in  order  to  render  the  story  meaningful  
for  an  adult  reader?  
In  the  end,  I  would  like  to  highlight  that  it  was  a  challenge  to  find  secondary  
material  in  relation  to  my  research  topic,  because  the  analysis  of  the  child  narrator  
has  only  recently  become  the  focus  of  literary  criticism.  Moreover,  I  would  like  to  
point  out  that  the  present  thesis  just  makes  sense  if  we  see  and  treat  the  literary  child  
figure  like  a  real  person.  Otherwise,  the  discussion  would  remain  limited  to  a  purely  
hypothetical  level.  
 
 
 
 4  
 

 
 
  II
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
I
 
 
  A book is not an isolated entity: it is a narration, an
  axis of innumerable narrations.
Jorge Borges

  III
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IV
 
I go straight from thinking
  about my narrator to being
him.
  S.E. Hinton
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  V VI
 

  5  
 

List  of  Figures  


 
  
  Fig.  I:  16th  Century  Children  
Ourimages.  co.cc:  http://ourimages.co.cc/16th-­‐century-­‐children.html  
 
From  the  14th  to  the  end  of  the  19th  century,  the  children’s  clothes  closely  resembled  those  
of  their  parents.  In  figure  I,  all  three  children  are  wearing  headpieces  and  their  clothes  are  
richly  decorated  with  lace,  which  makes  them  look  like  miniature  adults.  
 
 
  Fig.  II:  Child  Psychology  
Nocloo.com:  http://www.nocloo.com/gallery2/v/charles-­‐robinson-­‐secret-­‐garden/crobinson-­‐
secretgarden07.jpg.html  
 
Figure   II   shows   Mary,   the   child   protagonist   of   Frances   Hodgson   Burnett’s   novel   The   Secret  
Garden   (1910).   The   picture   captures   Mary’s   melancholy   and   introversion   and   illustrates  
the   growing   emphasis   on   children’s   psychology   that   begins   to   emerge   at   the   end   of   the  
Victorian  period.  
 
 
  Fig.  III:  Children’s  Hardship  
Hill,  Bill.  Billhillsblog.com:  http://billhillsblog.blogspot.com/2009/07/les-­‐miserables-­‐would-­‐victor-­‐
hugo.html  
 
The  third  figure  is  an  illustration  by  Emile  Bayard.  The  picture  shows  the  image  of  Cosette,  
the   main   character   in   Victor   Hugo’s   Les   Misérables   (1862).   Emile   Bayard’s   drawing  
captures   the   hardship   that   a   great   number   of   lower-­‐class   children   had   to   endure   before  
and  during  the  nineteenth  century.  
 
 
  Fig.  IV:  The  21st  Century  Child  
Commarts.  com:  http://www.commarts.com/fresh/jay-­‐taylor.html  
 
Figure  four  highlights  what  life  is  like  for  a  21st  child.  Nowadays,  children  are  constantly  
surrounded  and  influenced  by  a  multitude  of  impressions  on  a  daily  basis.  
 
 
  Fig.  V:  The  Medieval  Child  
Dollsfrom  the  Attic.  com:  http://dollsfromtheattic.blogspot.com/2010/02/dolls-­‐of-­‐middle-­‐
ages.html  
 
Children’s  play  in  the  Middle  Ages,  and  for  centuries  later,  was  meant  to  prepare  the  young  
people  for  their  social  roles  in  later  life.  Dolls  were  there  to  foster  the  girls’  womanly  roles  
as  mothers  and  housewives,  while  boys  were  encouraged  to  play  with  miniature  military  
toys.  
 
 
  Fig.  VI:  The  Innately  Good  Child  
Nocloo.  com:  http://www.nocloo.com/gallery2/v/charles-­‐robinson-­‐secret-­‐garden/crobinson-­‐
secretgarden07.jpg.html  
 
Charles   Robinson’s   illustration   shows   the   romantic   idea   of   the   child,   who   is   inherently  
good  and  one  with  nature.  
 
 6  
 

Table  of  Contents  


 
  

  1.  Positive  and  Emotional  Thinking:  Introduction .........................................9  


1.1.  Motives................................................................................................................................................................9  
1.2.  Research  Methodology..............................................................................................................................13  
 
  2.  Factual  Thinking:  Key  Definitions..............................................................17  
2.1.  Narrator  and  Reader ..................................................................................................................................17  
2.2.  The  Child .........................................................................................................................................................33  
2.3.  The  Child  Narrator ......................................................................................................................................45  
2.4.  Adult  Literature............................................................................................................................................55  
 
  3.  Critical  Thinking:  The  Child  Narrator’s  Effect...........................................59  
 
  4.  Creative  Thinking:  Uniqueness  and  Function  of  Child  Narrators ...........93  
4.1.  The  Life  Before  Us,  by  Romain  Gary .....................................................................................................99  
4.2.  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  by  Jonathan  Safran  Foer .................................................. 125  
 
  5.  General  Thinking:  Conclusion .................................................................. 137  
 
  Bibliography .................................................................................................. 143  
Primary  Reading................................................................................................................................................ 143  
Secondary  Reading........................................................................................................................................... 143  
Cited  Works ..........................................................................................................................................................143  
Cited  Online  Sources.........................................................................................................................................145  
Included  Visual  Material ................................................................................................................................146  
Additional  Reading........................................................................................................................................... 146  
Consulted  Works ................................................................................................................................................146  
Consulted  Online  Sources ...............................................................................................................................147  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  7  
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 8  
 

1.  Positive  and  Emotional  Thinking:  Introduction8  

1.1.  Motives  
It  is  a  common  conception  that  children  are  our  future  and  that  young  people  need  
adult   guidance,   in   order   to   fully   develop   their   potential.   Yet,   already   two   thousand  
years   ago,   the   Greek   philosopher   Socrates   has   ostensibly   argued   that   children  
resist  adult  control,  because  children  
 
love  luxury;  they  have  bad  manners,  contempt  for  authority;  they  show  disrespect  
for   elders   and   love   chatter   in   place   of   exercise.   Children   are   now   tyrants,   not   the  
servants   of   their   households.   They   no   longer   rise   when   elders   enter   the   room.  
They   contradict   their   parents,   chatter   before   company,   gobble   up   dainties   at   the  
table,  cross  their  legs,  and  tyrannize  their  teachers.9  
 
Socrates’  view  of  the  young  people  of  his  time  has  gradually  developed  into  cliché  
thinking   that   adults   still   voice   nowadays.   The   persistence   of   the   stereotypical  
concepts   mentioned   above   illustrates   that   children   and   the   ideal   methods   of  
raising   and   educating   them,   in   order   to   secure   a   promising   future,   have   always  
been  and  invariably  remain  widely  discussed  topics.  In  the  1930s  the  definition  of  
the  child’s  status  in  society  started  to  emerge  more  clearly  and  Phyllis  Blanchard  
explains   that   ‘growing   recognition   of   the   importance   of   the   early   years   [was]  
indicated  by  the  increasing  number  of  nursery  schools  and  centres  for  research  in  
the  psychology  of  the  preschool  child.  […]  Both  welfare  work  and  research  [were]  
placing  more  emphasis  upon  the  social  relationships  of  the  child.’10  Consequently,  
while   the   child’s   psychology   started   to   capture   public   attention,   there   was   a  
simultaneous   movement   that   was   meant   to   define   the   child’s   development   in  
relation  to  his  environment  and  cultural  context.  Children  have  become  the  focus  
of   psychologists   and   educators,   who   analyze   the   importance   of   upbringing   and   the  
influence  of  social  background  on  the  child’s  development  in  more  detail  and  in  a  
more  scientifically  founded  way.  

                                                                                                               
8  In  order  to  avoid  the  use  of  awkward  pronoun  combinations  such  as  ‘he’  or  ‘she’  or  possessive  

adjectives  such  as  ‘his’  or  ‘her,’  I  am  consistently  using  ‘he’  to  refer  to  any  person  or  character  in  
this  thesis.  This  decision  is  purely  motivated  by  practical,  as  well  as  stylistic  concerns,  and  does  not  
carry  any  hidden  socio-­‐political  message.
9  Koth,  Amit.  “Socrates.”  Quotationsbook.com:  

http://quotationsbook.com/quote/44998/#ixzz1K9ef61bh.  
10  Blanchard,  Phyllis.  “Status  of  the  Child.”  The  American  Journal  of  Sociology  35.6  (May  1930):  

1085-­‐1090,  1085.  
  9  
 

In   literature,   since   writing   generally   reflects   the   circumstances   of   its   time,  


the   trend   of   focusing   on   the   adolescent   has   also   found   adherents.   In   contrast   to  
scientific  research  though,  the  authors  of  books  that  focus  on  a  child’s  point  of  view  
only  outline  the  relationship  between  child  and  adult  and  leave  the  interpretation  
of  the  child’s  attitude  and  behaviour  to  the  reader.  The  literary  movement  where  
the  child  is  simultaneously  the  central  character  and  the  narrator  of  a  novel  is  the  
core  of  the  following  analysis.  Why  would  an  author  choose  a  child  as  the  central  
protagonist   of   his   novel?   Which   literary   message   can   a   child   transmit   that   an   adult  
fails   to   impart?   How   convincing   is   the   child   narrator   and   to   what   extent   do   child  
narrators   need   to   be   convincing   in   order   to   transmit   a   particular   message   in   a  
novel?   If   we   assume   that   Socrates’   observation   that   children   are   obstreperous   and  
that   they   ‘love   chatter   in   place   of   exercise’   is   accurate,   then   an   author   is   right   in  
choosing   a   child   as   the   narrator   of   his   story,   because   according   to   Socrates,  
children   love   to   voice   their   opinion   and   monopolize   discussions   anyway.  
Consequently,  if  we  assume  that  Socrates’  observation  is  accurate,  we  have  already  
identified  one  advantage  that  can  encourage  an  author  to  opt  for  a  child  narrator.  
Of   course,   this   train   of   thought   is   not   meant   to   be   taken   at   face   value,   but   this   kind  
of  reasoning  indicates  that,  in  the  following  literary  analysis,  I  am  going  to  discuss  
the   questions   mentioned   above   and   define   further   aspects   of   the   child   narrator’s  
attraction  more  in  detail.  
The   preceding   questions   make   sense   in   themselves,   but   then,   why   write  
about   the   topic   of   child   narrators   in   adult   literature?   How   come   that   I   have   chosen  
that  topic  for  my  research?  At  the  very  beginning  of  each  undertaking,  be  it  reading  
a  book,  doing  research,  spending  the  day  outdoors  or  preparing  language  classes,  
there   is   a   core   motive   that   spurs   us   on   as   human   beings   and   that   helps   us   to  
continue  our  project  until  we  realize  our  goal  or  satisfy  our  needs.  There  are  plenty  
of  interesting  topics  to  write  about  and  it  was  a  personal  challenge  to  find  a  project  
that   would   capture   my   writing   interest   for   a   longer   period   of   time.   Consequently,   I  
have   decided   to   write   about   a   subject   matter   that   involves   a   personal   interest   of  
mine   and   I   have   managed   to   pin   down   three   major   motives   that   have   led   to   the  
analysis  of  the  topic  at  hand:    
First  of  all,  reading  books  with  a  child  character  is  my  personal  preference.  
Child   narrators   manage   to   keep   the   novel’s   tone   light-­‐hearted   and   buoyant,   even   if  

 10  
 

the   story’s   topic   is   a   serious   matter,   like   violence,   abuse   or   financial   hardship.  
Where  exactly  this  cheerfulness  in  novels  told  by  a  child  narrator  stems  from  and  
how   the   author   manages   to   maintain   the   same   bright   tone   throughout   the   novel   is  
one  of  the  questions  that  I  am  going  to  have  a  look  at.  
Another   special   aspect   that   I   like   about   novels   featuring   child   narrators   is  
that   the   plot   and   characters   of   these   novels   are   just   as   complex   and   challenging   as  
those  of  any  other  genre,  but  the  energy  and  vitality  of  the  young  narrator  seems  to  
electrify  the  reader  and  spur  the  reading  process  on.  Of  course,  there  are  also  adult  
characters,   which   disperse   an   equal   amount   of   ‘joie   de   vivre,’   but   listening   to   child  
narrators  admiring  their  surrounding  propels  the  reader  into  a  time  period  when  
he  was  still  a  child  without  a  care  in  the  world.  Whether  this  carefree  sensation  is  
created   in   the   majority   of   cases,   when   a   youngster   narrates   a   story,   or   whether  
that  has  just  been  the  case  with  those  books  I  have  read  so  far  will  as  well  be  at  the  
core  of  the  following  research.  
Finally,   the   stories   told   by   child   narrators   that   I   have   come   across   include  
drawings   or   pictures,   which   makes   the   books   interesting   on   a   secondary,   non-­‐
literary   level.   In   The   Curious   Incident   of   the   Dog   at   Night-­Time   (2003),   by   Mark  
Haddon   or   in   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close   (2005),   by   Jonathan   Safran   Foer  
pictures  accompany  the  text.  On  the  one  hand,  the  pictures  lighten  up  the  reading  
process,   because   the   illustrations   allow   the   reader   to   pause   for   a   minute   and   to  
digest   the   text,   before   reading   on.   On   the   other   hand,   the   visual   material   is   more  
than   an   accessory,   because   the   pictures   promote   the   text’s   message   on   an  
additional  level,  by  drawing  the  reader’s  attention  to  the  text  in  different  ways  and  
by  repeatedly  illustrating  the  same  idea,  which  forces  him  to  think  about  the  text  
more  in  depth.  
In   the   two   texts   mentioned   above,   the   illustrations   included   are   meant   to  
represent  the  child’s  point  of  view,  which  allows  the  reader  to  view  the  text  from  a  
different   perspective   than   what   the   reader   had   been   imagining   at   the   beginning   of  
the   reading   process.   The   following   core   questions   come   to   mind   when   we   come   to  
think  of  visual  material  in  fiction:  Does  the  type  of  visual  material  that  an  author  
chooses   for   his   novel   depend   on   the   narrator’s   character?   Does   the   visual   material  
change  depending  on  the  narrator’s  age  and  function?  And  finally,  does  the  reader  
sense   the   author   as   the   selector   of   the   images   or   does   the   reader   feel   as   if   he   is  

  11  
 

confronted  with  a  child’s  point  of  view?  The  following  research  is   going  to  include  
an  analysis  of  the  importance  and  impact  of  visual  material  in  literature.  
Apart   from   the   fact   that   I   enjoy   reading   novels   with   child   narrators   that  
include   pictures,   there   is   also   the   idea   that   one   premise   for   writing   this   thesis   was  
to   discuss   a   literary   topic   that   has   been   devoid   of   overt   analysis   to   date.   The   thesis  
at  hand  would  not  merit  the  title  of  research  paper,  if  it  dealt  with  a  literary  aspect  
that   has   already   been   widely   covered   and   examined   by   previous   authors.   Critics  
and   analysts   have   attributed   little   attention   to   the   function   of   child   narrators   in  
adult  literature  up  to  now.  Consequently,  this  field  of  research  offers  the  possibility  
for  original  in-­‐depth  analysis  and  discussion.  
Finally,   apart   from   writing   about   literature,   I   am   primarily   an   English  
language   teacher.   So,   to   me   as   an   educator,   it   is   of   interest   to   see,   how   young  
people  are  portrayed  in  adult  literature.  Do  some  adults  take  their  cynical  view  of  
children  from  the  books  they  read  or  does  literature  disseminate  a  more  positive  
portrait  of  the  child?  To  what  extent  can  one  say  that  literature  reflects  the  general  
social  attitude  of  the  time,  when  the  novel  was  written?  
Additionally,  is  there  such  a  literary  device  as  a  stereotypical  child  narrator,  
or  are  all  narrators,  even  if  they  share  the  aspect  that  they  are  children,  completely  
different  and  independent  characters?  
In   the   end,   I   am   going   to   have   a   look   at   the   complex   idea   if   the   author’s  
background   and   social   environment   influence   the   way   he   portrays   his   child  
characters.   When   was   the   concept   of   child   character   created   and   what   was   the  
corresponding  social  situation  of  the  child  like  at  that  point  in  time?  
It  is  clear  that  it  is  my  aim  to  look  at  the  concept  of  child  narrators  from  as  
many  different  aspects  as  possible.  Identifying  the  necessary  research  features  and  
understanding   them   in   singular   ways   was   one   of   the   envisaged   study   challenges  
that  I  need  to  overcome.  
At   the   beginning   of   my   analysis,   in   order   to   facilitate   understanding  
between   me,   as   the   writer   of   the   present   thesis,   and   my   readers,   I   am   going   to  
discuss   and   define   the   concepts   of   ‘child,’   ‘narrator,’   and   of   ‘adult   literature,’   as   I  
understand  and  interpret  those  notions.  Yet,  before  I  can  outline  the  key  ideas  of  
the   research   paper   at   hand,   I   am   going   to   delineate   the   research   methodology   of  
my  thesis  and  grant  my  readers  a  brief  overall  glance  at  the  ideas  to  come.  

 12  
 

1.2.  Research  Methodology  


First,   in   order   to   structure   my   thesis,   I   am   going   to   gather   data   about   other  
researchers’   thoughts   and   texts   that   they   have   written   about   the   topic   of   child  
narrators.   What   are,   in   other   critics’   opinion,   the   advantages   of   having   a   child  
narrator   at   the   centre   of   a   story?   What   are   the   literary   shortcomings?   It   was   a  
challenge   to   find   secondary   literature   that   fits   my   topic.   Of   course,   there   is  
secondary   literature   that   deals   with   novels   like   The   Bluest   Eye   (1970),   by   Toni  
Morrison   or   To   Kill   a   Mockingbird   (1960),   by   Harper   Lee.   These   novels   also   star  
child  narrators,  but  the  critical  analysis  related  to  these  texts  generally  focuses  on  
broader  social  issues  like  racism,  violence,  or  abuse,  rather  than  looking  at  the  role  
of  the  child  and  on  his  function  as  the  narrator  of  the  story.  
However,  there  is  secondary  literature  portraying  the  social  role  of  the  child  
throughout   the   centuries.   My   analysis   of   the   change   in   the   child’s   status   in   society,  
from   the   17th   century   to   the   present,   leads   to   the   explanation   of   why   the   child   is  
treated  in  fiction  the  way  he  or  she  nowadays  is.  
Following  my  analysis  of  secondary  literature  there  will  be  a  discussion  and  
weighing  of  advantages  and  disadvantages  for  reader,  author  and  children,  when  a  
narrative  is  told  from  a  child’s  perspective.  I  am  going  to  have  a  closer  look  at  two  
novels  in  more  detail.  I  am  going  to  analyze  The  Life  Before  Us,  by  the  French  writer  
Romain  Gary  and  the  more  recent  novel  Extremely  Loud  and  Incredibly  Close,  by  the  
young   American   writer   Jonathan   Safran   Foer.   I   have   chosen   to   write   about   and  
compare   these   two   novels,   because   they   stem   from   different   time   periods   and  
these   two   texts   are   creations   by   authors   from   different   social   and   cultural  
backgrounds.   If   I   want   to   figure   out,   if   there   is   such   a   literary   device   as   a  
stereotypical   child   narrator,   I   need   to   distinguish,   if   that   device   has   emerged   at  
some  point  in  time  and  stayed  the  same,  or  if  the  child  narrator  has  evolved  over  
time   and   mirrors   society’s   attitude   towards   children.   There   are   other  
contemporary   novels   featuring   child   narrators,   like   When   We   Were   Romans,   by  
Matthew   Kneale,   or   The   Curious   Incident   of   the   Dog   in   the   Night-­Time,   by   Mark  
Haddon,  or  the  Adrian  Mole  series  (1982),  by  Sue  Townsend.  However,  I  wanted  to  
analyze  a  novel  that  discusses  a  challenging  situation  from  a  child’s  point  of  view.  
The  three  foregoing  novels  though,  primarily  centre  on  family  relationships,  rather  
than  on  large-­‐scale  social  issues.  
  13  
 

Additionally,   Mark   Haddon   has   decided   that   his   child   narrator   has  
Asperger’s   Syndrome.   The   author   can   use   the   narrator’s   level   of   mental  
development   and   understanding,   in   order   to   explain   incoherent   or   inconsistent  
child   behaviour.   Mark   Haddon’s   character   is   not   meant   to   be   an   authentic   child  
character,  because  his  situation  is  different  from  that  of  average  children.  Yet,  since  
I   wanted   to   compare,   how   and   to   what   extent   authors   create,   or   want   to   create,  
common   child   figures   as   the   narrators   of   their   stories,   I   have   decided   to   opt   for  
Jonathan  Safran  Foer’s  novel  and  for  Romain  Gary’s  text.  
At   the   onset   of   my   research,   I   wanted   to   include   the   in-­‐depth   analysis   of  
three   or   four   different   novels,   stretching   over   a   broader   time   period.   However,  
analyzing   a   broader   variety   of   novels   would   have   come   at   the   expense   of   thorough  
analysis  of  the  two  texts  that  I  have  finally  selected  as  the  basis  for  my  thesis  and  
which,  in  my  opinion,  merit  full  concentration.  
At  last,  in  order  to  keep  my  research  and  analysis  interesting  for  myself  and  
for  the  reader,  I  am  going  to  focus  on  different  social  topics  within  each  book.  The  
child   narrators   are   relating   their   lives   and   commenting   on   their   everyday  
experiences,   but   at   the   same   time,   the   main   characters   also   uncover   and   portray  
more  general  social  issues.  I  am  therefore  going  to  highlight  a  selection  of  central  
topics  that  the  child  narrators  stir  up  in  each  novel  and  I  am  going  to  have  a  look  at  
the   way   the   child   narrators   expose   and   assimilate   these   social   concerns   in   relation  
to  their  childlike  worldview.  
The  detailed  analysis  of  the  two  novels  leads  to  a  general  comparison  of  the  
discussed  texts,  in  order  to  come  to  a  common  conclusion.  Is  there  such  a  literary  
device  as  the  stereotypical  child  narrator  or  do  all  child  characters  differ  according  
to  their  authors’  backgrounds  and  literary  style?  I  expect  the  novels’  general  issues  
to   differ   greatly,   because   of   the   difference   in   the   authors’   main   social   concerns.  
However,   some   fundamental   aspects   of   the   social   problems   that   exist   between  
adults   and   children   have   barely   changed   throughout   the   ages.   Consequently,   the  
two   novels   might   also   display   similarities.   The   thesis’   conclusion   will   be   a  
discussion  of  similarities  and  divergences  in  books  featuring  child  narrators.  
Finally,  in  order  to  structure  my  analysis  and  to  include  an  important  aspect  
of   21st   century   thinking,   I   have   decided   to   work   with   Edward   de   Bono’s   concept   of  
the   ‘Six   Thinking   Hats’.   I   am   going   to   look   at   the   idea   of   child   narrators   from   six  

 14  
 

different   perspectives   (factual,   emotional,   critical,   general,   positive,   creative).  


Edward   de   Bono’s   strategy   allows   me   to   look   at   one   and   the   same   topic   from  
different  perspectives,  including  those  outlooks  that  are  more  challenging  and  that  
do  not  seem  to  fit  my  analysis  at  first  sight.  
Of  course,  in  order  to  apply  Edward  de  Bono’s  strategy  to  its  fullest,  I  would  
need   to   discuss   each   aspect   from   all   six   perspectives.   However,   in   order   to  
condense  my  thesis,  I  am  going  to  apply  the  concept  to  my  overall  discussion  and  
look   at   parts   of   my   research   paper   from   the   prospect   of   a   specific   thinking   hat:  
looking   at   key   definitions   takes,   for   example,   place   under   the   light   of   factual  
thinking,   whereas   analyzing   the   shortcomings   of   writing   a   novel   from   a   child’s  
perspective  is  a  case  for  the  critical  thinking  hat.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

  15  
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 16  
 

2.  Factual  Thinking:  Key  Definitions  

2.1.  Narrator  and  Reader  


Whenever   we   start   reading   a   novel,   we   know   after   the   first   few   lines   already,  
whether   we   like   the   narrator   or   not.   The   narrator   is   the   novel’s   second   central  
figure,   sometimes   sharing   the   same   level   of   importance   as   the   main   character.  
There   are   different   types   of   narrators,   depending   on   whether   the   narrator   and   the  
main  character  are  one  and  the  same  person  or  not,  or  whether  the  narrator  is  a  
passive   observer,   who   describes   the   events   in   the   story,   or   whether   he   is   also   a  
commentator  on  and  critic  of  the  situation.  
If  the  narrator  and  the  main   character   are   two   distinct   people,   then   we   talk  
of   a   ‘peripheral   narrator.’   The   peripheral   narrator   observes   the   protagonist   and  
outlines   the   actions   and   role   of   the   story’s   central   figure.   Having   a   peripheral  
narrator  tell  the  story  allows  the  author  to  present  a  number  of  facts  to  his  readers.  
These   elements   are   devoid   of   the   main   character’s   emotions,   because   the  
peripheral   narrator   comments   on   the   actions   of   the   main   character,   without   any  
first  hand  information  on  their  internal  emotions,  which  motivate  the  protagonist’s  
behaviour.   On   the   one   hand,   this   literary   tool   is   favourable,   because   pure  
observation   gives   the   reader   an   unbiased   and   unemotional   overview   of   the  
character’s  situation.  The  reader  is  free  to  construct  his  own  understanding  of  the  
characters’   actions   and   to   interpret   the   figures’   behaviour   according   to   his   own  
worldview,  as  the  reader  of  the  story.  
On   the   other   hand,   emotions   are   the   fuel   that   motivates   people’s   actions.  
Consequently,  when  the  reader  wants  to  interpret  the  characters’  actions,  despite  
the   fact   that   the   reader   does   not   know   anything   about   the   characters’   emotional  
world,  then  the  reader  lacks  a  crucial  dimension  that  is  necessary  for  deciphering  a  
novel’s  message.  According  to  Vogrin  Valerie,  ‘things  look  different,  depending  on  
who   is   doing   the   looking   and   what   their   vantage   point   is.   Points   of   view,   like  
microscopes  and  telescopes,  can  reveal  things  ordinarily  unseen.’11  If  the  narrator  
is   also   the   main   character,   then   he   can   reveal   the   events   on   the   outside,   but   also  
display  his  internal  micro-­‐cosmos  to  the  reader.  Valerie  Vogrin’s  comment  points  
                                                                                                               
11  Vogrin,  Valerie.  “Point  of  View:  The  Complete  Menu,”  in  Alexander  Steele.  Gotham  Writer’s  

Workshop:  Writing  Fiction  –  The  Practical  Guide  from  New  York’s  acclaimed  Creative  Writing  School.  
N.Y.:  Bloomsbury.  2003,  78  -­‐  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (VV).  
  17  
 

out   the   distinct   problem   generated   by   a   peripheral   narrator,   which   is   the   idea   that  
the  peripheral  narrator  observes  and  comments  on  another  character’s  life.  Unless  
observer   and   observed   are   identical,   there   is   a   substantial   part   in   the   main  
character’s  life  that  the  peripheral  narrator  misses  out  on  and  which  he  is  unable  
to  comment  on  or  to  relate  to.  This  lack  of  information  generates  the  risk  that  the  
peripheral   narrator   invents   parts   of   the   story,   in   order   to   construct   and  
complement   his   own   interpretation   of   the   tale.   In   a   way,   the   reader   urges   the  
narrator   to   line   his   story   with   a   continuous   stream   of   information,   or   the   reader   is  
left  wondering  what  the  main  character  is  up  to,  when  he  is  unobserved.  Of  course,  
the  lack  of  information  brings  about  a  degree  of  suspense  and  opens  up  space  for  
the   reader’s   imagination   and   interpretation.   In   that   case,   it   makes   sense   that   the  
author   uses   a   peripheral   narrator   if   he   wants   to   challenge   the   reader’s   creative  
capacity  and  if  the  author  is  more  concerned  with  the  reader’s  own  interpretation  
of  the  story,  than  with  the  transmission  of  a  specific  message.  
Additionally,   Valerie   Vogrin   points   out   that   it   also   depends   on   the  
‘narrator’s  vantage  point,’  which  information  the  narrator  is  willing  to  transmit.  If  
the   peripheral   narrator   wants   to   omit   information,   he   is   in   a   much   more  
favourable   situation   to   do   so,   because   the   peripheral   narrator   can   always   argue  
that   he   missed   out   on   certain   information   or   that   he   could   not   uninterruptedly  
observe  the  story’s  characters.  
On   the   other   hand,   the   peripheral   narrator   misses   out   on   a   lot   of  
information  anyway,  because  of  his  restricted  outlook  on  the  characters.  So  if  the  
narrator  deliberately  cuts  out  even  more  information,  because  he  intends  to  omit  
specific   information,   then   the   narrator   needs   to   invent   more,   in   order   to   add  
padding  to  his  story.  
Elinor   Ochs   adds   that   ‘while   differing   in   complexity   and   circumstance,  
narratives   transform   life’s   journeys   into   sequences   of   events   and   evoke   shifting  
and   enduring   perspectives   on   experience’   (EO   20).   Elinor   Ochs   is   right   when   she  
points  out  that  each  narrative  differs  in  complexity,  because  the  level  of  complexity  
depends   on   the   constructor   of   the   narrative,   but   also   on   the   receiver’s  
receptiveness.  A  single  photograph  is  a  basic  visual  narrative,  which  is  at  first  sight  
not  very  complex.  The  photographer  is  the  person,  who  squeezes  the  background  
narrative   into   a   condensed   shape.   The   fact   that   a   photograph   is   the   compressed  

 18  
 

form   of   a   narrative   explains   the   idea   that   the   photograph,   or   basic   narrative,   can  
again   be   unpacked   and   reverted   to   its   previous   complexity,   if   necessary,   because  
something  that  exists  in  a  restricted  form  can  generally  be  expanded.  
Moreover,   a   narrative   manages   to   give   shape   to   an   occurrence   and   to  
lastingly   fix   events   and   experiences   in   time.   Yet,   even   if   an   experience   has   been  
made,   processed,   captured   and   even   recorded,   then   an   experience   still   remains  
fleeting   and   alters   its   shape,   because   people’s   memory   is   unstable   and   the   way   we  
interpret  any  experience  depends  on  the  current  mood  we  are  in,  when  we  make  
an  experience  and  also  on  the  mood  we  are  in,  when  we  are  revisiting,  discussing  
or  analyzing  an  experience.  
Additionally,   each   individual   identity   is   shifting   and   fleeting   too,   which  
means   that   with   each   identity   a   person   adopts,   his   view   on   the   world   and   his  
capacity   for   interpretation   alter   as   well.   In   the   end,   the   interpretation   of   each  
experience   is   the   interpretation   of   a   memory   of   that   same   experience.  
Consequently,   a   narrative   alters   its   focus,   depending   on   the   narrator’s   current  
personal  emphasis.  Yet,  Judith  A.  Howard  explains  that  
 
”identity”   is   a   keyword   of   contemporary   society   and   a   central   focus   of   social  
psychological  theorizing  and  research.  At  earlier  historical  moments,  identity  was  
not   so   much   an   issue;   when   societies   were   more   stable,   identity   was   to   a   great  
extent   assigned,   rather   than   selected   or   adopted.   In   current   times,   however,   the  
concept   of   identity   carries   the   full   weight   of   the   need   for   a   sense   of   who   one   is,  
together   with   an   often   overwhelming   pace   of   change   in   surrounding   social  
contexts.12  
 
Consequently,   people’s   desire   to   define   who   they   essentially   are   brings   about   an  
equal   desire   for   self-­‐reflection   and   personal   narration.   Thus,   narratives   are   a  
modern   way   of   capturing   an   experience   that   would   otherwise   have   been   lost   for  
future   comparison   and   analysis.   Each   individual   turns   into   the   narrator   of   his   own  
story   and   at   times,   this   narrator   is   peripheral,   because   as   far   as   the   people  
surrounding   the   self   are   concerned,   each   individual   can   only   observe   the  
surrounding  actions,  but  is  denied  full  control.  
Moreover,   in   terms   of   narrator   types,   M.H.   Abrams   additionally   identifies  
the  third-­‐person  narrator  as  a  common  literary  device,  which  is  a  slight  variation  

                                                                                                               
12  Howard,  Judith  A.  “Social  Psychology  of  Identities.”  Annual  Review  of  Sociology  26  (2000):  367-­‐

393,  367.  
  19  
 

from   the   peripheral   narrator:   ‘in   a   third-­‐person   narrative,   the   narrator   is   someone  
outside  the  story  proper  who  refers  to  all  the  characters  in  the  story  by  name,  or  as  
“he,”   “she,”   and   “they.”’13   Furthermore,   the   third-­‐person   narrator   is   commonly  
omniscient,   which   accounts   for   the   difference   between   peripheral   and   third-­‐
person   narrator.   M.H.   Abrams   suggests   that   the   third-­‐person   narrator   is   the  
‘intrusive   narrator   [;   the   one]   who   not   only   reports,   but   also   comments   on   and  
evaluates   the   actions   and   motives   of   the   characters,   and   sometimes   expresses  
personal   views   about   human   life   in   general’   (MHA   232).   M.H.   Abrams’   statement  
indicates   that   evaluating   and   commenting   on   events   in   a   story   is   an   exclusive  
device,  which  is  reserved  for  the  third-­‐person  narrator.  
However,   any   narrator   comments   on   and   evaluates   the   events   and  
characters   in   a   story.   The   peripheral   narrator,   for   example,   is   meant   to   remain  
without   commenting   on   the   main   character’s   feelings   and   emotions,   because   he  
does  not  know  about  them.  Yet,  the  impossibility  to  comment  is  also  a  statement  in  
itself:   the   fact   that   the   peripheral   narrator   may   be   absent   during   important   events  
in   the   story   indicates   that   the   characters   prefer   to   remain   unobserved   in   certain  
situations,   which   leads   the   reader   to   come   to   a   personal   conclusion.   In   this  
scenario,  the  peripheral  narrator  unintentionally  evaluates  the  characters’  attitude  
and  behaviour.  
M.H.  Abrams  continues  to  say  that  ‘most  works  are  written  according  to  the  
convention   that   the   omniscient   narrator’s   reports   and   judgments   are   to   be   taken  
as  authoritative  by  the  reader,  and  so  serve  to  establish  what  counts  as  true  facts  
and  values  within  the  fictional  world’  (MHA  232).  On  a  first  level,  the  reader  needs  to  
take   every   narrator’s   testimony   at   face   value,   because   that   report   is   the   only  
information   that   the   reader   has.   Yet,   as   the   story   progresses,   the   reader  
consciously  or  unconsciously  constructs  his  own  opinion  in  relation  to  the  story’s  
development   and   to   the   characters’   behaviour   and   attitude.   What   the   narrator  
relates  to  is  his  individual  truth  and  own  perception  of  the  events  at  hand.  Still,  the  
reader   is   in   the   position   to   assemble   his   own   interpretation   of   the   displayed,   so  
called,   facts.   In   his   conclusions,   M.H.   Abrams   acknowledges   that   ‘the   omniscient  
narrator  may  choose  to  be  unintrusive’  (MHA  232),  which  means  that  the  omniscient  

                                                                                                               
13   Abrams,   M.H.   A   Glossary   of   Literary   Terms   (7th   edition).   Boston:   Heinle   &   Heinle.   1999,   232   –  

Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (MHA).  


 20  
 

narrator   may   chose   to   relate   the   facts   without   any   judgment.   In   that   case,   the  
third-­‐person   narrator   can   provide   the   reader   with   more   detailed   information   than  
the  peripheral  narrator,  but  the  problem  of  the  information  that  remains  detained  
stays  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  the  peripheral  narrator:  those  things  that  remain  
uncommented  speak  for  themselves  and  guide  the  reader’s  judgment,  whether  that  
is  the  author’s  or  the  character’s  primary  intention  or  not.  
Whereas   the   peripheral   narrator   observes   and   comments   on   what   he  
actually   witnesses,   the   third-­‐person   narrator   is   on   top   of   what   is   going   on   in   the  
story   and   is   informed   or   supposed   to   be   clued-­‐up.   Yet,   whether   the   narrator  
imparts  his  knowledge  and  shares  his  observations  with  the  reader  or  not,  remains  
up   to   the   narrator.   Here   we   can   mention   Valérie   Vogrin’s   comment   again   which  
says   that   it   depends   on   the   narrator’s   ‘vantage   point,’   which   information   he   shares  
with  the  reader  and  which  light  he  sheds  on  the  story’s  events.  
Having  a  child  character  as  third-­‐person  narrator  or  as  peripheral  narrator  
is   more   challenging   for   the   reader   than   being   faced   with   an   adult   narrator.   The  
child   narrator   relates   the   facts   differently   than   an   adult,   because   a   child’s   focal  
points   or   interests   differ   from   that   of   grown-­‐ups.   When   a   story   has   a   peripheral  
child   narrator,   then   the   reader   needs   to   convert   the   narrator’s   child   reality   into   an  
adult   truth.   Of   course,   the   author   could   also   render   the   child   more   mature   and   put  
the   words   of   a   grown-­‐up   into   his   narrator’s   mouth.   However,   in   that   case,   the  
peripheral   narrator   becomes   a   third-­‐person   narrator,   who   is   involved   in   the   story,  
because   he   has   the   ability   to   comment   on   the   story.   This   association   takes   away  
the   narrator’s   position   as   mere   observer   and   draws   the   character   into   the   focal  
point  of  the  reader’s  attention,  because  the  reader  instinctively  wants  to  compare  
his  interpretation  of  the  characters’  behaviour  to  someone  else’s,  even  if  it  is  just  
the  narrator’s  understanding  of  the  story.  
Another  literary  device,  which  is  crucial  for  our  thesis  at  hand,  is  the  first-­‐
person   narrator.   When   the   author   selects   a   first-­‐person   narrator,   the   story   turns  
into  a  ‘narrative  of  self-­‐interest,’  where  the  narrator  focuses  on  his  own  life-­‐story  
and   makes   his   existence   the   subject   of   interest   for   a   whole   readership.   M.H.  
Abrams  explains  that  ‘in  a  first-­‐person  narrative,  the  narrator  speaks  as  “I”’   (MHA  

  21  
 

231).   He   is   the   ‘reader’s   means   of   perception’14   and   the   central   character   of   the  

story.   In   a   novel   with   a   first-­‐person   narrator,   the   main   character   develops   his  
experience  in  and  understanding  of  life,  as  described  in  the  novel,  simultaneously  
with  the  reader.  In  this  case  the  stream-­‐of-­‐consciousness  technique,  ‘in  which  we  
are   presented   with   outer   observations   only   as   they   impinge   on   the   continuous  
current   of   thought,   memory,   feelings,   and   associations   which   constitute   a  
particular  observer’s  total  awareness’   (MHA   233),  comes  to  play  a  role.  The  reader  
sees   and   feels   simultaneously   with   the   narrator.   Each   observation   furthers   the  
narrator’s  and  the  reader’s  understanding  of  the  incidents  in  the  novel  and  in  the  
lives   of   the   characters.   There   are   outer   observations   that   the   narrator   comments  
on,  but  there  are  also  other  events  that  happen  at  the  same  time  as  the  observed  
event,   but   which   remain   unnoticed   or   uncommented.   Yet,   these   undisputed  
incidents   contribute   to   the   later   development   of   the   story   nevertheless,   even   if   the  
narrator  does  not  want  to  discuss  them.  
On   the   other   hand,   the   narrator   can   refrain   from   discussing   additional  
events,   because   they   are   especially   important   for   the   later   development   of   the  
story.  Even  a  first  person  narrator  chooses,  which  elements  or  events  he  wants  to  
integrate   in   his   story   and   which   he   wants   to   leave   undiscussed.   Before   we   have  
said  that  the  reader  develops  his  understanding  of  the  story  simultaneously  with  
the   narrator.   However,   what   the   first-­‐person   narrator   tells   the   reader   is   only   a  
selection   of   the   things,   people,   and   experiences   the   narrator   makes.   Thus,   the  
narrator  remains  in  a  superior  position  in  relation  to  the  reader,  at  least  in  terms  
of  the  information  he  can  access  and  process.  
Having   pointed   out   the   different   roles   and   situations   of   the   narrator,   we  
need  to  stress  that  the  narrator  or  the  central  character  plays  a  crucial  role  in  the  
attraction   that   a   text   exerts   on   its   readers.   The   narrator’s   likeability   renders   the  
novel  a  success  or  a  failure.  Vogrin  Valerie  points  out  that  ‘more  than  anything  else,  
the  point  of  view  you  choose  for  your  story  or  novel  will  affect  the  way  the  readers  
respond   emotionally   to   your   characters   and   their   actions’   (AS   p.77).   The  
appreciation   and   sympathy   between   narrator   and   reader   depends   on   the  
narrator’s   and   also   on   the   reader’s   character.   Either   the   narrator   is   completely  
                                                                                                               
14  Steele,  Alexander.  Gotham  Writer’s  Workshop:  Writing  Fiction  –  The  Practical  Guide  from  New  

York’s  acclaimed  Creative  Writing  School.  N.Y.:  Bloomsbury.  2003,  79  –  Further  references  are  
included  in  the  text  (AS).  
 22  
 

different  from  the  reader  in  attitude  and  style,  then  the  reader  might  want  to  listen  
to   the   narrator   in   order   to   be   confronted   with   a   world   view   that   completely  
different   to   his   own;   or   a   narrator   operates   on   the   same   wavelength   as   the   reader.  
In   that   case   the   reader-­‐narrator-­‐relationship   can   also   be   a   success,   because   the  
reader   finds   it   comfortable   to   follow   the   reading   process,   since   the   discussed  
challenges  and  emotions  are  familiar  to  him.  Helena  Schneider  sums  up  that  
 
die   Autentizität   personalen   Erzählverhaltens   hat   darüber   hinaus   einen   ganz  
bestimmten   Effekt   auf   den   Leser.   Je   besser   dieser   nämlich   über   das   Innenleben  
einer  Figur  Bescheid  weiss  und  je  echter  diese  Gefühls-­‐  und  Gedankenwelt  auf  ihn  
wirkt,  desto  grösser  ist  aller  Wahrscheinlichkeit  nach  auch  seine  Sympathie  für  die  
jeweilige  Figur  sowie  das  Verständnis,  das  er  dieser  entgegenbringt.15  
 
The  narrator’s  likeability  depends  on  the  one  hand,  on  the  character’s  closeness  or  
distance   to   the   reader.   Yet,   Helena   Schneider   argues   that   on   the   other   hand,   the  
effect  the  narrator  creates  also  depends  on  the  character’s  authenticity.  The  more  
coherent  a  character  is  in  his  actions  and  assertions,  the  better  a  reader  receives  
him.   This   reaction   is   only   natural,   since   the   reader   wants   to   identify   with   the  
narrator  and  to  understand  his  evolution.  So,  if  the  narrator  is  a  person  of  integrity,  
then   the   reader   feels   closer   to   the   narrator,   because   the   narrator   becomes   a  
predictable  figure  and  the  reader  can  understand  him  more  easily.  
In   contrast,   even   if   the   narrator   remains   unpredictable,   then   the   reader   can  
accept   this   situation,   if   the   narrator   is   consistently   unpredictable.   The   narrator’s  
predictability   allows   the   reader   to   get   closely   involved   in   the   story   and   to   start  
guessing   beforehand,   how   the   narrative   will   continue.   The   narrator’s  
unpredictability   renders   the   novel   attractive   to   the   reader,   because   the   narrator  
nourishes   a   certain   level   of   suspense   all   throughout   the   story.   Consequently,   the  
two,   a   narrator’s   predictability   or   unpredictability,   render   the   narrator   likeable,   as  
long  as  the  narrator  is  consistent  in  his  approach  or  in  his  self-­‐portrayal.  
Alexander  Chester  defines  sympathy  as  ‘a  sharing  of  the  joy  or  sorrow  that  
another  feels.  At  least  it  leads  to  an  understanding  of  the  other  and  consequently  
tends   to   bring   personalities   into   closer   social   interaction.’16   On   the   one   hand,  

                                                                                                               
15  Schneider,  Helena.  Harper  Lee  “To  Kill  a  Mockingbird”  (1960)  –  Die  Perspektive  des  Kindes.  

Nordherderstedt:  GRIN  Verlag.  2004,  43  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (HS).  
16  Chester,  Alexander.  “Antipathy  and  Social  Behavior.”  The  American  Journal  of  Sociology  51.4  (Jan.  

1946):  288-­‐292,  290.  


  23  
 

Alexander  Chester  is  right,  because  each  confrontation  between  characters  brings  
those  people  intentionally  or  unintentionally  closer  together.  Yet,  if  a  person  feels  
sympathy   when   dealing   with   the   sorrows   of   another   person,   then   this   initial  
positive   sharing   of   emotions   can   also   turn   into   a   feeling   of   superiority.   When   a  
novel’s  character  is  in  distress,  then  the  reader  can  feel  sympathy  on  the  one  hand,  
yet  he  can  also  experience  a  feeling  of  superior  joy,  because  he  remains  unattained  
by   the   character’s   suffering.   Of   course,   in   the   end,   the   two   situations,   a   feeling   of  
superiority  or  genuine  sympathy,  can  lead  to  the  reader  being  positively  attracted  
to   the   narrator   or   main   character,   because   reader   and   narrator   have   shared   or  
witnessed  a  common  experience  that  links  them  together.  
In  contrast,  Sophie  Bryant  argues  that  
 
there  is  a  pseudo-­‐sympathy  which  consists  in  the  arbitrary  projection  of  one’s  own  
joys,   sorrows,   and   virtues   into   another   mind,   […]   Similarly,   there   is   a   pseudo-­‐
antipathy,  [when]  we  ascribe  [to  the  narrator  or  character]  our  own  defects,  and,  
in  proportion  as  we  abhor  them,  the  abhorrence  is  transferred  to  him.17  
 
What  Sophie  Bryant  means  is  that  the  reader  manages  to  understand  the  narrator  
the  way  he  wants  to  understand  him.  The  narrator  becomes  what  the  reader  wants  
him   to   be.   When   the   reader   is   in   a   provocative   mood,   then   challenging   the  
narrator’s   reality   and   way   of   expressions   turns   into   the   reader’s   focal   point.  
Additionally,   if   the   reader   finds   it   hard   to   come   to   terms   with   certain   personal  
character   traits,   then   the   reader   more   readily   notices   these   features   in   a   novel’s  
characters   or   in   the   narrator.   Sophie   Bryant   argues   that   there   is   a   growing  
antipathy,   if   a   figure   displays   character   traits   that   one   personally   rejects.   Yet,  
growing   sympathy   between   reader   and   character   can   also   result   out   of   initial  
rejection,  because  the  reader  learns  how  to  handle  challenging  character  traits,  by  
observing  or  reading  about  other  people  dealing  with  personal  shortcomings.  
Moreover,   the   narrator’s   tone   of   voice   triggers   the   reader’s   sympathy   for  
the   novel’s   characters.   The   stories   we   are   going   to   analyze   are   narrated   by   child  
characters   and   accordingly,   we   assume   that   the   tone   of   voice   in   these   novels   is  
childlike  or  even  childish.  However,  we  need  to  keep  in  mind  that  the  narrator  is  
only   the   puppet   and   that   the   writer   is   the   puppeteer,   who   breathes   life   into   his  
characters  and  who  moulds  them.  Consequently,  it  is  the  writer’s  understanding  of  
                                                                                                               
17  Bryant,  Sophie.  “Antipathy  and  Sympathy.”  Mind,  New  Series  4.15  (Jul.  1895):  365-­‐370,  365.  

 24  
 

a  child  narrator,  which  defines  if  the  precocious  narrator  speaks  with  a  childlike  or  
childish   tone   of   voice   or   if   the   child   narrator   adopts   a   more   mature   way   of  
expression.   In   later   chapters,   we   are   going   to   analyze   the   advantages   and  
disadvantages  of  either  above-­‐mentioned  procedure.  Why  choose  a  child  character  
with   a   mature   tone   of   voice?   Why   not   an   adult   narrator   with   a   childlike   tone   of  
voice  or  vice-­‐versa?  
It  is  a  fact  though  that  the  reader  expects  a  certain  tone  of  voice  in  relation  
to   a   certain   type   of   narrator:   a   fifty   year   old   protagonist   is   supposed   to   sound  
different   from   a   child   narrator;   a   female   narrator   different   from   a   male   narrator.  
Yet,  these  expectations  of  idiosyncrasy  have  been  formed  by  the  reader’s  personal  
previous   experiences,   fictional   or   real.   If   we   have   just   read   books   by   precocious  
narrators,   who   talk   like   adults,   then   we   will   not   expect   child   narrators   to   have  
limited   vocabulary   resources   and   to   concoct   imaginary   worlds.   Though,   if   the  
reader   has   not   had   any   previous   experience,   then   childish   behaviour   and   a   self-­‐
indulgent   tone   of   voice   are   the   stereotypical   expectations   that   the   reader   has   in  
mind.  
Furthermore,  Therese  Fischer  argues  that  
 
the  narrator  can  be  described  in  terms  of  the  distance  he  holds  to  the  author,  [to  
the]   reader,   and   to   [the]   other   fictional   characters.   The   distance   can   be   moral,  
intellectual,   physical   (temporal,   spatial),   and   emotional,   and   can   vary   in   degree  
from  identification  to  opposition.18  
 
In   the   novels   I   am   going   to   analyze,   the   distance   between   reader   and   narrator  
adopts  at  first  sight  all  of  the  above-­‐mentioned  forms,  assuming  that  the  reader  is  
an   adult   and   the   narrator   a   child.   However,   the   distance   between   reader   and  
narrator  is  of  flexible  nature  and  varies  throughout  the  story.  First  of  all,  since  the  
two   novels   at   the   core   of   my   research   feature   child   narrators,   I   can   say   that   the  
children   grow   throughout   the   stories   and   their   understanding   of   the   world  
develops   too.   Of   course,   the   intellectual   distance   between   child   narrator   and  
reader  remains,  because  the  reader  also  grows  intellectually  by  reading  the  novel  
and   by   making   additional   real   life   experiences.   Consequently,   the   reader   stays  

                                                                                                               
18  Fischer,  Therese.  “From  Reliable  to  Unreliable  Narrator:  Rhetorical  Changes  in  Joyce’s  ‘The  

Sisters.’”  James  Joyce  Quarterly  9.1  (Fall  1971):  85-­‐92,  86  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  
text  (TF).  
  25  
 

intellectually   ahead   of   the   child.   However,   the   child’s   understanding   grows   more  
rapidly   than   the   adult   develops   his   worldview,   because   there   is   more   unfamiliar  
knowledge  that  a  child  can  assimilate.  The  adult  has  limited  access  to  completely  
new   material,   which   he   can   learn   from   and   so,   the   intellectual   space   between   child  
narrator   and   adult   reader   remains   established,   but   the   amount   of   distance   shifts  
constantly.    
Additionally,   the   emotional   distance   between   reader   and   narrator   also  
changes,  as  the  reading  process  advances.  Although  the  narrator  is  a  child,  and  by  
nature  has  little  in  common  with  the  adult  world,  the  reader  will  identify  more  and  
more   with   the   young   narrator   as   time   goes   by.   However,   the   age   of   a   novel’s  
character   is   of   secondary   interest,   when   it   comes   to   the   emotional   relationship   the  
reader   develops   in   relation   to   the   character.   Each   time   the   reader   picks   up   the  
novel,   it   is   as   if   he   returns   to   an   old   friend,   shares   in   and   deals   with   his   friend’s  
concerns  and  worries.  In  The  Life  Before  Us,  the  narrator  Momo  says:  ‘I  must  have  
been  seven  or  eight  at  the  time,  I  can’t  be  exactly  sure  because  I  wasn’t  dated,  as  
you’ll  see  when  we’re  better  acquainted  if  you  think  it’s  worth  your  trouble.’19  This  
quote  illustrates  that  authors  play  with  the  emotional  distance  between  reader  and  
narrator.   In   the   preceding   quote,   Momo   lures   the   reader   into   taking   emotionally  
part  in  the  story,  by  appealing  to  the  audience’s  compassion  and  sympathy.  A  child,  
who  does  not  know  how  old  it  is,  because  nobody  cares  enough  to  do  research  or  
to  tell  him,  appeals  to  the  reader’s  emotions.  The  emotional  relationship  between  
reader   and   narrator   gradually   develops,   independently   of   the   narrator’s   age.   Yet,  
Momo’s   case   illustrates   that   the   reader   feels   naturally   compelled   to   sympathize  
more  readily  with  a  child,  than  with  an  adult,  because  children  appeal  to  the  adult’s  
protective  instinct.  
Moreover,  Momo  reduces  the  distance  between  himself  and  the  reader,  by  
addressing  the  reader  directly.  In  an  additional  passage  Momo  says:    
 
He  came  from  Niger,  which  is  one  of  the  numerous  countries  they’ve  got  in  Africa,  
and   he   made   himself,   as   he   kept   telling   us.   “I’m   a   self-­‐made   man,”   he’d   say   with   his  
suit  and  diamond  rings.  He  had  one  on  each  finger  and  when  he  was  murdered  in  
the  Seine  they  cut  off  his  fingers  for  the  rings,  because  it  was  a  settling  of  accounts.  
I’m  telling  you  this  right  now  so  as  not  to  upset  you  later  on.  (RG  26)  

                                                                                                               
19  Gary,  Romain  (Emile  Ajar).  The  Life  Before  Us.  New  York:  New  Directions  Books.  1978,  3  –  Further  

references  are  included  in  the  text  (RG).  


 26  
 

 
Momo’s  immediate  address  puts  the  narrator  in  direct  contact  with  the  reader.  The  
reader   feels   valorised,   because   individually   spoken   to,   which   diminishes   the  
emotional   distance   between   reader   and   narrator.   The   narrator   is   aware   of   his   role  
as   a   storyteller,   which   is   positive   on   the   one   hand,   because   Momo   manages   to  
involve   the   reader   in   the   narrative.   On   the   other   hand,   as   a   consequence   of   the  
narrator’s   openness,   the   reader   starts   to   question,   whether   Momo’s   account   is  
based  on  facts,  or  whether  his  account  has  been  embellished,  in  order  to  attract  the  
audience’s  attention.  
In   relation   to   the   foregoing   discussion,   Vogrin   Valerie   mentions   the  
‘unreliable  narrator.’  The  critic  says  that:  
 
in   a   sense,   all   first-­‐person   narrators   are   somewhat   unreliable.   Even   the   most  
scrupulous  characters  may,  unconsciously  perhaps,  shade  the  truth  or  emphasize  
one   fact   over   another   to   make   themselves   look   ever-­‐so-­‐slightly   better.   […]   The  
narrator’s   unreliability   adds   to   the   story’s   unsettling   effect.   […]   The   unreliable  
narrator   emphasizes   the   fact   that   there   is   no   such   thing   as   a   single,   static,  
knowable  reality.  (AS  84/  85)  
 
Vogrin   Valerie   correctly   notes   that   even   the   most   conscientious   storyteller   can  
never   narrate   a   story   by   reproducing   the   events   one-­‐to-­‐one   as   they   actually  
occurred,   since   there   is   no   stable   or   factual   reality.   The   narrator’s   current   and  
prior   mood   and   his   memory   of   the   events   will   always   alter   the   projection   of  
incidents,  from  the  past  into  the  present,  through  narrative.  Mood  and  experience  
that  interfere  with  an  accurate  reproduction  of  events  are  natural  or  unconscious  
intrusions.  However,  Valerie  Vogrin  also  points  out  that  a  narrator  can  deliberately  
alter  a  story,  in  order  to  put  himself  in  a  better  position.  In  the  later  development  
of   the   thesis   at   hand,   we   are   going   to   discuss   the   importance   of   narrative  
truthfulness  more  in  detail.  
Thirdly,   the   moral   distance   between   narrator   and   reader   is   obvious.  
Spontaneously,   the   assumption   goes   that   a   child   has   lower   moral   standards   than  
an  adult,  because  a  child  has  less  life  experience  to  take  as  reference  point,  in  order  
to   evaluate,   what   is   morally   acceptable   in   his   cultural   and   social   context.   In  
contrast   though,   children   display   natural   morality   towards   their   environment.  
Adult   moral   behaviour   is   tainted   and   influenced   by   their   experiences   and   by   social  
conventions   that   dictate   us   how   to   behave   ethically   correct.   Consequently,  
  27  
 

experience  does  not  serve  the  purpose  of  reference  point,  but  is  a  string  of  singular  
incidents  that  have  altered  man’s  natural  compassion  and  moral.  Disappointment,  
anger,   aggression   and   rejection,   by   other   human   beings,   change   our   personal  
ethical  standard,  whereas  children  naturally  react  in  a  compassionate  and  ethical  
way.   Of   course,   perceiving   children   as   inherently   good   is   a   generalized   and  
personal  opinion,  yet  one  that  Jean-­‐Jacques  Rousseau  shared,  who  argued  that:  
 
all  things  are  as  good  as  their  Creator  made  them,  but  every  thing  degenerates  in  
the   hands   of   men.   All   our   customs   are   nothing   but   subjection,   confinement   and  
restraint.  Civilized  man  is  born,  lives,  and  dies  in  slavery...  as  long  as  he  wears  the  
human  form,  he  is  confined  by  our  institutions.20  
 
Jean-­‐Jacques   Rousseau   argues   that   man   ‘lives   and   dies   in   slavery.’   Man   certainly   is  
a   lifelong   prisoner   of   society’s   conventions,   because   even   if   a   person   decides   to  
reject  the  socially  accepted  principles  of  his  time,  then  he  is  still  controlled  by  the  
fact   that   he   tries   to   live   according   to   the   norm’s   opposite,   which   is   an   attitude   that  
equally  restricts  a  man’s  freedom.  
Additionally,   not   just   people   remain   lifelong   prisoners,   but   ideas   and  
creations   too.   A   narrator,   for   example,   is   the   author’s   idea   and   the   narrator   always  
remains   the   author’s   prisoner,   because   the   author   has   created   him,   understands,  
and  portrays  him  in  a  certain  way.  Of  course,  each  reader  interprets  the  narrator  
differently  and  thus,  the  reader  allows  the  narrator  to  break  free  from  his  prison.  
However,   although   the   reader   frees   the   narrator   from   the   author’s   confinement,  
the   reader   renders   the   narrator   anew   prisoner   of   the   reader’s   individual  
interpretation.   So,   the   narrator   turns   from   being   the   prisoner   of   one   person’s  
imaginary   world   into   being   the   captive   of   another   one’s.   Consequently,   the  
narrator,  or  ideas,  can  never  escape  people’s  definition.  
Similarly,   people’s   nature   is   also   held   prisoner   by   other   people,   because  
each   person   that   we   encounter   in   our   lives   defines   who   we   are.   On   a   first   level,  
people   define   us   in   their   minds,   based   on   the   impressions   they   have   of   us.  
However,  people  also  genuinely  shape  each  other,  through  their  actions  and  words,  
which  lead  to  mutual  influence.  Thus,  it  is  not  just  general  social  conventions  that  

                                                                                                               
20  Kim,  Jocelyn,  Andrew  Wong,  and  Jean  Wong.  “Children  as  Inherently  Good.”  Umich.edu:  

http://www.umich.edu/~ece/student_projects/childrens_lit/Children_as_Good.html  
 28  
 

subject   people   to   slavery,   but   also   individual   attitudes   that   people   harbour   of   each  
other  and  that  they  use,  in  order  to  manipulate  each  other.  
Moreover,   whether   we   agree   with   Jean-­‐Jacques   Rousseau   that   our   social  
experiences  shape  our  ethical  sense  or  whether  our  personal  moral  code  is  innate  
remains   debatable.   Yet,   one   can   assume   that   the   child   narrator’s   principles   are  
different   from   the   reader’s   at   the   beginning   of   the   story,   because   reader   and  
narrator  are  different  characters  and  they  stem  from  different  social  backgrounds  
and  from  various  upbringing.  The  degree  of  belief  in  his  ethics  and  the  consistency  
with   which   the   child   narrator   pursues   his   ideals   in   the   story,   might   lead   to   the  
reader’s   adjustment   of   his   own   ethics,   which   decreases   the   moral   distance  
between   reader   and   narrator   towards   the   end   of   the   story.   Interesting   to   note   is  
that   similar   to   the   intellectual   development   during   the   reading   process,   both  
reader   and   narrator   can   also   ethically   grow   in   the   same   direction,   as   the   story  
progresses.  
Furthermore,  while  the  moral,  emotional  and  intellectual  distance  between  
reader   and   narrator   varies   throughout   the   narrative,   the   physical   gap   between  
those  two  entities  remains  unaltered.  In   The  Life  Before  Us,  Momo,  an  orphan,  lives  
in  post  World  War  II  Paris  in  an  apartment  that  he  shares  with  other  urchins  and  
an   ex-­‐prostitute,   who   functions   as   substitute   mother   for   Momo   and   the   other  
children  in  their  house.  Today’s  readers  can  gather  information  about  that  period  
and  if  a  reader  is  really  compassionate  and  sensitive,  he  can  begin  to  emotionally  
understand   and   retrace   the   physical   circumstances   and   living   conditions   of   the  
time.   Yet,   the   physical   distance   between   reader   and   narrator   remains   barely  
unaltered  throughout  the  whole  reading  process.  This  conclusion  sounds  negative  
at  first,  because  this  statement  seems  to  point  out  a  lack  produced  by  the  reading  
process.  However,  the  physical  distance  between  reader  and  narrator  is  an  asset,  
because   the   physical   distance   grants   the   narrator   a   status   of   unattainability   and   of  
near   divinity,   because   the   narrator   is   in   a   situation   that   the   reader   will   never   be  
able  to  attain.  Consequently,  the  reader  cannot  offensively  question  the  narrator’s  
portrayal  of  his  surroundings  and  has  to  take  parts  of  the  narrative  at  face  value,  
due  to  spatial  circumstances.  
Additionally,   when   the   reader   is   faced   with   the   incapability   to   understand  
the  narrator’s  attitude  and  behaviour,  then  the  reader  can  always  fall  back  onto  the  

  29  
 

explanation   that   he   cannot   relate   to   the   time   and   space   of   the   narrator   and   thus,   is  
not  in  the  position  to  judge  or  fully  understand  the  main  character.  The  reader  is  
bound  to  lack  understanding.  The  reader’s  awareness  that  he  is  not  meant  to  fully  
understand  the  story’s  setting  puts  the  reader  at  ease  and  allows  him  to  come  to  
terms  with  the  gaps  in  his  knowledge.  
Jonathan   Safran   Foer’s   narrative   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close   takes  
place   in   contemporary   New   York.   At   first   glance,   the   physical   distance   between  
reader  and  narrator  seems  reduced,  because  place  and  physical  circumstances  of  
contemporary  N.Y.  are  a  reality  to  the  reader.  But  the  plot  of  the  story,  where  the  
child’s   father   dies   in   9/11,   on   the   one   hand,   removes   the   reader   from   the   story,  
because   the   character’s   setting   is   different   from   that   of   most   people,   even   from  
that   of   most   New   Yorkers.   In   this   case,   the   novel’s   physical   and   emotional  
dimensions   merge,   because   the   more   physical   distance   there   is   between   reader  
and   narrator,   the   more   emotional   distance   is   also   created.   Of   course,   the   reader  
can  feel  emotionally  close  to  the  narrator,  because  he  feels  compassion  for  a   child,  
who   has   lost   his   father.   Yet,   this   emotional   distance   simultaneously   increases,  
when   the   reader   cannot   really   understand   the   full   emotional   scope   of   the  
narrator’s  world,  because  he  has  never  experienced  a  similar  situation,  like  losing  a  
person  in  a  terrorist  attack.  
In  conclusion,  during  the  reading  process  there  is  a  constant  shift  between  
moral,  intellectual,  physical  and  emotional  distance,  between  reader  and  narrator,  
varying   from   a   situation   where   the   reader   closely   identifies   with   the   narrator   to  
adopting   the   position   where   the   reader   stands   in   complete   contrast   to   the  
narrator.   The   following   thesis   will   analyze   more   in   detail   to   what   extent   a   child  
narrator  influences  these  levels  of  distance  more  than  an  adult  narrator  and  which  
advantages,  or  disadvantages,  can  result  from  these  constellations.  
Finally,  Therese  Fischer  argues  that  
 
”rhetoric”   […]   includes   all   means   by   which   the   author   of   fiction   influences   his  
readers.   One   of   those   means   can   be   a   personal   narrator   who   tells   the   reader   a  
story  from  his  subjective  point  of  view  –  not  necessarily  identical  with  that  of  the  
author.  But  the  author  can  make  the  fictional  reality  he  presents  appear  also  less  
subjective.   He   may   confront   us   with   ‘objective’   scenes,   i.e.   dialogues   with   short  
neutral  descriptions  and  summaries.  (TF  85)  
 

 30  
 

Therese   Fischer’s   argument   indicates   that   the   narrator’s   point   of   view   and   his  
descriptions   are   rectified   by   the   author’s   subtle   touch.   The   author   is   the   creator   of  
his   storyteller   and   thus,   should   bestow   his   puppet   with   the   necessary   attitude   and  
dialogues,  in  order  to  get  his  literary  message  across,  without  ulterior  interference  
in  the  story.  However,  what  Therese  Fischer  means  is  that  the  author  can  include  
other   characters’   dialogues   in   order   to   make   it   clear   to   the   reader   that   the  
narrator’s   point   of   view   is   only   one,   amongst   many,   and   that   the   narrator’s  
perspective   is   not   the   norm.   If   the   narrator   relates   the   incidents   in   the   novel   the  
way  he  sees  them,  he  relies  on  tone  of  voice  and  behaviour  of  the  other  characters,  
in   order   to   formulate   his   observations   and   his   response   to   the   other   characters.  
However,   the   narrator’s   interpretation   of   and   reaction   to   the   other   characters   is  
his   personal   vantage   point   and   another   narrator   would   react   differently   to   the  
situation.  In  this  case,  the  author  also  defines  the  way  in  which  his  character  reacts,  
because  he  wants  to  produce  a  specific  narrative  effect.  
If   the   author   wants   the   reader   to   readjust   his   evaluation   of   the   narrator’s  
point   of   view   and   thus,   introduces   dialogues   as   a   technique   to   allow   other  
characters   to   voice   their   opinion   and   perspective   on   the   scene,   then   the  
interpretation  of  those  scenes  depends  on  the  reader  and  alters  from  one  reader  to  
another.  Moreover,  an  author  cannot  rely  on  dialogues  to  give  the  reader  a  chance  
to  evaluate  the  narrator’s  narrative  truthfulness,  because  dialogues  are  not  neutral  
indicators  of  reality  either.  The  reader  can  only  guess  the  tone  of  the  dialogue  by  
interpreting   the   characters’   reactions.   However,   like   in   real   life,   the   characters   can  
misinterpret   tone   of   voice   and   react   in   an   inappropriate   way.   Elinor   Ochs  
comments:  
 
narratives  are  versions  of  reality.  They  are  embodiments  of  one  or  more  points  of  
view   rather   than   objective,   omniscient   accounts.   While   narrators   emphasize   the  
truth   of   a   narrated   text,   others   grapple   with   the   fragility   of   memory   and   the  
relativity   of  point   of   view.   […]   “the   struggle   of   man   against   power   is   the   struggle   of  
memory   against   forgetting,”   [yet,]   memory   never   captures   authentic   experience.  
“We   immediately   transform   the   present   moment   into   abstraction.   We   need   only  
recount   an   episode   we   experienced   a   few   hours   ago:   the   dialogue   contracts   to   a  
brief   summary,   the   setting   to   a   few   general   feature   …   Remembering   is   not   the  
negative   of   forgetting.   Remembering   is   a   form   of   forgetting.”   An   important  
challenge  to  humanity  is  to  recognize  that  lives  are  the  past  we  tell  ourselves.  (EO  
21)  
 

  31  
 

Narratives   are   only   versions   of   reality,   but   they   are   presented   as   personalized,  
individual   truths.   The   reader   can   adopt   the   text   or   narrative   at   face   value,   or   try   to  
read  between  the  lines.  Yet,  there  is  lurking  danger  that  the  reader  interprets  too  
much  and  that  he  grapples  with  messages  that  the  author  or  the  narrator  did  not  
intend   to   transmit.   Then   again,   we   can   ask   the   question   if   a   reader   can   ever  
interpret   too   much   and   draw   or   extract   too   much   information   from   a   text.   The  
reading   process   allows   the   reader   to   make   sense   of   his   own   reality   and   if   a   text  
represents  a  completely  different  reality  and  speaks  of  a  completely  different  truth  
to   him   than   what   the   author   intended   or   what   other   readers   make   of   the   text’s  
message,   then   it   is   perfectly   legitimate   if   the   reading   process   triggers   a   level   of  
understanding  that  allows  the  reader  to  personally  develop  and  to  move  on  in  his  
understanding  of  the  world.  
In   the   end,   it   is   only   a   mixture   of   the   narrator’s   interpretation,   of   the  
reader’s   understanding   of   the   narrator’s   and   of   the   other’s   characters’   attitudes,  
which   helps   the   reader   to   unravel   a   story   and   to   make   sense   of   it.   The   foregoing  
discussion   indicates   that   the   reading   process   and   the   reader-­‐narrator-­‐relationship  
is  a  spiral,  the  outcome  of  whose  burble  is  a  personalized  reality,  for  each  reader.  
According  to  Elinor  Ochs,  ‘narratives  are  tales  that  tellers  and  listeners  map  onto  
tellings   of   personal   experience.   In   this   sense,   even   the   most   silent   of   listeners   is   an  
author  of  an  emerging  narrative’  (EO   21).  The  reader  reshapes  and  reconstructs  the  
narrative  and  moulds  it  to  suit  his  own  longing  and  experience.  A  reader  can  shape  
and  interpret  the  same  text  in  different  ways  in  order  to  cater  for  different  needs.    
In   conclusion,   the   narrator’s   shape   and   function   in   a   novel   depend,   on   the  
one  hand,  on  the  author’s  intention  and  his  understanding  of  the  narrator  he  has  
created.   On   the   other   hand,   the   definition   of   the   narrator   also   depends   on   the  
reader’s  understanding,  interpretation  and  background  experience.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 32  
 

2.2.  The  Child  


After  having  defined  the  notion  of  ‘narrator,’  it  is  essential  to  outline  the  concept  of  
‘child,’  since  the  core  question  of  the  research  paper  at  hand  revolves  around  the  
function  of  child  narrators  in  adult  fiction.  What  or  who  is  a  child?  Where  does  this  
concept   stem   from?   Have   children   always   been   defined   as   children   or   has   the   idea  
of   the   child   changed   over   time?   At   first,   all   these   questions   appear   redundant,  
because   each   person   has   straight   away   an   idea   in   mind   of   what   he   understands  
and  defines  as  ‘child.’  At  the  same  time,  this  diagnosis  indicates  that  the  definition  
of   what   we   understand   when   we   talk   of   a   child,   depends   on   each   individual   and  
also  on  social  and  cultural  circumstances.  Hence,  the  following  lines  serve  to  define  
a  common  basis  of  what  a  child  is  or  might  be.  
When  we  speak  of  children  aged  five  or  less,  then  there  is  general  consent  
that   these   very   young   members   of   society   need   adult   care,   like   emotional,   physical  
and  financial  support,  in  order  to  get  around  in  the  world  and  to  basically  survive.  
However,  the  concept  of  a  child  older  than  six  becomes  a  challenge.  At  this  point  in  
my   thesis,   I   hear   critics   arguing   that   people   as   young   as   six   are   of   course   to   be  
considered  and  treated  as  children.  But  my  question  is  what  does  it  imply  to  ‘act  
like’   and   to   be   ‘treated   like   a   child’?   Six-­‐year-­‐old   children   vary   greatly   in   their  
ability   to   understand   and   process   the   world.   So   where   does   this   developmental  
discrepancy   stem   from?   Has   the   denomination   of   people   aged   between   six   and  
fourteen  as  children  evolved,  because  of  the  young  person’s  reduced  physical  and  
mental  capacities  or  is  it  a  social  construct  that  has  developed  over  time  in  relation  
to  the  young  person’s  communal  role?  
The  general  perception  that  people  have  in  mind  when  they  hear  the  word  
‘child’   is   a   different   one   nowadays   than   a   century   ago.   People’s   upbringing,   as   well  
as   the   adult’s   and   the   child’s   social   responsibilities   and   roles,   have   changed   over  
time.   The   stereotypical   image   that   we   have   in   mind,   when   we   think   of   a  
seventeenth-­‐century   child   highlights   the   discrepancy   between   social   classes   at   the  
time.  On  the  one  hand,  we  have  the  concept  of  the  child  dressed  in  rags,  that  had  to  
help   on   the   farms   and   grow   up   physically,   while   confronted   with   poverty   and  
having  to  fend  for  itself.  Opposed  to  this  image  is  the  picture  of  the  wealthy  child,  
brought   up   amongst   riches   and   enjoying   a   private   education,   by   personal   tutors.  
Historical  research  shows  that  ‘the  first  children's  playground  was  built  in  a  park  
  33  
 

in   Manchester   in   1859.’21   This   fact   highlights   the   inferior   role   of   children   in   the  
past.   Instead   of   focusing   on   play,   young   people,   as   soon   as   their   muscles   allowed  
them   more   or   less   decent   physical   activity,   needed   to   work   in   order   to   support  
their   family   financially   and   to   secure   their   future.   Children   were   seen   as   miniature  
adults,   who   during   the   Industrial   Revolution   had   to   work   in   factories,   which  
exploited  them  more  than  their  farming  families  before  the  economical  change.    
According  to  research,  
 
recognition  of  childhood  as  a  state  different  from  adulthood  began  to  emerge  in  the  
16th  and  17th  centuries.  Society  began  to  relate  to  the  child  not  as  a  miniature  adult  
but   as   a   person   of   a   lower   level   of   maturity   needing   adult   protection,   love   and  
nurturing.  This  change  can  be  traced  in  painting:  In  the  Middle  Ages,  children  were  
portrayed   in   art   as   miniature   adults   with   no   childish   characteristics.   In   the   16th  
century,  images  of  children  began  to  acquire  a  distinct  childish  appearance.  From  
the   late   17th   century   onwards,   children   were   shown   playing.   Toys   and   literature  
for  children  also  began  to  develop  at  this  time.22  
 
However,  according  to  Tim  Lambert,  it  took  society  until  the  19th  century  to  build  a  
children’s   playground,   as   explained   above.   Thus,   public   consciousness   about   the  
child’s   status   in   society   and   about   the   child’s   needs   started   to   change,   but   only  
sluggishly.  The  change  in  the  elders’  attitude  towards  children  was  related  to  the  
growing  financial  security,  furthered  by  the  industrial  revolution.  During  the  time  
preceding  the  economical  upraise,  families  had  to  concentrate  on  their  day-­‐to-­‐day  
organization,   instead   of   focusing   on   their   children’s   psychological   development.  
Consequently,   painters   visually   representing   children   with   grown   up   features  
mirror   the   past   need   for   young   people   to   act   like   adults,   because   of   their   social  
circumstances.   Nowadays,   experts   focus   on   and   study   the   most   adapted  
psychological   interaction   with   a   child,   but   anew   adults   have   to   focus   more   on  
financial  security  than  on  childcare,  because  the  cost  of  people’s  daily  life  has  risen  
due  to  high  lease  price  and  expensive  nutrition.  In  a  way,  the  focus  on  the  child’s  
wellbeing  has  launched  a  spiral  that  pushes  adults  to  concentrate  more  on  finance,  
than  on  the  child’s  world.  Nutritionists,  for  example,  advise  how  to  feed  a  child  a  
balanced   diet,   in   order   to   further   his   optimal   physical   and   intellectual   growth.   Yet,  
the   cost   for   appropriate   care,   according   to   experts   and   to   research,   needs   to   be  

                                                                                                               
21  Lambert,  Tim.  “A  Brief  History  of  Children.”  Localhistories.org:  

http://www.localhistories.org/children.html.  
22  Wikipedia.  “Child.”  Wikipedia.org:  http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Child.  

 34  
 

financed,   which   demands   parents   to   take   up   well-­‐paid,   but   time   and   energy-­‐
consuming   jobs;   time   and   energy   they   consequently   fall   short   of   spending   with  
their  children.  Nowadays,  the  stress  on  finance  is  a  different  one  than  in  the  past,  
because  in  our  time,  parents  aim  for  more  than  survival;  parents  want  to  cater  for  
their   children’s   maximum   and   ideal   development,   but   the   need   to   earn   money   is  
still  the  reason  that  diverts  the  parents’  attention  away  from  the  child.  So,  in  a  way  
people  nowadays  pretend  that  they  work  for  their  children’s  wellbeing,  which  they  
do,   because   they   accommodate   the   children’s   needs,   according   to   the   current  
expert   advice   and   common   social   standard,   but   in   fact   this   statement   is  
pretentious,   because   parents   nowadays   spend   as   little   or   even   less   quality   time  
with  their  offspring  than  100  or  200  years  ago.  According  to  D.D.  Bielby,  
 
among   all   families,   the   proportion   of   dual-­‐earner   couples   has   nearly   doubled   since  
1960-­‐to   about   55%.   Meanwhile,   the   traditional   family   form   of   a   married   couple  
with   children   and   with   the   wife   not   in   paid   labor   force   has   declined   to   just   15%.  
Over   the   same   period,   women’s   continuous   participation   in   the   paid   labor   force  
has   risen,   particularly   among   mothers   of   young   children;   gender   differences   in  
levels   of   education   have   declined;   and   the   sex   role   attitudes   of   both   men   and  
women  have  become  more  egalitarian.23  
 
Of   course,   on   the   one   hand,   there   is   a   set   of   advantages   that   a   family   fosters,   when  
both   parents   earn   the   household   money.   For   one,   feminist   efforts   have   finally  
started  to  gradually  pay  off  and  lead  to  an  egalitarian  lifestyle,  for  both,  men  and  
women.   Of   course,   there   is   still   a   discrepancy   in   the   amount   of   money,   men   and  
women   are   paid   for   accomplishing   the   same   kind   of   jobs,   and   according   to   D.D.  
Bielby,  
 
specifically,   women   allow   (and   are   permitted   to   allow)   family   tasks   and  
responsibilities   to   intrude   on   their   paid   work,   but   men   are   less   inclined   to   do   so.  
Men,   in   contrast,   allow   (and   are   permitted   to   allow)   work   to   intrude   on   family  
time.  Men  posits  the  work-­‐family  connection  as  a  system  of  exchange  of  personal  
resources   including   commitment,   skills,   and   energies,   in   return   for   economic  
security,  status,  and  a  sense  of  purpose  and  identity.  (DDB  289)  
 
D.D.   Bielby’s   statement   highlights   the   discrepancy   between   men   and   women   in  
terms   of   work   related   attitude,   but   that   topic   is   a   completely   different   matter,   fit  
for   discussion   in   later   thesis.   Yet,   what   we   can   say   is   that   positively,   nowadays,  

                                                                                                               
23  Bielby,  D.D.  “Commitment  to  Work  and  Family.”  Annual  Review  of  Sociology  18  (1992):  281-­‐302,  

282  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (DDB).  


  35  
 

women   are   at   least   allowed   to   pursue   the   jobs   and   lead   the   lives   that   suit   their  
interests   best.   In   relation   to   the   child’s   world,   we   can   say   that   if   the   parents   are  
satisfied  with  their  daily  effort,  the  children  also  benefit  from  the  parents’  balanced  
frame  of  mind,  when  the  family  needs  to  interact,  or  when  shared  decisions  need  
to  be  taken.  
On   the   other   hand,   pursuing   a   job   is   demanding   and   the   employee   cannot  
take   a   break,   whenever   he   or   she   feels   like   it,   whereas   mothers,   who   work   as  
housewives,   can   relax   at   least   for   a   short   amount   of   time,   when   the   children   are   at  
school.   The   women’s   public   job   demands   them   though   to   be   constantly   present  
and  alert  all  the  time.  This  amount  of  pressure  leads  to  the  parents’  or  the  mother’s  
exhaustion,  which  is  less  furthering  for  the  relationship  between  the  parents  as  a  
couple  and  puts  a  strain  on  the  relationship  between  parents  and  children.  In  that  
respect,   children   nowadays   need   to   learn   at   a   much   younger   age,   how   to   respect  
that   their   parents   have   a   work   life   and   also   a   private   life   that   they   are   not  
necessarily   part   of   and   that   their   parents   need   time   to   recover   from   their   daily  
effort.  
Of   course,   in   the   past,   parents   used   to   work   hard   on   the   farms   for   long  
hours   each   day.   At   the   time,   the   children’s   needs   and   their   craving   for   attention  
also  came  second,  after  the  work  had  been  done.  Yet,  I  believe  that  it  is  harder  for  
children   nowadays   to   understand   their   parents’   effort   at   work,   because   work   is  
removed  from  home.  In  the  past,  the  children  could  observe  their  parents  at  work  
and   had   to   share   in   their   labour,   which   made   the   children   learn   the   hard   way,   why  
their   parents   were   too   tired   in   the   evening,   to   share   in   their   play.   Nowadays,  
children  are  more  protected  and  middle-­‐class  families  employ  cleaning  ladies,  who  
take  care  of  the  household.  On  the  one  hand,  the  mother’s  absence  requires  extra  
support   and   the   family   can   afford   the   extra   expense,   because   the   mother   is   also  
working.  Yet,  the  consequence  is  that  children  often  ignore  what  ‘work’  means  or  
implies  and  thus,  children  find  it  challenging  to  understand  that  their  parents  react  
irritated  at  times,  when  there  seems  to  be  no  apparent  or  immediate  reason.  
Additionally,   the   reason   why   more   women   need   to   go   to   work   nowadays,  
than   in   the   past,   is   the   fact   that   there   are   a   greater   number   of   single   parent  
households,   than   fifty   years   ago.   Consequently,   on   the   one   hand   the   rise   in   the  
number   of   working   women   testifies   of   equality   in   status   between   sexes.   Yet,  

 36  
 

women   who   need   to   work   also   points   out   that   family   structures   are   currently  
rearranging,   which   also   leads   to   a   child   that   needs   to   emotionally   grow   up   much  
faster  than  in  the  past,  because  the  child  also  tends  to  adopt  the  role  of  the  missing  
partner,  in  terms  of  moral  and  emotional  support.  
Of   course,   the   foregoing   discussion   is   based   on   modern   middle-­‐class  
families,   who   can   afford   such   luxuries   as   a   cleaning   lady.   I   am   aware   that   I   am  
talking   in   terms   of   clichés.   Yet,   in   conclusion,   I   do   believe   that   in   the   past,   children  
had  to  grow  up  physically  and  emotionally,  because  their  parents  could  not  afford  
the   luxury   to   pamper   their   offspring   with   time   and   money.   And   still,   nowadays  
children   have   to   grow   up   emotionally,   because   young   people   need   to   deal   with  
their   parents’   (emotional   and   physical)   absence   and   their   effort   to   earn   money.  
Positive  though  is  that  nowadays,  the  dichotomy  between  rich  and  poor  does  not  
lead   to   such   vast   differences   in   children’s   social   roles   anymore,   than   in   the   past,  
since   in   Europe,   children   of   almost   all   social   classes   have   access   to   basic  
educational   standard   and   to   support   by   the   government.   However,   while  
nowadays   children   are   much   more   socially   and   physically   protected   than   some  
centuries  ago,  we  have  to  say  that  their  psyche  had  to  painfully  adapt  in  different  
ways.  It  is  dismissed  as  a  cliché,  but  nowadays,  children  are  not  children  anymore  
in   the   sense   that   their   worldview   is   much   more   influenced   by   an   adult   way   of  
thinking.   In   the   old   days,   children   were   sent   out,   when   the   grown-­‐ups   were  
discussing  serious  matters  or  topics  unfit  for  children’s  ears,  like  sexual  debates  or  
financial  concerns.  A  child  had  to  take  guesses  at  the  adults’  secrets  and  construct  
his   understanding   and   reality,   by   patching   together   the   bits   and   bobs   of  
conversations  he  could  gather.  Of  course,  this  secrecy  led  to  misunderstanding,  to  
taking  children  for  fools  and  often  to  the  child’s  personal  painful  discovery  of  the  
truth,  which  could  have  been  prevented,  by  the  adults  simply  revealing  reality.  Yet,  
secrecy  encouraged  the  young  people’s  creativity.  Nowadays,  children  have  access  
to  all  kinds  of  information,  even  if  they  live  in  socially  challenged  circumstances.  In  
The  Life  Before  Us,  by  Romain  Gary,  the  protagonist  observes:  ‘I  stopped  outside  a  
movie,   but   this   picture   didn’t   admit   minors.   It’s   a   laugh   when   you   think   of   the  
things  minors  aren’t  allowed  to  see  and  all  the  other  stuff  they  are’  (RG  149).  Romain  
Gary’s  character  lives  in  an  even  more  exaggerated  social  reality  than  the  average  

  37  
 

child,   but   it   is   accurate   that   modern   children   are   exposed   to   and   share   the   same  
reality  as  adults.  
Additionally,  today’s  children  are  encouraged  to  voice  their  opinion  and  to  
form  their  own  attitudes,  whereas  two  hundred  years  ago,  children  were  urged  to  
live  by  the  rules  of  their  parents’  religion  and  ethical  standards  and  to  keep  quiet:  
‘children   were   meant   to   be   seen   but   not   heard.’   Crotty   Patrick   mentions   ‘the  
opening   scene   of   The   Barracks   (1963),   where   Willie,   Una,   and   Sheila   play   their  
allotted   party   in   the   ritual   of   nightfall   in   the   presence   of   their   silently   suffering  
stepmother,   [and   in   which]   Elizabeth,   introduces   us   to   a   world   where   children  
have  a  deeply  ingrained  understanding  of  their  secondariness.’24  John  McGahern’s  
novel   is   set   in   1940s   Ireland.   So   far   I   have   pointed   out   children’s   inferior   social  
status   in   the   centuries   leading   up   to   the   19th   century.   However,   The   Barracks  
illustrates  that  psychology  and  education  have  only  recently  managed  to  divert  the  
generally  dismissive  attitude  towards  children.  Tanner  Tony  summarizes  that  
 
the   morally   untrained   child   was,   in   fact,   considered   a   threat.   But   gradually   the  
image   of   the   child   described   by   [Jean-­‐Jacques]   Rousseau   and   celebrated   by  
[William]  Wordsworth  filters  down  through  the  various  social  institutions.  Horace  
Bushnell,  an  enlightened  theologian,  without  preaching  the  innate  goodness  of  the  
child,   explicitly   condemns   the   educational   methods   based   on   a   presupposition   of  
the   child’s   inherited   evil.   In   pleading   for   a   more   liberal   Christian   nurture   he  
effectively   turns   attention   to   the   child’s   latent   instincts   and   aptitudes   and  
advocates   their   more   natural,   unhampered   growth.   […]   “It   is   frightful   to   think   how  
they  batter  and  bruise  the  delicate  tender  souls  of  their  children,  extinguishing  in  
them   what   they   ought   to   cultivate,   crushing   that   sensibility   which   is   the   hope   of  
their   being,   and   all   in   the   name   of   Jesus   Christ.”   The   wide   influence   of   Bushnell  
indicates  that  it  was  not  the  sophisticated  sensibility  of  the  adult  as  rehearsed  by  
[Laurence]   Sterne,   but   rather   the   uncommitted,   almost   inarticulate   sensibility   of  
the   child   that   had   become   the   focus   of   much   interest   by   the   time   [Henry]   James  
and  [Samuel]  Clemens  were  writing.25  
 
The   French   novel   Un   Bon   Petit   Diable,   by   the   ‘Comtesse   de   Ségur,’   born   Sophie  
Rostopchine,   which   appeared   in   1865   highlights   the   rising   trend   of   naming   and  
denouncing   inappropriate   adult   behaviour   in   relation   to   children.   In   Sophie  
Rostopchine’s  coming-­‐off-­‐age  novel,  the  main  character  Charles  is  twelve  years  old  
and   he   keeps   playing   tricks   on   his   mean   aunt.   This   French   novel   illustrates   the  
dichotomous  perception  of  the  time:  On  the  one  hand,  people  still  want  to  believe  
                                                                                                               
24  Crotty,  Patrick.  “’All  Toppers’:  Children  in  the  Fiction  of  John  McGahern.”  Irish  University  Review  

35.1  (Spring-­‐Summer  2005):  42-­‐57,  45.  


25  Tanner,  Tony.  “The  Literary  Children  of  James  and  Clemens.”  Nineteenth-­Century  Fiction  16.3  

(Dec.  1961):  205-­‐218,  206/  207  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (TT).  
 38  
 

that   children   deserve   being   treated   in   the   condescending   way   adults   were   used   to,  
because   children   allegedly   misbehave   and   need   to   be   chastised,   according   to  
religious   convention.   Alice   Miller   sums   up   that   ‘society   [chose]   to   disregard   the  
mistreatment   of   children,   judging   it   to   be   altogether   normal,   because   it   [was]   so  
commonplace.’26  
On  the  other  hand,  there  was  the  idea  that  adults  also  need  to  watch  their  
behaviour   and   attitude   and   that   children   are   inherently   good,   when   they   get   a  
chance.  Still,  we  need  to  note  that  a  countess,  who  was  a  member  of  a  society  that  
could   afford   their   offspring   an   education,   wrote   Un   Bon   Petit   Diable.   This   social  
circumstance   highlights   that   there   were   looming   changes   in   terms   of   how   to  
educate  and  treat  children,  according  to  their  age  and  needs.  However,  those  initial  
debates   happened   in   selected   social   classes   and   did   not   constitute   a   common  
change  in  people’s  attitudes.  
Still,   although   contemporary   children   are   encouraged   to   speak   up,  
whenever   and   with   whomever   they   are,   I   wonder   how   today’s   children   can   form  
their   own   attitudes   in   relation   to   a   subject,   when   they   are   confronted   or   flooded  
with   too   much   information?   Nowadays,   children   have   to   grow   up   intellectually  
much   quicker,   in   order   to   make   sense   of   all   the   information   youngsters   are  
confronted  with,  on  a  daily  basis.  
Of  course,  on  the  other  hand,  one  can  say  that  children  in  the  old  days  had  to  
study  the  Bible  and  repeat  their  elders’  point  of  view  and  adopt  adult  behaviour  all  
too  quickly,  because  they  had  to  fend  for  themselves.  So,  although  children  in  the  
past  had  to  use  their  imagination,  in  order  to  construct  their  understanding  of  the  
world,   past   children   were,   on   the   other   hand,   subject   to   adult   and   religious  
indoctrination   and   could   not   fully   or   independently   make   up   their   own   mind.  
Nowadays,   psychoanalytical   studies   have   made   it   possible   for   children   to   be  
ministered   according   to   their   age:   teaching   material   is   adapted   to   the   child’s  
understanding  and  needs  and  children  have  much  more  material  to  enhance  their  
creative   sides.   Yet,   today’s   children   have   to   cope   with   a   society   aligned   with  
materialism.  The  adults’  desire  for  high  economic  standard  and  the  aspiration  to  a  
more   or   less   luxurious   lifestyle,   lead   to   parents   leaving   their   children   alone   at  

                                                                                                               
26  McCall  Smith,  Alexander.  Collins  Dictionary  of  Quotations.  Glasgow:  Harper  Collins.  2003,  80  –  

Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (AMC).  


  39  
 

home  or  under  the  care  of  nannies  or  day  care  centres,  in  order  to  earn  a  living  and  
to  finance  those  extravagant  dreams.  In  a  way,  nowadays  children  are  also  left  to  
get   on   by   themselves,   like   17th   century   children,   but   now   the   focus   is   more   on  
psychological  and  emotional  rather  than  on  financial  scarcity.  
Additionally,   we   need   to   ask   the   question   to   what   extent   specially   child  
adapted   teaching   and   playing   material   is   relevant   if   a   child   has   to   deal   with   an  
adult   world   on   a   daily   basis   anyway?   Is   it   not   confusing   for   a   modern   child   to   have  
free  access  to  adult  life,  like  the  parents’  divorce  files  or  sexual  information,  while  
on   the   other   hand   being   treated   like   a   child   in   relation   to   schooling?   In   the   21st  
century,  there  are  allusions  to  sexual  activity  on  various  multimodal  levels,  while  
the  divorce  rate  of  people  has  never  been  as  high  as  nowadays.  Our  children  grow  
up  in  a  world  where  adults  transmit  the  idea  that  (sexual)  relationships  between  
partners   are   commonly   fleeting   and   unstable.   Consequently,   children   have   to  
endure  the  tug  game  between  parents,  who  got  a  divorce,  while  trying  to  find  some  
sort   of   stability   in   their   young   lives.   A   couple   of   centuries   ago,   children   were  
beaten,   if   they   misbehaved   and   they   had   to   work   hard   as   factory   labourers,   but  
their   existence   was   stable.   Children   in   the   past   knew   what   to   expect   from   their  
elders,   while   nowadays   children   have   to   suffer   from   their   parents’   inconsistency.  
Of  course,  I  am  not  an  advocate  of  chastising  children.  The  point  I  want  to  make  is  
that   the   adult-­‐child   relationship   has   moved   from   one   guilt   trip   to   another,  
throughout  the  centuries.  In  the  past,  parents  needed  to  feel  guilty  for  releasing  the  
tension,   created   by   their   financial   worries,   by   beating   up   their   children,   while  
currently  parents  buy  acquittal  for  depriving  their  children  of  homely  stability,  by  
spending   a   vast   amount   of   money   on   toys   and   on   granting   their   offspring  
extravagant  wishes.  
Helena   Schneider   notes   that   in   the   past   children   were   considered   as   adults,  
as   soon   as   they   knew   how   to   fend   for   themselves.   The   critic   explains   that  
emotional   or   intellectual   development   was   a   secondary   criterion   in   defining  
whether   a   young   person   was   still   considered   or   treated   as   a   child   or   not:   ‘Der  
Zustand  des  Erwachsenseins  wurde  demnach  gleichgesetzt  mit  der  Fähigkeit,  sich  
versorgen  zu  können  und  hatte  nichts  zu  tun  mit  geistiger  oder  emotionaler  Reife’  
(HS  10).  In  a  way,  past  societies  were  right,  since  it  is  a  challenge  to  define  at  what  

age   a   young   person   passes   from   childhood   into   the   teenage   phase   and   then,   into  

 40  
 

adulthood.  Some  children  aged  ten  or  less,  at  times,  behave  and  act  more  mature,  
than  people  aged  sixteen  or  seventeen.  Consequently,  the  term  ‘child’  legally  refers  
to   a   defined   age   group,   but   not   to   a   person’s   intellectual,   emotional   and   physical  
capacities.   This   distinction   allows   our   social   system   to   apply   different   legal  
consequences  and  to  control  people  accordingly  to  their  age.  This  method  supports  
a   regulated   form   of   life,   but   this   approach   does   not   capture   all   the   children,   who  
have  attained  a  level  of  maturity,  which  is  more  advanced  for  their  age.  
In   contrast,   adults   are   sometimes   chided   as   being   childish   or   as   behaving  
like  a  child,  extracting  a  pejorative  connotation.  When  we  say  of  a  person  that  he  or  
she   is   a   child,   then   we   limit   that   person;   we   circumcise   his   freedom   and   assume  
that   a   person   does   not   know   how   to   act,   according   to   conventional   adult  
behaviour.   In   this   case,   the   idea   of   ‘child’   indicates   a   person’s   relation   to   another  
person,  independent  of  his  physical  development.  
Nevertheless,   conventions   are   just   that:   they   are   constructs   that   allow   us   to  
interact   with   each   other   as   individuals,   on   more   or   less   the   same   level   of  
understanding.  Now,  if  an  adult  acts  differently  to  the  norm  or  acts  like  we  would  
expect   a   child   to   act,   we   have   to   understand   that   he   has   constructed   his   own  
reality,   including   and   catering   for   his   individual   conventions.   Conversely,   is   it  
appropriate   to   say   that   that   person   acts   like   a   child,   taking   into   account   that   the  
idea  of  acting  like  a  child  has  a  negative  connotation?  On  the  one  hand,  we  belittle  a  
person  and  take  away  his  freedom,  by  saying  that  he  acts  like  a  child.  Yet,  on  the  
other   hand,   once   the   adult   world   has   written   a   person   off   as   childish,   then   that  
individual  has  the  jester’s  license  to  expand  in  any  way  he  wants.  If  society  expects  
behaviour   deviant   to   the   norm,   a   person   might   as   well   act   irresponsibly   and  
childishly.  
In   contrast,   when   we   say   that   a   child   behaves   like   an   adult,   then   this  
diagnosis   is   usually   conceived   as   a   positive   character   trait.   The   grown-­‐ups  
consider   the   child   mature   and   responsible   for   his   age.   Allowedly,   one   can   regard  
the  child  as  precocious  and  smart-­‐alec,  depending  on  the  child’s  character  and  way  
of  expressing  himself,  but  usually  a  child  thinking  and  acting  along  the  lines  of  an  
adult   is   taken   in   well.   Children’s   behaviour   is   different   from   ours,   but   it   is   the  
adult’s   construct   to   say   that   adult   behaviour   or   the   grown-­‐up   attitude   is   right   or  
trend  setting.  

  41  
 

This   common   practice   indicates   that   people   have   stereotypical   ideas   in  


mind   of   the   less   well-­‐developed   psychological   and   emotional   abilities   of   a   child.  
Yet,   we   need   to   analyze   if   nowadays’   children   are   actually   less   developed   than  
adults,  since  today’s  children  are  confronted  from  a  very  early  age  on  with  material  
and  information  that  used  to  be  reserved  to  the  adult  world,  a  few  centuries  ago,  as  
discussed  earlier  on.  Children  might  lack  the  experience  and  articulacy  to  express  
their  opinion  at  the  age  of  eight  or  ten,  but  the  young  people  nowadays  certainly  
live   in   a   different   reality   than   in   the   past.   As   a   consequence,   adult   assumptions  
define  the  concept  of  ‘the  child’  and  these  believes,  when  a  child  is  still  a  child  vary,  
from  one  person  to  another.  According  to  Schapiro  Tamar,  
 
we  have  conventional  norms  for  applying  the  concepts  “adult”  and  “child,”  but  they  
do   not   always   match   our   intuitions   about   how   to   treat   people.   Positive   laws   may  
stipulate,   for   example,   that   anyone   under   the   age   of   seventeen   counts   as   a   child  
from  the  point  of  view  of  the  state.  But  we  can  ask  in  any  particular  case  whether  
this   stipulation   is   reasonable   from   a   moral   point   of   view.   Questions   about   when   to  
treat  children  as  adults,  and  when  to  treat  adults  as  children,  bring  out  the  fact  that  
there   can   be   a   gap   between   our   conventional   applications   of   these   terms   and   their  
proper  application  for  moral  purposes.27  
 
Previously,   I   have   pointed   out   that   children   might   lack   the   articulacy   to   express  
their   point   of   view,   but   some   children   can   have   high   linguistic   abilities   that  
distinguish   them   from   other   children   and   approximate   them   to   the   adult   world.  
Our   surroundings   define   our   learning   and   our   learning   curve.   Adults   can   more  
deliberately   choose   which   information   they   want   to   assimilate,   whereas   children  
absorb  and  imitate  their  parents’  actions  and  words.  Of  course,  I  have  argued  that  
adults  choose,  which  learning  and  which  way  of  life  they  want  to  pursue  and  which  
attitude   they   want   to   adopt.   Yet,   in   that   respect,   adults   have   often   still   remained  
children,   because   adults   commonly   adapt   to   the   lifestyle   and   attitudes   of   their  
surrounding  age  group,  or  of  the  neighbourhood  they  live  in,  and  hardly  ever  stop  
to   question   what   their   personal   aim   in   life   is.   Of   course,   on   the   one   hand,   it   is  
furthering  when  people  strive  to  keep  up  with  other  people,  but  on  the  other  hand,  
adults  are  role  models  for  their  children  and  modern  children  learn  to  materially  
compare   themselves   with   other   people,   like   their   parents   do,   instead   of   learning  
how   to   identify   and   pursue   their   individual   path   in   life.   James   Baldwin   (1924-­‐
                                                                                                               
27  Schapiro,  Tamar.  “What  is  a  Child?”  Ethics  109.4  (Jul.  1999):  715-­‐738,  715  –  Further  references  

are  included  in  the  text  (TS).  


 42  
 

1987)   argued   that   ‘children   have   never   been   very   good   at   listening   to   their   elders,  
but  they  have  never  failed  to  imitate  them.  They  must,  they  have  no  other  models’  
(AMC  79).  The  point  I  want  to  make  is  that  there  are  children  that  behave  like  adults  

and  that  talk  like  adults,  because  the  young  people  imitate  their  elders.  This  being  
ahead  of  the  group  is  not  the  norm,  but  exceptions  like  this  illustrate  that  defining  
what   a   child   is   cannot   depend   on   people’s   individual   aptitudes   and   age,   but   that  
classifying   people   as   children,   teenagers,   adults   and   elders   serves   the   purpose   of  
organizing  our  social  cooperation  as  a  number  of  individuals  with  different  needs.    
Additionally,   it   is   a   fact   that   children   and   elders   have   less   developed  
physical  abilities  than  people  in  their  30s,  so  these  terms  also  serve  the  purpose  of  
protecting   young   people   from   exploitation   and   child   labour.   Tamar   Schapiro  
argues  that  
 
the   idea   that   children   have   a   special   status,   one   which   is   different   from   that   of  
adults,   is   evident   in   our   everyday   attitudes.   Our   basic   concept   of   a   child   is   that   of   a  
person   who   in   some   fundamental   way   is   not   yet   developed,   but   who   is   in   the  
process   of   developing.   It   is   in   virtue   of   children’s   undeveloped   condition   that   we  
feel   that   we   have   special   obligations   to   them,   obligations   which   are   of   a   more  
paternalistic   nature   than   our   obligations   to   other   adults.   The   special   obligations   to  
children  include  duties  to  protect,  nurture,  discipline,  and  educate  them.  They  are  
paternalistic  in  nature,  because  we  feel  bound  to  fulfill  them  regardless  of  whether  
the   children   in   question   consent   to   be   protected,   nurtured,   disciplined,   and  
educated.   Indeed   we   think   of   children   as   people   who   have   to   be   raised,   whether  
they  like  it  or  not.  (TS  716)  
 
Tamar  Schapiro  is  right  when  he  points  out  that  adults  feel  naturally  responsible  
for   children.   The   question   remains   though,   whether   every   adult   has   the   right  
emotional,  psychological  and  intellectual  capacity  to  educate  a  young  person.  Often  
adults  feel  superior  to  children  on  the  grounds  that  they  are  older  and  have  more  
life   experience,   but   when   an   outsider   has   a   closer   look   at   various   adult-­‐child  
relationships,   then   it   becomes   apparent   that   at   times,   the   child   behaves   more  
ethically  and  compassionately  developed,  than  the  older  person.  The  discrepancy  
between   social   norm   and   reality   highlights   that   the   notion   of   the   child   is   a   social  
construct  that  regulates  everyday  life  and  the  social  system,  but  that  cannot  fully  
characterize   a   person’s   behaviour,   attitude   or   way   of   expression.   What  
characterizes   and   forms   individual   behaviour   and   attitude   are   social  
circumstances,   life   experiences   and   a   natural   understanding   of   the   world   and   its  
people,  independent  of  age  and  race.  In  the  present  thesis,  the  notion  of  child  that  I  
  43  
 

am  going  to  use  is  the  one  defined  by  our  society,  where  a  child  is  a  person  under  
the   age   of   eighteen,   even   after   having   figured   out   that   there   is   a   grey   area   that  
blurs  the  definition  of  and  the  distinction  between  adult  and  child.  Additionally,  we  
will   see   that   each   author   masters   the   art   of   bestowing   special   abilities,   character  
traits   and   attitudes   on   their   child   characters,   independently   of   the   character’s  
intended  age.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 44  
 

2.3.  The  Child  Narrator  


When  we  think  of  adult  novels  featuring  child  narrators,  we  spontaneously  assume  
that   this   literary   genre   has   always   existed.   However,   as   Schneider   Helena   explains,  
Marc   Twain’s   Huckleberry   Finn   is   the   first   book,   which   is   consistently   written   from  
a   child’s   perspective:   ‘Bei   Twains   Roman   Adventures   of   Huckleberry   Finn   (1884)  
handelt   es   sich   zudem   um   das   erste   Buch   überhaupt,   das   konsequent   aus   der   Sicht  
eines  Kindes  geschrieben  ist’  (HS  19).  To  the  reader  it  is  astonishing  to  discover  that  
the   perspective   of   the   child   had   a   secondary   or   non-­‐existent   status   in   literature,  
before  the  beginning  of  the  19th  century.  However,  Helena  Fischer  points  out  that  
Huckleberry   Finn   is   the   first   text   ‘consistently’   narrated   from   a   child’s   angle.   This  
detail  indicates  that  there  had  been  anterior  literature  focusing  on  children’s  voice,  
but  with  a  less  thorough  concentration  on  the  child  narrator  and  on  his  psyche.  
Moreover,   our   foregoing   discussion   has   uncovered   the   child’s   derivative  
status   in   society   before   the   19th   century.   Children   were   either   treated   like   young  
adults,   ready   to   work   as   cheap   labourers   or   as   unworthy   of   adult   attention,   except  
for   the   offspring   of   wealthier   families.   In   the   past,   the   little   interest   in   children’s  
psyche   or   inner   life   is   the   consequence   of   a   society   securing   their   immediate  
economical   survival   and   their   long-­‐term   future,   by   sending   their   children   off   to  
work.  Nowadays,  readers  might  think  that  the  past  societies  were  dismissive  and  
cruel   towards   children,   because   they   regarded   children   as   financial   assets.  
However,   people   at   the   time   had   to   rely   on   the   support   of   the   young   generation,   in  
order  to  spend  their  retirement  in  financial  and  emotional  security.  If  the  parents  
in  the  old  times  had  focused  on  their  children’s  psychological  protection,  then  they  
would   have   needed   to   admit   that   child   labour,   which   was   a   crucial   part   of   their  
livelihood,   had   to   be   abolished.   Parents   would   have   blamed   themselves   for   their  
maladjusted  treatment  of  minors,  and  thus,  at  the  time,  accepting  the  situation  as  a  
common  practice  was  the  most  viable  path  to  pursue.  
Past   social,   financial   and   emotional   circumstances   used   to   dictate   and  
define   the   child’s   status   in   society   before   the   19th   century   and   accordingly,  
influenced  the  child’s  role  in  literature  at  the  time.  Ferrucci  Franco  argues  that  
 
if   one   wanted   to   locate   in   Western   Literature   the   time   of   the   momentous  
appearance   of   children   as   characters,   endowed   with   a   presence   and   mystery   of  
their   own,   one   would   spot   the   advent   toward   the   very   end   of   the   XVIII   century;  

  45  
 

and,   at   that   point,   the   investigator   would   be   struck   by   the   unexpected   discovery.  
He  would  realize,  not  without  awe,  that  the  children  had  to  be  heard  because  they  
were  dying.  The  child  is  born  in  literature  with  a  destiny  of  death  in  life.28  
 
On   the   one   hand,   Franco   Ferrucci   is   of   course   right   when   he   addresses   the   poor  
working   conditions   and   exploitation   of   children.   Additionally,   in   general,   the  
poorer   the   family,   the   more   children   the   parents   had,   as   a   way   of   securing   their  
future  accommodation.  Consequently,  famine,  low  hygienic  standards  and  disease  
led  to  the  death  of  a  large  number  of  children,  with  poor  health  and  shabby  care.    
On   the   other   hand   though,   I   cannot   fully   agree   with   Franco   Ferrucci’s  
conclusion,  because  from  the  18th  century  onwards  up  to  the  present  date,  children  
have   continuously   and   gradually   come   to   attract   the   attention   of   psychologists,  
teachers,   authors   and   parents.   The   increase   in   literature,   which   focuses   on  
children,   does   not   just   illustrate   the   high   infantile   death   rate,   but   literary  
expression  also  mirrors  the  rising  status  of  children  in  society.  
Elinor  Ochs  also  points  out  that  ‘narratives  are  often  launched  in  response  
to  current  worries,  complaints,  and  conflicts.  In  a  reciprocal  way,  in  the  course  of  
their  telling,  portions  of  narratives  may  provoke  interlocutors’  concerns  about  the  
present   and   future’   (EO   25).   Of   course,   Elinor   Ochs’   observation   expands   beyond  
literature  that  is  written  from  a  child’s  perspective.  Any  text  intends  to  provoke  the  
reader’s   reaction   and   incite   thinking   about   or   questioning   of   established  
worldviews.  Consequently,  there  are  those  narratives  that  the  reader  chooses  as  a  
response  to  his  own  current  problems  and  that  he  consults  as  a  reference  point  for  
a  personal  conflict.  In  contrast,  there  are  those  concerns  that  Elinor  Ochs  mentions  
above,  which  are  related  to  specific  events  in  time.  In  those  cases,  literature  helps  
to  display  and  digest  contemporary  events  and  preserve  that  experience  in  time.  If  
we  think  of  current  incidents  that  are  exposed  through  literature,  then  topics  like  
terrorist   attacks   or   child   abuse   come   to   mind.   In   Extremely   Loud   and   Incredibly  
Close,   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   discusses   the   specific   topic   of   how   a   child   feels   after  
and   deals   with   the   loss   of   the   father,   because   of   a   terrorist   attack.   Equally,   there  
are  currently  biographies  of  children  that  have  fallen  victim  to  adult  sexual  abuse  
or   to   abduction   by   adults.   The   topic   of   child   abuse   is   not   a   recent   phenomenon.  
There   have   been   cases   of   child   abuse   as   long   as   there   have   been   humans.   The  

                                                                                                               
28  Ferrucci,  Franco.  “The  Dead  Child:  A  Romantic  Myth.”  MLN  104.1  (Jan.  1989):  117-­‐134,  117/  118.  

 46  
 

interesting   development   though   is   that   only   recently   the   taboo   has   been   broken  
that   made   it   impossible   to   discuss   child   abuse   publicly.   Thus,   literature   mirrors  
and  discusses  those  topics  that  a  current  society  is  ready  to  deal  with.  
Finally,  if  we  agree  that  the  child  has  gradually  adopted  a  more  prominent  
social  role,  we  can  argue  that  the  old  idea  of  the  child,  as  financial  asset,  had  to  die,  
in   order   to   enable   the   birth   of   the   more   enlightened,   public   role   of   the   child.   In  
relation,  children  at  the  time  were  literally  and  figuratively  dying,  at  the  time  when  
the  adults’  attention  started  to  veer  in  the  young  people’s  direction.  It  is  the  child’s  
destiny   to   die   in   terms   of   its   family   identity   and   to   emerge   as   an   individual.   Before  
the  rise  of  the  child’s  public  status,  children  were  defined  according  to  their  social  
background.   The   definition   of   people   in   relation   to   their   social   background,   by  
their   contemporaries,   is   still   a   common   practice,   but   nowadays,   society   is   more  
anxious   furthering   a   child   with   a   poor   social   background,   than   exploiting   that  
young   person,   in   terms   of   child   labour   or   in   terms   of   denying   him   a   basic  
educational  standard.  
Helena   Fischer   has   pointed   out   that   Huckleberry   Finn   was   the   first   novel  
written   from   a   child’s   perspective,   but   in   contrast   we   have   to   admit   that   Marc  
Twain’s   novel   is   a   ‘Bildungsroman,’   which   is   a   coming-­‐off-­‐age   novel,   where   the  
protagonist  develops  throughout  the  novel.  In  that  respect,  Marc  Twain’s  novel  is  
one  in  a  series  of  books  that  find  their  origin  in  the  Middle  Ages  and  even  before  
that,   in   the   Bible.   The   focus   of   this   literary   genre   is   directed   at   the   protagonist’s  
self-­‐development.   The   young   main   character   has   to   overcome   a   number   of  
challenges,  through  which  he  grows  emotionally  and  physically  stronger,  until  he  
reaches   his   intended   goal   or   until,   for   his   age,   he   has   attained   an   advanced   level   of  
maturity.  Today’s  novels  that  centre  on  the  child  can  also  be  classified  as  belonging  
to   the   category   of   ‘Bildungsroman,’   but   the   challenges   that   our   modern   literary  
heroes   have   to   overcome   are   different   to   the   defiance   the   ancient   figures   had   to  
deal  with.  
The   difference  between  previous  forms  of  coming-­‐off-­‐age   novels   and   their  
contemporary   versions   is   that   nowadays   the   child   turns   into   the   narrator,  
commenting  on  his  own  development,  whereas  in  the  past,  the  child’s  development  
was  portrayed  from  an  adult  perspective.  The  modern  child  narrator  criticizes  and  
judges   his   own   progress,   while   the   reading   adult   turns   into   a   silenced   observer.   Of  

  47  
 

course,  the  adult  author  creates  the  child  narrator  and  bestows  a  voice  upon  him.  
In   that   respect,   the   focus   has   moved   away   from   the   child’s   psyche,   towards   the  
message   that   the   adult   creator   wants   his   child   puppet   to   transmit.   In   contrast  
though,  throughout  the  reading  process,  the  reader  imagines  a  child  narrator  and  
what   his   imaginary   child   says   appears   to   the   reader   as   thoughts   being   conceived  
and   voiced   by   a   child.   The   author   moves   into   the   background   during   the   reading  
process   and   the   reader’s   attention   is   attracted   by   the   child’s   narrative.   How  
convincing  the  narrator’s  voice  is  as  that  of  a  child,  or  how  realistic  the  narrator’s  
language  needs  to  be  as  that  belonging  to  a  child,  will  be  discussed  later  on.  
Moreover,  one  should  think  that  authors,  who  have  children  of  their  own  or  
who  are  in  regular  contact  with  children,  as  teachers  for  instance,  feel  more  at  ease  
writing  from  a  child’s  perspective,  because  those  writers  know,  by  experience,  how  
children  behave  and  how  young  people  express  themselves.  However,  taking  care  
of   children   requires   a   lot   of   time   investment   and   effort,   so   childless   writers   have  
more  time  to  work  on  their  text.  
Secondly,   the   more   distance   a   person   has   to   a   subject   matter,   the   broader  
the   outlook   can   be.   When   you   entertain   an   adequate   amount   of   distance   to   a  
problem,   you   are   uninfluenced   or   untainted   by   your   experience   and   you   remain  
unbiased.   Of   course,   in   order   to   write   about   children,   the   author   needs   to   have   a  
realistic  amount  of  psychological  and  linguistic  knowledge  of  children’s  abilities,  in  
order  to  recreate  a  convincing  child  narrator.  For  an  author  it  is  sufficient  though  
to  draw  from  his  own  childhood  experiences  and  to  feed  on  daily  observations,  in  
order  to  illustrate  how  young  people  behave.  
Yet,   I   have   argued   that   authors,   who   live   with   children   on   a   daily   basis,  
might  be  too  biased  at  times  to  create  a  realistic  and  balanced  child  narrator,  for  
one   because   of   time   limitations   and   secondly,   because   parenting   authors   are   too  
closely   involved   with   their   offspring.   If   an   author   finds   raising   his   children  
challenging  and  if  his  children  cry  a  lot,  then  the  author  might  develop  a  tendency  
to  reflect  these  assumed  character  traits  in  his  novel.  If  this  situation  is  the  case,  we  
need   to   ask   the   question   to   what   extent   it   is   necessary   to   create   a   positive   child  
character.   If   the   author’s   impression   of   children   is   negative,   then   it   is   perfectly  
legitimate  to  express  this  downbeat  experience  through  writing.    

 48  
 

Additionally,   in   the   case   where   an   author   feels   negatively   about   his  


relationship   to   children,   the   writing   process   might   help   in   the   analysis   of   the  
author’s  domestic  situation  and  qualify  the  parent’s  own  actions  and  put  those  into  
perspective.   In   contrast,   the   opposite   writing   experience   may   also   be   triggered,  
where   a   disappointed   parent   idolizes   his   child   narrator,   puts   him   in   an  
embellished   adult-­‐child   relationship   and   bestows   extraordinary   talent   and  
understanding  upon  him.  Yet,  anew  in  this  case,  the  writing  process  can  help  the  
author  to  assimilate  his  experiences.    
Furthermore,   in   relation   to   the   author’s   role   in   the   creation   of   his   child  
narrator,   we   need   to   take   into   account   that   if   an   author   has   children,   he   might   find  
it  challenging  to  attribute  certain  character  traits  or  ways  of  thinking  to  his  literary  
figure,   because   he   does   not   want   to   associate   those   thoughts   with   children   and  
more  specifically,  with  children  of  his  own.  An  author  might  not  want  to  imagine  
his   child   having   thoughts   in   relation   to   sexual   activity,   drugs,   racism   or   violence.  
The  parent’s  reaction  is  comprehensible,  because  he  has  a  responsibility  towards  
his   children   and   wants   to   protect   them   from   any   harm.   An   author,   who   is   carefree,  
can  draw  from  an  unlimited  resource  of  things  that  his  child  narrator  might  think,  
say  or  do.  
On   the   other   hand,   an   author   who   is   closely   linked   to   a   child,   might   be  
especially   prone   to   paying   attention   to   the   harm   children   can   fall   prey   to   and  
render   this   knowledge   an   integral   part   of   his   text.   If   you   are   living   with   children  
you   might   always   ask   them   what   they   think   of   certain   topics   and   check   if   they  
understand  or  have  notions  of  key  ideas  that  you  might  want  to  integrate  in  your  
novel.  If  an  author  is  wondering,  whether  it  is  likely  or  not  that  a  young  person  has  
already   made   a   specific   experience,   which   the   author   wants   to   describe   in   his   text,  
then   the   writer   can   always   ask   the   children   in   his   surroundings.   However,   then  
again,  if  an  author  asks  children  to  share  their  opinion,  the  answers  the  author  gets  
are   just   representative   for   those   consulted   children   and   not   for   a   whole   age   group.  
The   survey   might   be   more   reliable,   than   invented   attitudes   in   fictional   texts,   but  
those  statements  still  fail  to  act  as  generally  representative  of  children’s  attitudes.  
Donnelly  Brian  notes  that  
 
it  is  probably  worth  observing  at  this  point  that  no  writer  ever  actually  reproduces  
the  precise  details  of  the  speech  of  an  individual  or  a  group  at  any  given  moment  in  
  49  
 

history.   Speech   in   real   life   is   marked   by   hesitations,   repetitions,   anacolutha   and  


non-­‐semantic   noises.   No   one,   for   example,   supposes   that   any   Elizabethan  
nobleman  ever  spoke  like  Hamlet  in  the  fluent  and  flexible  blank  verse  of  “To  be  or  
not  to  be/That  is  the  question”  soliloquy.29  
 
Creating   a   child   narrator   means   that   the   author   needs   to   pay   attention   to   the  
children’s  language.  Children  are  a  social  subculture,  which  is  here  not  meant  in  a  
negative   way.   However,   the   fact   that   children   represent   a   micro-­‐society   of   their  
own   implies   that   children   have   a   partly   self-­‐contained   language,   too.   Children  
invent   words   of   their   own,   declining   a   majority   of   verbs,   for   example,   as   regular  
verbs,  instead  of  noting  the  existence  of  irregular  verbs.  Children  create  their  own  
logic   and   verbal   ticks   are   just   one   facet   that   embodies   children’s   reasoning.  
However,  earlier  on,  I  have  argued  that  children  adopt  adult  behaviour  and  model  
adult   expressions.   Consequently,   constructing   a   child   narrator,   who   displays  
stereotypical   childlike   language   is   not   a   necessity,   because   an   author   can   always  
construct  a  background  story  that  allows  his  narrator  to  articulate  himself  like  an  
adult.  
Additionally,  if  we  discuss  the  authenticity  of  child  narrators,  then  we  need  
to   ask   the   question,   if   child   narrators   ever   display   themselves   as   they   really   are   or  
if  authors  stick  to  the  stereotypical  idea  that  children  are  generally  prone  to  lying  
and  that  their  novel,  as  a  consequence,  can  also  be  full  of  contradiction,  because  we  
as  readers  ignore  the  fact  if  the  child  narrator  is  meant  by  the  author  to  appear  as  
lying   and   unreliable,   or   if   the   author   is   inconsistent   in   or   uninformed   about   the  
psychological   reality   of   a   child’s   character.   Schulock   Anne   points   out   that   to   the  
reader  the  behaviour  of  a  character  seems  real  and  authentic  if  there  is  an  ‘internal  
logic.’30  Consequently,  it  is  irrelevant  if  a  child  narrator  portrays  his  surroundings  
the   way   he   sees   them,   or   if   the   author   invents   a   child   narrator   acting   outside   of  
general   childlike   behaviour,   because   the   reader   creates   his   own   logic   and  
characterization  of  the  narrator,  as  the  reading  process  progresses.   As   a   result,   the  
child  narrator  becomes  as  reliable  as  an  adult  narrator,  because  the  outcome  of  the  
reading   process   and   the   idea,   which   message   has   been   transmitted   at   the   end   of  

                                                                                                               
29  Donnelly,  Brian.  “Inventing  a  Voice:  Irish  Fiction  from  1800.”  The  Harp  15  (2000):  65-­‐74,  67.  
30  Schulock,  Anne.  “In  Praise  of  Precocious  Narrators.”  Themillions.com:  

http://www.themillions.com/2010/07/in-­‐praise-­‐of-­‐precocious-­‐narrators.html–  Further  
references  are  included  in  the  text  (ASL).  
 50  
 

the   reading   process,   fully   depends   on   the   reader’s   ability   to   construct   a   coherent  
and  conclusive  realism,  based  on  the  information  the  narrator  provides  him  with.  
Consequently,   expression,   comprehension   and   response   of   reader   and  
narrator   vary,   according   to   age,   social   and   ethnical   background   of   the   child  
narrator,  writer,  and  reader.  When  the  writer  stems  from  a  culture  where  children  
are  perceived  as  naïve,  then  the  story  mirrors  this  attitude  as  well.  So,  the  reader  
who   distinguishes   between   a   realistic   child   narrator   and   an   unrealistic   one,   is   at  
the   same   time   negotiating   a   whole   set   of   social   attitudes   and   conventions.   By  
judging   how   an   author   portrays   a   child   narrator,   the   reader   is   automatically   also  
judging   the   author’s   background   and   his   society’s   attitude   towards   how   to   raise  
and  treat  children.  If  the  reader  has  made  the  same  experiences  in  relation  to  child  
behaviour  and  if  the  reader  has  the  same  attitude  to  child  minding,  then  the  reader  
will  find  the  child  narrator  realistic  and  entertain  a  more  sympathetic  relation  to  
the   reading   process   and   its   characters,   than   as   if   the   opposite   had   been   the   case.  
However,   if   there   is   a   discrepancy   between   the   reader’s   conception   of   childlike  
behaviour   and   that   of   the   writer,   then   the   reader   perceives   the   child   narrator   as  
not  viable,  which  also  circumcises  the  poignancy  of  the  novel’s  message.  
In  the  end,  if  we  have  a  second  look  at  the  foregoing  debate  of  what  a  child  
really   is   and   if   we   remember   that   the   notion   of   ‘child’   can   also   be   employed   to  
indicate   a   person’   s   immaturity   and   carelessness,   then   we   can   also   say   that   a  
childless  adult  author,  who  has  never  had  to  take  responsibility  for  another  human  
being,   can   also   still   be   designated   as   a   ‘child.’   This   train   of   thought   is   of   course   a  
cliché,  but  logically  we  would  have  to  admit  that  since  the  idea  of  ‘the  child’  is  not  
really   definable,   then   a   carefree   adult,   writing   a   book   from   a   child’s   perspective,  
writes  from  his  own  perspective,  because  he  has  never  learned  how  to  think  and  
act   like   an   adult.   In   that   case,   the   author   is   freed   from   inventing   his   character’s  
internal  world,  because  he  can  use  his  own  attitude  as  reference  point.  
Of   course,   the   foregoing   statement   is   exaggerated,   but   I   want   to   use   this  
argument   in   order   to   illustrate   that   people’s   realities   and   how   each   individual  
defines   his   environmental   truth   varies   from   one   person   to   the   other’s   personal  
perception.   When   analyzing   the   role   of   the   child   narrator   in   Extremely   Loud   &  
Incredibly   Close   and   The   Life   Before   Us,   we   need   to   bear   in   mind   that   the   child  
narrator’s  voice  serves  a  function,  which  we  are  going  to  dismantle.  This  function  

  51  
 

influences   the   narrator’s   attitudes   and   actions,   while   the   author’s   and   our   own  
experiences,   as   readers   determine   our   positive   or   negative   perception   of   the  
narrator  as  a  convincing  child,  too.  
If   we   assume   that   an   author   has   created   a   narrator,   who   is   a   generally   true-­‐
to-­‐life   child,   we   need   to   assume   that   our   child   narrator   ignores   logic.   He   omits  
information   and   the   way   he   narrates   is   a   stream   of   consciousness,   jumping   from  
one  topic  to  the  other.  Elinor  Ochs  points  out  that  ‘narrative  […]  is  a  fundamental  
means   of   making   sense   of   experience’   (EO   19).   On   the   one   hand,   the   fact   that   the  
narrator  omits  information  is  due  to  the  fact  that  he  lives  in  another  reality  than  
adults.   To   an   adult,   work,   family   and   income   are   of   prior   interest,   while   a   child’s  
world  revolves  around  marks  at  school,  the  amount  of  friends  he  has,  his  security  
at  home  and  how  other  children  treat  him.  In  The  Curious  Incident  of  the  Dog  in  The  
Night-­Time,  by  Mark  Haddon,  Christopher  draws  attention  to  the  child’s  concerns  
in   a   conversation   with   his   mother:   ‘And   I   said,   “I   have   to   go   back   to   Swindon.”   And  
mother   said,   “Christopher,   you’ve   only   just   got   here.”   And   I   said,   “I   have   to   go   back  
because   I   have   to   sit   my   Maths   A   level.”’31   When   an   adult   reader   is   wondering   why  
information   relevant   to   us   as   readers   is   left   out,   or   why   the   child   narrator   expands  
a   specific,   yet   to   the   adult   irrelevant,   topic,   then   we   need   to   revert   back   to   a   child’s  
logic.  
In   the   end,   we   need   to   ask   ourselves   if,   when   reading   a   novel   featuring   a  
child   narrator,   we   then   look   to   understand   the   novel   as   the   child,   we   once   were   or  
as   the   adult   we   are   now?   The   text   can   be   read   and   interpreted   on   various   levels  
and   thus,   makes   the   text   multidimensional.   Of   course,   when   we   read   a   novel  
written  from  an  adult’s  perspective,  the  reader  can  also  try  to  interpret  the  book  
on  various  levels.  The  reader  can  for  example  try  to  interpret  the  narrator  or  the  
characters’   behaviour   in   relation   to   their   childhood.   Yet,   when   we   read   a   text  
narrated  from  another  adult’s  point  of  view,  we  will  always  judge  as  the  adult  we  
currently  are.  When  a  novel  is  narrated  from  a  child’s  perspective,  the  reader  has  
the  choice  to  view  the  book  as  a  child’s  construct  and  to  try  and  remember  how  we  
felt  and  acted  as  children.  
However,   the   possibility   to   interpret   the   novel   on   different   levels   only  
works,   if   the   reader   is   aware   of   this   option.   It   can   also   be   the   case   that   we  
                                                                                                               
31  Haddon,  Mark.  The  Curious  Incident  of  the  Dog  in  the  Night-­Time.  London:  Vintage.  2004,  246.  

 52  
 

unconsciously  read  on  various  levels  and  use  the  best  possible  age  level  or  frame  
of   mind,   in   order   to   understand   the   text,   without   us   consciously   trying   to   vary   our  
point  of  view  during  the  reading  process.  Or  the  reader  adopts  one  position  to  start  
off   with   and   keeps   that   position,   either   viewing   the   book   from   an   adult’s  
perspective   or   from   a   child’s   perspective,   but   constantly   remaining   in   the   same  
frame   of   mind.   It   would   be   interesting   to   see   how   a   novel   can   consciously   be  
interpreted   from   different   points   of   view,   but   then   the   conscious   hunt   for   different  
levels  of  meaning  disrupts  the  light-­‐hearted  reading  process.  
Finally,  Byron  Almén  argues  that  
 
it  would  seem  that  the  two  primary  functions  of  the  narrator  are  to  1)  situate  the  
related  events  in  the  past,  as  having  already  occurred,  and  to  2)  organize  the  plot  
or  story  in  a  coherent  manner.  With  respect  to  point  2,  we  have  seen  that  the  task  
of   making   connections   between   events   in   a   temporal   sequence   does   not   depend  
essentially  upon  the  presence  of  a  narrator,  that  the  reader/listener/observer  may  
play   the   primary   role   in   this   respect.   If   that   is   the   case,   then   a   narrator   is   not  
required  in  order  to  provide  coherence  among  events.32  
 
In  the  novels  featuring  a  child  narrator  that  I  have  read  so  far,  the  child  narrator  
has   always   been   a   first-­‐person   narrator,   who   discovers   his   surroundings   as   he  
progresses   in   the   world.   Unless   the   narrator   turns   at   times   into   an   omniscient  
narrator   and   thus,   switches   between   roles   within   the   novel,   he   is   bound   to   miss  
out  on  information,  because  he  falls  short  of  constantly  observing  and  analyzing  all  
the  other  characters  in  the  novel.  Yet,  the  child  narrator  is  not  necessarily  meant  to  
relate   to   the   events   in   his   life   in   a   linear   manner,   because   also   a   child   can   have  
flashbacks   to   past   incidents   in   his   life   and   a   child   can   also   plan   ahead   and  
imaginarily   construct   his   future.   Thus,   Byron   Almén   is   right   when   he   says   that   it  
depends   also   on   the   reader   to   what   extent   the   story   or   plot   becomes   a   coherent  
whole.  
In  the  end,  if  we  assume  that  children  always  partly  embody  their  ancestors’  
lives,  we  can  say  that  child  narrators  manage  to  link  their  ancestors’  stories  to  the  
present.   Child   narrators   become   a   tool   that   highlights   the   idea   that   past   narratives  
are  born  from  the  lives  of  previous  generations.  Narratives  are  recurring  in  cycles  

                                                                                                               
32  Almén,  Byron.  “Narrative  Archetypes:  A  Critique,  Theory,  and  Method  of  Narrative  Analysis.”  

Journal  of  Music  Theory  47.1  (Spring  2003):  1-­‐39,  8  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  
(BA).  
  53  
 

and  no  matter  how  small  the  source  of  a  narrative  might  be  in  the  beginning,  the  
story  will  always  develop  into  a  complex  whole.  
In  conclusion,  the  device  of  the  child  narrator  has  only  recently  emerged  in  
literature   as   an   independent   device.   However,   it   depends   not   just   on   the   author  
and   on   how   he   develops   a   child   character,   but   the   complexity   of   a   character   also  
depends   on   the   reader’s   ability   to   interpret   and   construct   a   coherent   child  
narrator,  based  on  the  author’s  input.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 54  
 

2.4.  Adult  Literature  


Finally,  if  we  want  to  have  a  look  at  the  role  of  the  child  narrator  in  adult  literature,  
we   need   to   define   as   well   what   we   understand   by   the   term  ‘adult   literature.’   When  
we   think   of   topics   especially   meant   for   adult   readers,   then   sexual   content  
immediately  springs  to  mind.  So,  if  we  assume  that  there  is  literature  that  does  not  
focus  on  sexual  topics,  but  that  can  still  be  defined  as  adult  literature,  we  need  to  
find  a  way  of  identifying  adult  literature,  according  to  other  standards.  
In   general,   adult   literature   revolves   around   topics   that   are   of   interest   to  
adults,   like   inter-­‐human   relationships,   children,   financial   hardship,   travelling   and  
work   related   issues.   At   the   same   time,   young   adult   literature   focuses   on   topics   like  
first   love,   drugs   and   alcohol.   Consequently,   literature   mirrors   the   problems   and  
worries  and  train  of  thoughts  of  those  people  that  are   reading   those   specific   kinds  
of  books.  The  reading  progress  becomes  a  way  of  coming  to  terms  with  one’s  own  
problems   and   worries,   because   reading   about   people   with   the   same   background  
and   emotional   swaying   helps   to   put   one’s   own   drawbacks   and   challenges   into  
perspectives.   The   reading   process   allows   the   reader   to   identify   with   the   outside  
world,  which  leads  to  the  reader’s  relativization  of  personal  misery:  if  other  people  
have   experienced   and   survived   the   same   challenges,   which   I   am   living   and  
undergoing  at  the  moment,  I  will  be  capable  of  coming  to  terms  with  my  situation  
as   well.   As   a   consequence,   we   can   say   that   the   novels   we   read   indicate   in   which  
direction   our   lives   are   headed,   at   a   specific   point   in   time,   or   which   experiences   we  
want   to   process   through   reading.   Of   course,   this   conclusion   is   a   generalization   and  
obviously   does   not   apply   to   every   reader,   because   people   can   also   read   all   sorts   of  
texts  out  of  a  pure  broad  range  of  interest.  Yet,  in  general  people  are  intrigued  by  
those  ideas  that  make  their  worlds  go  round  and  reading  is  a  way  of  dealing  with  
problems,   without   having   to   discuss   one’s   personal   concerns   with   other   people.  
Reading  is  a  discrete  self-­‐help  tool  that  caters  for  all  kinds  of  concerns  and  fetishes.  
Accordingly,  the  language  level  or  the  writing  styles  are  secondary,  when  it  
comes   to   distinguishing   between   different   categories   for   target   readerships.   The  
content   of   the   novel   defines,   which   age   group   the   text   caters   for,   in   general.   It   is  
logical   that   teenagers   are   more   interested   in   topics   like   first   love   or   schoolyard  
bullying,  than  adults.  However,  identifying  and  defining  a  novel  as  belonging  to  the  
category   of   adult   fiction   means   that   this   novel   is   in   general   more   sought   after   by  
  55  
 

adult   readers.   Yet,   teenagers   can   also   show   an   interest   in   a   novel   stigmatized   as  
adult  read,  because  it  broaches  the  issue  of  a  problem  that  a  teenager  is  currently  
faced  with.  Vice-­‐versa,  an  adult  can  also  be  interested  in  a  teenage  read,  when  an  
adult  has  to  deal  with  teenage  problems,  as  a  parent  or  educator,  for  instance.  In  
that  respect,  not  just  a  person’s  private  context,  but  also  his  work  context  defines,  
which  literature  an  individual  consults.  
Additionally,   readers   generally   assume   that   adult   novels   deal   with   topics  
that   are   more   challenging   to   come   to   terms   with   and   to   process   emotionally   and  
psychologically.   Adults   assume   that   children   are   not   apt   yet   to   read   about  
problems   like   violation,   sexual   abuse   and   unfaithfulness   in   relationships.  
Consequently,   novels   dealing   with   those   and   similar   problems   are   categorized   as  
adult   novels.   However,   in   the   past,   children   read   books   that   were   originally  
intended   for   an   adult   readership.   Charles   Dickens’   Oliver   Twist   (1838)   or   Mark  
Twain’s  The  Adventures  of  Huckleberry  Finn  (1884)  were  primarily  written  for  an  
adult  public.  Robert  Bruce  explains  that  ‘Huck  lies,  cheats,  steals,  and  defrauds  his  
way   down   the   river.   These   traits   are   part   of   the   reason   that   Huck   Finn   was   viewed  
as   a   book   not   acceptable   for   children.’33   However,   in   the   nineteenth   century,  
children  read  the  texts  that  were  available  in  the  household,  because  the  parents  
could   not   afford   to   buy   new   books   and   often   only   wealthy   families   possessed   their  
own  copies  anyway.  
Moreover,   children   nowadays   are   confronted   with   much   more   graphic  
violence  and  abuse  on  a  daily  basis,  than  children  would  be  able  to  imagine,  when  
reading   a   novel,   which   focuses   on   the   same   set   of   problems.   Consequently,   the  
difference   between   an   adult   novel   and   a   children’s   novel   does   not   lie   in   how  
appropriate   or   easily   digestible   the   content   is   for   a   reader,   but   how   much   that  
reader  can  draw  from  and  develop,  because  of  the  reading  process.  A  child  reading  
about  marital  unfaithfulness  can  understand  the  novel’s  content,  but  he  will  not  be  
able  to  use  the  character’s  conclusions  or  way  of  dealing  with  the  challenges  he  is  
facing,   because   the   setting   is   miles   apart   from   his   own   childlike   worldview.   In  
contrast   though,   a   child   of   divorced   parents,   who   reads   about   marital   problems,  
might  still  find  it  challenging  to  understand  all  the  adult  worries  and  qualms,  yet  
the   reading   process   might   lead   to   the   child’s   realization   that   there   are   further  
                                                                                                               
33  Bruce,  Robert.  Cliffs  Notes  On  Twain’s  Huckleberry  Finn.  N.Y.:  Wiley  Publishing.  2000,  81.  

 56  
 

couples   and   families,   who   have   to   live   through   similar   experiences   and   as   a  
consequence,  the  child  refrains  from  blaming  himself  as  the  source  of  the  parents’  
separation,  which  is  an  attitude  that  children  commonly  adopt  in  divorce  cases.  
In  contrast,  an  adult  reading  a  children’s  novel  has  the  necessary  experience  
in   order   to   interpret   more   into   a   text,   than   there   might   actually   be.   For   example,  
J.K.   Rowling’s   Harry   Potter   series   (1997)   focuses   on   the   life   of   a   wizard   child.   In  
general,  in  terms  of  content,  we  would  say  that  these  texts  are  classical  children’s  
novels,  because  they  revolve  around  a  reality  that  stimulates  children’s  fantasy  and  
creativity  and  that  is  devoid  of  inappropriate  material  that  children  have  no  need  
for  and  which  they  cannot  process,  according  to  a  lack  of  experience.  However,  it  is  
a   fact   that   J.K.   Rowling’s   novels   also   attract   a   broad   adult   readership.   On   the   one  
hand,   the   fantastic   elements   in   Harry   Potter   that   stimulate   the   children’s   dreams  
also   stimulate   adult   musing   and   catapult   us   back   into   a   time,   when   life   was   less  
cluttered  with  responsibility  and  when  we  did  not  need  to  pretend  yet,  that  we  are  
cultured  and  educated  and  that  we  can  read  and  understand  complex  literary  texts.  
On  the  other  hand,  adults  have  the  necessary  experience  to  identify  friction  
and   show   of   power   between   characters,   which   turns   the   children’s   novel   into   a  
metaphor   for   the   adult   world.   Consequently,   one   text   can   be   understood   and  
interpreted   on   different   levels,   according   to   the   reader’s   needs,   experience   and  
degree   of   intelligence.   The   difference   in   defining   a   novel   as   adult   novel   or   as  
children’s  novel  lies  in  finding  the  age  category  for  which  a  novel  generally  offers  
the  most  emotional  and  psychological  support.  
According   to   our   theory,   novels   featuring   child   narrators   would   then   in  
general  be  less  interesting  for  adult  readers,  because  the  story  is  told  from  a  child’s  
perspective  and  centres  on  the  child’s  daily  problems.  However,  those  stories  like  
The   Life   Before   Us   and   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close   do   centre   on   children’s  
lives,   but   their   settings   are   very   specific.   The   overall   topics   of   these   novels   revolve  
around  drug  abuse,  prostitution,  terrorism  and  family  secrets,  which  are  all  issues  
that  adults  need  to  process  and  find  answers  for.  Of  course,  a  child  who  has  lost  his  
father   in   9/11   like   Oskar   in   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close,   will   be   able   to  
retrace   the   train   of   thought   of   the   protagonist   much   better   than   an   adult   reader,  
who  has  never  even  been  to  America.  This  fact  illustrates  that  categorizing  novels  
as   adult   novels   or   as   children’s   novels   is   always   just   a   generalization   and   varies  

  57  
 

from   person   to   person.   Additionally,   it   depends   on   the   novel’s   potential   for  


interpretation   and   on   the   reader’s   capacity   for   understanding,   in   order   to   turn   a  
children’s  novel  into  an  adult  read.  
In  the  end,  after  having  defined  the  terms  of  child,  child  narrator,  adult  and  
children’s   literature,   we   might   also   want   to   ask   the   question,   if   it   is   easier   for   a  
writer  to  invent  a  child  narrator  for  an  adult  novel  or  whether  it  is  easier  to  come  
up  with  a  child  narrator,  for  a  children’s  novel.  First,  on  the  one  hand,  we  can  say  
that   writing   for   a   specific   audience   of   children   demands   an   adapted   lexis,   because,  
depending  on  the  child’s  age,  its  lexis  is  still  little  developed.  Yet,  on  the  other  hand,  
the   author   can   write   in   the   same   way   and   use   the   same   words,   independently   of  
the  reader’s  age.  Even  if  a  child  does  not  know  the  meaning  of  all  the  words  it  is  
reading,   the   child   can   still   figure   out   the   meaning   of   the   words   through   context,  
which   is   similar   when   a   person   learns   a   foreign   language.   Additionally,   parents  
also  speak  in  the  same  way  with  their  children,  as  they  speak  with  each  other.  So,  
why  would  a  writer  need  to  adapt  his  literary  language?  
Finally,   there   are   a   number   of   children’s   classics   that   were   primarily  
intended  as  adult  texts.  The  only  difference  that  I  can  think  of  is  that  adults  might  
demand  a  more  complex  writing  style  and  more  advanced  or  challenging  thinking  
or   lexis,   whereas   children   do   not   get   caught   up   in   questions   of   style,   when   they  
assess  a  novel’s  quality.  Children  focus  much  more  on  the  creativity  of  a  text,  than  
on  the  potential  challenge  and  intellectual  development  a  text  may  offer.  Thus,  one  
could   say   that   children   are   less   pretentious,   when   they   choose   which   text   they  
want   to   read.   Children   can   simply   pick   a   text,   independently   of   its   high   literary  
appeal,  whereas  adults  often  choose  novels  that  seem  appropriate  for  their  status  
in  society.    
 
 
 
 
 
 

 58  
 

3.  Critical  Thinking:  The  Child  Narrator’s  Effect  


In   the   foregoing   debate,   we   have   defined   the   key   terms   that   are   relevant   for   our  
research  thesis.  Yet,  the  most  crucial  matter  remains  the  question  why  an  author  
would  choose  a  child  narrator  as  the  transmitter  of  his  message  and  why  would  an  
adult  want  to  read  a  story  told  by  a  person  younger  than  himself?  Surely,  children’s  
vocabulary  and  character  are  less  complex?  Henry  James  has  argued  that  
 
the  children’s  vision  is  at  any  moment  richer,  their  apprehension  even  constantly  
stronger,   than   their   prompt,   their   at   all   producible,   vocabulary.   Amusing   therefore  
as   it   might   at   first   blush   have   seemed   to   restrict   myself   in   this   case   to   the   terms   as  
well  as  to  the  experience,  it  became  at  once  plain  that  such  an  attempt  would  fail.  
(TT  208)  
 
As   a   consequence,   Henry   James   has   supported   his   character   Maisie   in   What   Maisie  
Knew   (1897)   with   ‘his   own   commentary   [that]   constantly   attends   and   amplifies’  
(TT  208)   the   child’s   worldview.   In   What   Maisie   Knew,   the   author’s   persona   intrudes  

on   the   story   and   the   writer,   as   the   origin   of   the   text,   becomes   palpable   for   the  
reader.   So,   if   an   author   like   Henry   James   has   shied   away   from   the   technique   of  
presenting  a  narrative  from  a  pure  child  perspective,  then  which  assets  constitute  
the  appeal  of  a  child  narrator?  What  makes  the  child  narrator’s  role  advantageous  
for   adult   literature?   Or,   on   the   other   hand,   what   are   the   disadvantages   and  
drawbacks   of   fiction   narrated   in   a   child’s   voice.   Those   are   the   key   questions  
discussed  in  the  following  paragraphs.  
First   of   all,   when   we   talk   about   advantages   and   disadvantages   in   relation   to  
narrating   a   story   from   a   child’s   point   of   view,   we   need   to   specify   what   kind   of  
benefit  or  shortcomings  we  are  talking  about  and  for  whom.  Firstly,  are  there  any  
advantages   or   disadvantages   for   the   author,   when   creating   a   child   character   and  
narrator   as   opposed   to   an   adult   narrator?   Is   it   possible   that   a   child   can   transmit  
the   author’s   message   more   precisely   and   to   the   point   than   an   adult   narrator?   Or  
does  the  message  come  to  lack  poignancy,  when  the  narrator  is  a  child?  
Secondly,   what   are   the   advantages   or   drawbacks   for   the   reader,   when   the  
story   is   told   from   a   child’s   perspective?   Can   the   reader   identify   with   a   child  
character   and   narrator   at   all?   Does   the   intellectual   level   of   the   narrative   still  
stimulate  the  reader’s  interest  when  a  child  tells  the  story?  

  59  
 

And  finally,  can  the  child  in  real  life  benefit  in  any  way,  when  children  are  in  
the   focus   of   fictional   texts   or   does   the   child’s   status   suffer   any   negative  
consequences   after   a   book   featuring   a   child   narrator   has   been   published?   Does  
literature,   which   depicts   the   child’s   social   situation,   influence   the   broader   public  
attitude  and  behaviour  at  all?  
We   are   going   to   discuss   the   forgoing   questions,   according   to   their  
advantages  or  disadvantages  in  relation  to  broader  topics,  like  the  child  narrator’s  
influence  on  the  literary  appeal  of  the  novel,  on  the  characters’  complexity  and  on  
the   development   of   moral   questions,   rather   than   alternately   looking   at   the  
advantages  or  disadvantages  for  author,  reader  and  child.  
To   begin   with,   books   narrated   by   children   have   the   advantage   that   the  
author   can   naturally   render   quirky   pictures,   drawings   or   cartoons   part   of   his  
novel.   Usually,   if   adult   novels   narrated   by   adults   contain   illustrations,   then   they  
present  the  world  from  a  grown-­‐up’s  point  of  view.  In  a  novel,  narrated  by  a  child  
though,   the   author   needs   to   make   sure   to   present   the   pictures   and   illustrations  
from  a  child’s  perspective.  At  this  point,  the  question  is  raised  to  what  extent  one  
can  distinguish  if  a  drawing  was  made  by  a  child  or  an  adult  and  what  exactly  is  a  
child’s  perspective?  Adult  drawings  are  just  as  often  scrawly  and  in  disproportion  
as  art  that  was  created  by  children.  If  we  imagine  though  that  we  have  one  and  the  
same   picture,   once   being   presented   and   discussed   by   an   adult   narrator   and   once  
by   a   child   narrator,   then   the   difference   lies   in   what   is   said   about   the   picture   and  
how  the  discussion  develops  and  not  in  the  picture’s  content.  In  Extremely  Loud  &  
Incredibly  Close  for  instance,  the  author  has  included  pictures  of  doorknobs  and  of  
elevator  buttons,  because  those  items  are  at  the  child’s  eye  level  on  a  daily  basis.  
These   inconspicuous,   but   essential,   everyday   objects   remind   the   reader   that   we   as  
adults   have   often   lost   our   ability   to   pay   attention   to   detail.   Adults   take   most   of  
their   environment   for   granted   and   wonder   very   rarely   about   everyday   items;  
where   do   these   objects   come   from?   Do   we   really   need   them?   Are   we   grateful   for  
their   existence   or   could   we   discard   them   and   declutter   our   lives?   In   general,  
children   ask   more   questions   about   their   environment,   than   adults.   Children   have  
the   ability   to   question   people,   events   and   experiences,   because   lots   of   the   young  
people’s   encounters   with   the   world   are   new   and   children   have   less   reference  
points   to   compare   their   experiences   with.   Readers   generally   find   it   more  

 60  
 

acceptable   when   children   marvel   and   wonder   about   everyday   objects.   An   adult  
drawing  attention  to  the  beauty  in  the  common  appears  melancholic  and  dreamy.  
On   the   other   hand,   children   do   not   necessarily   wonder   more   about   their  
environment  than  we  as  adults  do.  Yet,  as  already  mentioned  before,  children  have  
the   ability   to   discuss   our   surrounding   world   on   a   different   level   than   grown-­‐ups,  
because   young   people   are   interested   in   a   different   reality   and   consequently   in  
different  answers  than  adults.    
Additionally,   the   author   can   also   use   the   visual   material   figuratively,   in  
order   to   show   that   the   text’s   message   can   be   transmitted   on   different   levels.   In  
Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  has  included  the  picture  of  
a   doorknob,   as   already   mentioned.   On   a   first   level,   the   photograph   shows   the  
reader   what   Oskar   sees   when   he   visits   different   people   throughout   the   story.  
Oskar  is  smaller  than  an  adult  and  so,  Oskar  does  not  stand  face  to  face  with  the  
grown-­‐ups   he   meets,   but   his   height   automatically   renders   him   inferior   to   the  
adults  he  meets.  
Moreover,   the   picture   of   the   doorknob   shows   the   reader   that   Oskar   is   not  
just   physically   smaller   than   an   adult,   but   the   photograph   also   highlights   the   child’s  
limited  understanding  of  the  events  in  the  story.  The  visualization  of  Oskar’s  height  
emphasises  his  relatively  small  impact  on  the  adult  world.  
In  addition,  the  picture  that  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  has  chosen  represents  an  
extravagant,   old-­‐fashioned   doorknob.   The   reader   associates   the   visual   material  
with  other  items  that  he  has  come  across  in  his  life.  Thus,  in  his  imagination,  the  
reader  supports  his  understanding  of  the  story,  by  associating  the  visual  material  
in  the  text  with  previous  similar  impressions  that  he  has  come  across  in  real  life.  
Consequently,   the   reader   can   expand   the   story’s   scope   on   the   basis   of   the   visual  
material  that  is  included  in  the  book,  without  the  author’s  interference.  
Finally,  in  a  figurative  way,  the  picture  of  the  doorknob  also  shows  that  the  
child’s  encounter  with  different  people  allows  him  to  grow  throughout  the  story:  
the   more   doors   the   child   narrator   opens   on   his   journey,   the   more   he   will  
emotionally,   physically,   and   psychologically   develop   as   time   passes   by.   An   adult  
narrator   can   convey   the   same   impression,   because   to   what   extent   a   text   can   be  
interpreted   on   a   figurative   level   vastly   depends   on   the   reader’s   understanding   and  
ability  for  interpretation  and  not  solely  on  the  text  itself.  

  61  
 

According  to  Elinor  Ochs,  


 
narratives   are   not   usually   monomodal,   but   rather   they   integrate   two   or   more  
communicative   modes.   Visual   representation,   gesture,   facial   expression   and  
physical   activity,   for   example,   can   be   combined   with   talk,   song,   or   writing   to  
convey   a   tale.   These   blendings   characterize   narratives   in   a   wide   array   of   settings  
and   communities.   […]   Visual   art   forms   tell   a   story   along   a   continuum   of  
condensation  and  abstraction.  A  story  may  be  told  across  a  sequence  of  pictures,  as  
in   cave   art,   or   condensed   into   a   single   frame,   which   can   be   unpacked   using   a  
singular  form  of  narrative  literacy.34  
 
Elinor  Ochs  points  out  that  narratives  are  usually  multimodal.  Yet,  on  the  one  hand,  
the  written  narrative  remains  first  monomodal,  because  it  is  based  on  writing  and  
is   first,   a   self-­‐contained   narrative.   Fiction   becomes   only   multimodal,   when   the  
writer   decides   to   accompany   his   writing   with   pictures   and   to   visually   illustrate   his  
words.  
On   the   other   hand,   Elinor   Ochs   is   right   in   her   assumption   that   each  
narrative   is   multimodal,   when   we   admit   that   the   reading   process   triggers   visual  
representations   in   the   reader’s   mind   and   thus,   leads   to   a   transcribed   form   of  
multimodality.   When   a   reader   has   the   liberty   to   create   his   own   mental   images,  
which   illustrate   the   words   on   the   page,   then   the   idea   of   multimodality   adopts   an  
even  more  profound  dimension,  because  the  reader  is  free  to  create  his  own  visual  
narrative,   based   on   the   author’s   story.   Consequently,   one   single   narrative   form  
expands   and   adopts   different   shapes,   depending   on   the   reader’s   independent  
creative  and  imaginary  capacity.  
Furthermore,   while   one   narrative   form   expands   and   adopts   various   other  
representative   shapes,   the   contrary   can   also   happen,   where   a   multitude   of  
narrative   levels   condense   into   a   single   frame.   A   biography,   for   example,   is   the  
literary  condensation  of  a  life  led  through  pictures,  relationships,  voice,  and  facial  
expressions.   In   the   end,   a   written   biography   combines   all   those   representative  
modes  and  visualizes  a  life  as  words  on  a  page.  
Moreover,   one   and   the   same   narrator   can   use   different   kinds   of   media,   in  
order  to  express  one  and  the  same  narrative  in  different  ways.  An  author  can,  for  
example,  capture  his  biography  as  written  words  on  a  page,  but  the  author  can  also  
compile   a   picture   book,   which   shows   his   life   through   a   sequence   of   photographs  
                                                                                                               
34  Ochs,  Elinor  and  Lisa  Capps.  “Narrating  the  Self.”  Annual  Review  of  Anthropology  25  (1996):  19-­‐

43,  20  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (EO).  
 62  
 

and  illustrations,  from  his  earliest  years  to  the  present  date.  These  narrative  forms  
are  only  two  possible  shapes  that  a  narrator  can  choose,  in  order  to  give  a  tangible  
shape   to   an   otherwise   elusive   idea:   if   I   think   about   writing   a   biography,   for  
example,  then  this  idea  remains  intangible,  until  I  use  a  kind  of  media  of  my  choice,  
like   writing,   which   allows   me   to   capture   my   idea   and   to   turn   it   into   a   tangible  
object,  like  a  book.  
Additionally,   blendings   of   different   representative   modes   do   not   only  
characterize   different   communities   and   settings,   but   multimodal   narratives   also  
reach  a  wider  audience,  because  when  words  fail  to  communicate  meaning,  when  
reader  and  writer  do  not  share  the  same  language,  then  visual  illustrations  manage  
to   convey   an   equally   accurate   message.   Small   children,   for   example,   who   cannot  
read  yet,  manage  to  understand  the  stories  their  picture  books  tell  them,  because  
toddlers   are   used   to   a   basic   level   of   visual   representation.   In   a   child’s   case,   the  
picture   book   story   can   also   be   accompanied   by   the   mother’s   oral   narrative   that  
offers   further   explanations   and   creative   padding,   in   support   of   the   story’s   visual  
level.   The   mother   telling   her   child   a   story   based   on   pictures,   also   illustrates   the  
idea   that   one   mode   of   communication   can   expand   and   adopt   another   shape,  
depending   on   the   reader   or   on   the   audience   in   general.   A   written   text,   which   is  
read  out,  also  becomes  multimodal.  
Moreover,   the   idea   of   the   mother   constructing   a   narrative   based   on   a  
sequence   of   pictures,   highlights   Elinor   Ochs’   idea   that   ‘a   single   frame   can   be  
unpacked   through   literacy.’   The   mother   is   orally   transmitting   the   message   the  
pictures  convey  to  her.  A  different  mother  might  understand  the  same  images  in  a  
different   way   and   spin   a   different   story,   based   on   the   pictures.   Consequently,  
allocating  meaning  to  one  narrative  form  and  turning  one  mode  of  illustration  into  
another,   depends   on   the   person   who   does   the   deconstruction   and   later  
reconstruction  of  the  ideas  at  hand.  
Yet,  the  written  narrative  is  the  one  mode  that  allows  people  to  share  their  
interpretation   of   an   experience   with   a   wider   audience.   If   people   orally   discuss   a  
piece   of   art,   for   example,   then   exchange   is   of   course   taking   place,   but   this  
discussion  remains  limited  to  the  world  of  a  restricted  number  of  people.  When  we  
record  a  debate  on  paper  though,  the  discussed  ideas  remain  accessible  for  future  
examination  by  different  people,  or  by  future  generations.  

  63  
 

Finally,  narrative  forms  adopt  various  shapes  and  one  narrative  form  brings  
about  another,  depending  on  the  audience.  Yet,  a  combination  of  narrative  modes  
is  what  leads  to  the  most  accurate  transmission  and  understanding  of  the  message  
that  the  sender  intends  to  convey.  
Additionally,  in  relation  to  the  visual  material  that  an  author  uses  in  order  
to  reinforce  his  written  message,  we  need  to  ask  the  question  whether  the  type  of  
visual   material   that   an   author   chooses   for   his   novel   depends   on   the   narrator’s  
character   or   not.   First,   the   writer   has   a   certain   image   in   mind,   when   he   creates   the  
story’s   narrator.   Consequently,   the   writer   consciously   or   unconsciously   chooses  
visual   material   that   he   associates   with   his   literary   figure   and   that   highlights   the  
narrator’s  nature,  according  to  the  author.  Thus,  on  the  one  hand,  the  material  that  
a  writer  picks,  in  order  to  visualize  his  texts,  depends  on  the  attitude  and  character  
that  the  narrator  displays.  
On  the  other  hand,  the  image  a  writer  has  in  mind,  when  he  creates  his  child  
narrator,   is   not   necessarily   identical   to   the   reader’s   visualization   of   the   story’s  
narrator.  The  reader  has  also  an  individual  conception  of  the  narrator  in  mind.  As  a  
consequence,   the   reader   can   perceive   the   visual   material   included   in   a   novel   as  
contradictory   to   the   narrator’s   nature   or   the   reader   fails   to   make   the   association  
between  narrator  and  visual  material.  On  the  other  hand  again,  it  can  be  the  case  
that   the   author   has   a   different   initial   understanding   of   the   narrator,   but   that   the  
visual   material   helps   to   mould   the   reader’s   interpretation   and   understanding   of  
the  narrator  along  the  lines  of  the  visual  material  that  the  author  has  chosen  or  the  
reader   interprets   the   visual   material   according   to   the   narrator’s   character   as   he  
has  understood  it.  
Moreover,   there   is   also   the   question   whether   the   visual   material   that   an  
author  includes  in  his  text  changes,  depending  on  the  narrator’s  age  and  function.  
On  the  one  hand,  the  visual  material  serves  a  purpose  of  its  own,  because  the  visual  
material  speaks  to  the  reader  on  a  different  level  than  the  written  word.  Pictures  
and   drawings   are   meant   to   introduce   the   fact   that   there   are   different   levels   of  
reality   and   that   a   person   can   look   at   a   problem   or   question   from   different  
perspectives.  In  that  case,  the  author  either  chooses  pictures  that  are  shot  from  a  
child’s  perspective,  in  order  to  confront  the  reader  with  the  child’s  outlook  on  the  
world.   Or,   the   author   includes   pictures   that   mirror   an   adult’s   reality   and   thus,  

 64  
 

manages  to  highlight  the  contrast  between  a  child  and  an  adult  perspective.  In  that  
case,  the  child’s  perspective  reaches  the  reader  as  words  on  the  page  and  the  adult  
perspective  adopts  the  form  of  the  visual  material.  Thus,  the  discrepancy  between  
the   adult   and   the   child’s   world   would   also   adopt   a   figurative   dimension,   because  
the   two   worlds   or   attitudes   are   represented   via   two   different   kinds   of   media.  
However,  the  fact  that  the  novel  includes  both,  text  and  pictures,  shows  that  adult  
and  child  perspective  can  and  need  to  work  together,  in  order  to  form  a  coherent  
and   complex   whole.   So,   even   if   the   narrator’s   age   or   function   changes,   the   visual  
material   is   still   intended   to   highlight   various   levels   of   interpretation   and  
understanding  that  a  story  can  adopt  and  thus,  the  function  of  the  visual  material  
remains  established,  independently  of  the  narrator.  
On  the  other  hand,  the  content  of  the  visual  material  can  change  according  
to  the  child  narrator’s  age  and  function,  if  the  author  wants  to  transmit  a  different  
message,   than   the   one   discussed   in   the   foregoing   paragraph.   When   the   author  
intends   to   underline   that   his   central   figure   has   a   specifically   pronounced   tick   for  
example,   then   the   author   arranges   the   visual   material   in   his   story   in   such   a   way  
that   the   chosen   pictures   support   the   child   narrator’s   character.   This   approach   is  
for   example   the   case   in   Mark   Haddon’s   novel   The   Curious   Incident   of   the   Dog   in   the  
Night-­Time.   Christopher,   the   child   character   in   Mark   Haddon’s   novel,   has  
Asperger’s   Syndrome   and   his   disposition   renders   him   talented   at   maths.  
Consequently,  the  visual  material  included  in  the  novel  encompasses  mathematical  
formula   and   symmetrical   shapes,   which   visualize   Christopher’s   way   of   looking   at  
and  categorizing  his  surroundings.  
Finally,   the   question   remains   whether   the   reader   senses   the   author   as   the  
selector   of   the   novel’s   images   or   whether   the   reader   feels   as   if   he   is   confronted  
with   a   child’s   point   of   view.   The   answer   to   this   question   depends   on   the   idea   to  
what  extent  the  reader  is  immersed  in  the  story  and  manages  to  identify  with  the  
novel’s  main  character.  When  a  reader  cannot  fully  identify  with  a  text  or  with  its  
message,   then   the   reader   will   start   to   question   the   pictures   included   in   the   text,  
too.  At  the  same  time,  as  a  consequence  of  the  reader’s  resistance  to  take  the  novel  
at   face   value,   the   reader   also   starts   to   question   the   novel’s   message   and   the  
characters’   authenticity.   So,   as   soon   as   the   reader   starts   to   feel   the   author’s  

  65  
 

presence   as   the   origin   of   the   chosen   visual   material,   then   the   reader   also   begins   to  
question  the  text  as  a  whole.  
In  conclusion,  on  a  first  level,  the  child  narrator  manages  to  present  visual  
material   differently   than   an   adult   narrator   and   a   child   narrator   can   attribute  
different  levels  of  interpretation  to  pictures.  The  child’s  perspective  illustrates  that  
there   is   a   reality   different   to   our   adult   perception.   In   When   We   Were   Romans,  
Lawrence   says:   ‘Its   all   ruins,   there   are   just   a   few   columns   and   walls   so   I   thought  
“this  is  boring”  but  actually  that  was  wrong,  you  must  close  your  eyes  and  use  your  
imagination  you  see.’35  Literally  looking  from  a  different  perspective  at  the  world  
surrounding  us,  helps  the  reader  to  question  his  own  perception  of  the  world.  Of  
course,   if   the   narrator   was   an   adult,   he   could   also   outline   and   highlight   a   reality  
contrasting   our   own,   by   viewing   and   discussing   problems   from   a   different  
perspective.   However,   children   draw   our   attention   to   our   surroundings,  
highlighting  the  extraordinary  in  the  ordinary,  whereas  another  adult  figure  shares  
our  level  of  perception  from  a  different  angle,  instead  of  from  a  different  level  and  
varied  angle.  The  child’s  perspective  reminds  the  reader  that  our  understanding  of  
the   world   is   not   universal   and   propagates   tolerance   and   understanding   of  
otherness.  
Additionally,   children   are   confronted   with   different   kinds   of   media   than  
adults   and   accordingly,   their   worldview   is   different   from   ours.   Children   watch  
children’s   TV   and   read   books   for   children,   which   often   also   include   illustrations.  
Consequently,  an  author  who  includes  pictures  in  his  novel  puts  the  adult  reader  
on  a  child’s  level,  because  the  author  relegates  the  adult  reader  into  a  child’s  shoes,  
by  offering  adult  literature  under  a  form  similar  to  children’s  literature.  
Of  course,  nowadays  children  are  more  and  more  confronted  with  a  world  
of   media   that   is   not   tailored   to   children’s   needs.   In   that   case,   children   have   to   cope  
with   a   reality   that   is   beyond   their   understanding.   Adult   novels   narrated   by  
children,   take   this   aspect   into   account   too.   The   pictures   included   in   the   novels  
represent  situations  or  items  that  children  need  to  deal  with,  because  life  confronts  
them   with   unknown   situations,   but   which   young   people   find   it   hard   to   make   sense  
of.  In  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  includes  pictures  of  a  

                                                                                                               
35  Kneale,  Matthew.  When  We  Were  Romans.  London:  Picador.  2008,  59  –  Further  references  are  

included  in  the  text  (MK).  


 66  
 

man   jumping   from   the   Twin   Towers   on   9/11.   Those   pictures   show   a   real   life  
situation   and   are   not   drawn   by   a   child’s   hand.   Consequently,   the   view   that   the  
adult   reader   and   the   child   narrator   share   is   identical.   In   this   case,   the   child’s  
perspective  does  not  introduce  a  new  aspect  to  the  discussion,  in  terms  of  how  the  
outlook   on   the   world   varies   from   adult   to   child.   In   the   case   of   Jonathan   Safran  
Foer’s  novel,  the  shocking  pictures  of  9/11  are  meant  to  remind  the  reader  of  the  
fact   that   children   are   confronted   with   the   same   current   or   worldly   events   and   that  
children  are  also  confronted  in  an  unfiltered  way  with  adult  media  tailored  to  adult  
understanding.  
Moreover,   Elinor   Ochs   has   argued   that   ‘a   story   may   be   told   across   a  
sequence   of   pictures.’   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   uses   a   sequence   of   nearly   identical  
pictures,  in  order  to  tell  the  story  of  Oskar’s  past  and  of  America’s  past.  Thus,  visual  
images  can  (combine  and)  reduce  a  broader  narrative  to  a  minimum.  An  image  is  a  
condensed   narrative   that   can   be   interpreted   in   a   broader   variety   of   ways,   than  
words   written   on   a   page.   On   the   one   hand,   the   author   condenses   the   narrative   and  
squeezes   it   into   a   single   shape.   On   the   other   hand,   the   author   unpacks   the  
narrative   that   the   image   contains,   in   order   to   construct   a   new,   elaborate   narrative,  
based  on  the  visual  representation  and  on  the  reader’s  understanding  of  the  image.  
Additionally,   we   can   ask   the   question   whether   there   actually   should   be   a  
world   especially   tailored   for   children’s   needs,   because   it   is   only   through  
confrontation   with   reality   that   young   people   learn   how   to   deal   with   realism.   The  
way   a   child   reacts   to   a   shocking   truth,   like   the   death   of   parent,   like   in   Jonathan  
Safran   Foer’s   novel,   also   depends   on   the   options   the   child   is   given   to   process   an  
experience.   In   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close,   there   is   a   series   of   pictures   of   the  
man   falling   from   the   Twin   Towers.   The   pictures   are   arranged   in   such   a   way   that  
they  form  a  flipbook.  When  the  reader  flips  through  the  pages,  it  looks  like  the  man  
in   the   pictures   is   not   falling   from   the   building,   but   ascending.   In   this   case,   the  
author   has   managed   to   show   that   children   see   the   same   surroundings   as   adults,  
but   that   young   people   manage   to   distort   reality   in   such   a   way   that   it   becomes  
bearable.   Adult   imagination   is   stifled   and   limited   by   their   knowledge   of   what   is  
physically   possible   or   impossible.   A   child’s   perspective   and   interpretation   of   the  
world  helps  the  adult  reader  to  remember  how  to  fall  back  onto  his  creativity,  in  
order  to  solve  problems  or  in  order  to  reconstruct  a  personal  identity.  Thus,  having  

  67  
 

said  earlier  on  that  the  successful  processing  of  a  negative  experience  depends  on  
the   person’s   surroundings   and   the   offered   support,   we   can   add   that   overcoming  
grief   also   depends   on   one’s   own   ability   to   see   the   beneficial   or   comical   in   each  
situation   and   to   grow   through   and   because   of   that   incident,   independent   of   a  
person’s  age.  
Moreover,   by   witnessing   how   challenging   the   everyday   world   is   for   other  
people,   the   reader   comes   to   accept   his   own   personal   challenges   as   common  
experiences.   The   reading   process   triggers   the   positive   psychological   effect   that   the  
reader   learns   to   give   up   on   his   perfectionism,   even   if   the   narrator   is   a   child   and  
when   it   is   accepted   for   children   to   find   the   world   challenging.   Most   important   is  
that   there   is   a   human   being   facing   and   overcoming   a   challenge.   The   fact   that   it   is   a  
child  becomes  secondary.  Elinor  Ochs  points  out  that  
 
self-­‐understandings   do   not   always   take   the   form   of   soothing   narrative   solutions   to  
life’s   dilemmas.   Rather,   narratives   may   illuminate   life   as   we   know   it   by   raising  
challenging   questions   and   exploring   them   from   multiple   angles.   Although   they  
sometimes   deceive,   narrators   may   also   probe   beneath   the   surface   of   phenomena  
and   take   interlocutors   on   an   “adventurous   journey   toward   a   deeper  
understanding,   or   rather   to   a   new   and   deeper   question,   of   ourselves   in   the   world.”  
While   narrative   does   not   yield   absolute   truth,   it   can   transport   narrators   and  
audiences  to  more  authentic  feelings,  beliefs,  and  actions  and  ultimately  to  a  more  
authentic  self.  (EO  23)  
 
An   authentic   self,   as   Elinor   Ochs   describes   it,   does   not   only   imply   that   a   person  
understands   his   surroundings   and   is   understood   by   his   environment,   but   being  
authentic   also   means   that   a   person   knows   his   own   self   and   acts   upon   it.   The  
reading   process   allows   each   individual   to   get   in   touch   with   different   life  
experiences   and   truths   in   a   condensed   form.   A   life   is   too   short   in   order   to  
personally   explore   all   life’s   adventures.   Thus,   reading   about   and   dealing   with  
different  forms  of  realism,  even  if  it  is  a  fictive  reality,  allows  the  reader  to  get  to  
know   his   preferences,   his   interests   and   his   reactions   better.   Thus,   the   reader’s  
confrontation   with   a   child   narrator   grants   the   reader   access   to   an   additional  
dimension  in  life;  a  dimension  that  people  tend  to  forget  or  to  deliberately  put  in  
the  background,  because  at  some  point  we  need  to  act  like  adults  do  according  to  
social  norm.  Yet,  in  order  to  live  an  authentic  life,  it  is  necessary  for  the  individual  
to  confront  his  childhood  experiences  in  his  own  right  and  to  learn  from  the  past.  
Reading  and  seeing  the  world  from  a  child  narrator’s  perspective  allows  the  reader  

 68  
 

to  revisit  his  former  self  or  to  compare  his  past  self  to  a  different  child  version  and  
to   reconstruct   his   adult   identity,   based   on   the   re-­‐evaluated   conception   that   a  
person  had  of  himself.  
Another   advantage   of   having   a   child   narrator   is   that   children   are   less  
influenced   and   their   actions   and   speech   are   less   restricted   by   social   norms   and  
conventions.  A  child’s  way  of  life  is  uncluttered  by  adult  perception  and  thus,  the  
child  observes  its  environment  unfiltered,  by  the  idea  of  what  one  should  observe  
and  what  one  should  overlook,  according  to  stereotypical  social  conventions.  The  
child   narrator   becomes   the   author’s   tool   that   allows   the   writer   to   point   out   and  
comment   on   social   shortcomings.   In   that   situation,   the   reader   perceives   a   child  
that   tries   to   make   sense   of   a   world   that   is   unknown   to   him,   whereas   an   adult  
character   commenting   on   social   shortcomings   is   understood   as   overtly   critical   of  
society.  A  child  is  still  protected  by  stereotypical  adult  assumptions.  Adults  believe  
that   the   child   is   naïve   and   finds   it   challenging   to   understand   his   surrounding  
world.   A   child   is   allowed   to   ask   questions,   whereas   an   adult   asking   questions   is  
often   frowned   at   or   laughed   at   for   his   ignorance   or,   in   contrast,   for   his  
intrusiveness.   Of   course,   children   can   also   take   their   environment   for   granted.   The  
child   who   points   out   social   shortcomings   turns   unconsciously   into   a   moral  
instance,  but  the  adult  reader  is  more  willing  to  accept  and  contemplate  the  child’s  
words,   than   adult   criticism.   The   child’s   evaluation   of   the   situation   is   pronounced  
without   any   judgment,   because   often   the   child   does   not   know   what   the   adult  
words  or  thoughts  he  imitates  really  imply.  
On   the   one   hand,   the   argument,   which   says   that   children   are   freer   to  
express   themselves,   because   they   are   unaware   of   and   thus,   less   restricted,   by  
conventions   and   social   norms,   is   true.   In   contrast   though,   children   are   more   easily  
manipulated,   because   children   crave   their   surroundings’   attention.   Children  
mirror   the   adult   world,   because   they   want   to   belong   to   the   group   and   gain   the  
adults’  approval.  This  observation  leads  to  the  reader’s  insecurity,  because  an  adult  
can   never   be   sure   whether   an   incident   narrated   by   a   child   is   a   pure   observation   or  
whether   the   child   narrates   a   story   the   way   his   parents   would   narrate   it,   because  
the  child  mirrors  his  surroundings  and  says  what  he  thinks  his  parents  would  like  
to  hear.  

  69  
 

On  the  other  hand,  every  narrative,  whether  told  from  a  child’s  or  an  adult’s  
perspective,   is   influenced   by   the   desire   to   convince   or   impress   the   reader.  
Consequently,  reality  is  often  twisted  to  such  an  extent  that  the  audience  buys  into  
the   story’s   truthfulness.   Nobody   can   detach   himself   from   the   desire   to   partly   cater  
for  what  we  deem  to  be  other  people’s  expectations  of  us.    
Additionally,   the   child   is   also   unaware   that   the   situations   he   observes   are  
amoral  or  ethically  doubtful.  According  to  Schapiro  Tamar,  
 
the   point   is   merely   that,   in   general,   we   do   not   feel   bound   by   children’s   expressions  
of   their   wills   in   the   same   way   that   we   feel   bound   by   adults’   expression   of   theirs.  
Second,  we  tend  not  to  hold  children  responsible  for  what  they  do  in  the  same  way  
that   we   hold   adults   responsible   for   their   actions.   This   is   no   to   say   that   we   don’t  
hold   children   responsible   for   their   actions   in   any   sense.   But   the   knowledge   that   an  
agent   is   a   child   rather   than   an   adult   often   promotes   us   to   modify   our   “reactive  
attitudes”   toward   her.   An   adult   who   laughs   at   your   bald   spot   is   to   be   resented;   a  
child  who  does  the  same  is  to  be  disciplined  –  at  least  insofar  as  you  decide  to  treat  
her  as  a  child.  In  this  sense,  we  do  not  take  child  action  as  seriously  as  adult  action,  
or,  rather,  we  do  not  take  it  seriously  in  the  same  way.  (TS  717)  
 
In   the   beginning,   the   reader   thinks   that   the   child   narrator   is   the   puppet   of   the  
writer.  The  narrator  transmits  the  message  of  the  author  and  the  child  in  the  novel  
obeys  the  adult  writer’s  orders,  just  as  children  in  the  real  world  obey  their  elders.  
However,  the  reader  is  unconscious  of  the  fact  that  he  himself  becomes  the  puppet  
of   the   child   narrator,   who   becomes   the   puppeteer   of   his   readership.   If   we   as  
readers  are  reluctant  to  listen  to  the  author’s  message,  let  us  say  in  a  TV  interview,  
then  we  are  the  ones  absorbing  the  child  narrator’s  words  and  contemplating  his  
ideas   during   the   reading   process   and   hence,   we   listen   to   the   author’s   hidden  
criticism.   The   child’s   words   that   the   reader   does   not   take   seriously,   according   to  
Shapiro   Tamara,   are   in   reality   the   words   of   an   adult   and   should   provoke   the  
reader’s   reaction.   Of   course,   there   is   also   the   production   of   a   reaction,   but   the  
reaction   to   a   child   narrator   is   different   than   that   to   an   adult   narrator,   although   the  
word’s  source,  namely  the  author,  is  identical.  
Moreover,  on  the  one  hand,  a  child’s  honesty  and  his  ability  to  criticize  his  
environment  openly  on  the  grounds  of  honest  ignorance  make  the  child  character  
more  vulnerable,  because  inferiority  in  understanding  and  education  make  people  
and   characters   prone   to   criticism   and   deceit.   When   an   author   puts   his   own   child  
character  in  an  inferior  position,  then  he  allows  the  reader  to  ignore  any  criticism  

 70  
 

voiced   by   the   child,   because   the   reader   might   not   take   the   child   seriously   and  
prefer  to  ignore  any  comments  and  to  discount  them  as  childish  and  unworthy  of  
any   adult   attention,   because   the   reader   does   not   want   to   be   confronted   with   an  
uncomfortable  reality.  
Secondly,  another  positive  aspect  of  having  a  child  narrator  is  the  idea  that  
the  author  attributes  a  voice  to  those  people  that  adopt  a  secondary  social  status  
and  often  go  unheard.  Elinor  Ochs  remarks  that  ‘narrative  also  interfaces  self  and  
society,   constituting   a   crucial   resource   for   socializing   emotions,   attitudes,   and  
identities,   developing   interpersonal   relationships,   and   constituting   membership   in  
community’   (EO   19).  This  statement  sounds  stereotyped  and  banal,  because  in  our  
modern   world   media   and   publicity   is   all   about   giving   a   voice   to   the   discarded  
members  of  society.  Yet,  Elinor  Ochs’  statement  is  true,  when  we  look  at  the  idea  
that   each   narrative   draws   people   and   worlds   closer   together.   The   reading  
experience  allows  an  exchange  of  information  and  of  attitudes  and  thus,  the  reader  
is  more  or  less  forced  to  adopt  a  perspective,  and  in  our  case  a  child  perspective,  
contrasting   his   own.   In   the   case   of   a   book   written   from   a   child’s   perspective,   the  
reader   automatically   forms   a   relation   with   the   child   character,   because   reader   and  
narrator   regularly   meet   during   the   reading   process.   Consequently,   there   is   an  
approximation   or   even   convergence   between   two   different   social   and  
psychological  positions  that  take  place.  
On  the  other  hand,  I  have  said  that  the  reader  is  more  or  less  forced  to  deal  
with  a  worldview  different  to  his  own,  when  the  reader  picks  up  a  novel  narrated  
from   a   child’s   perspective.   Of   course   the   reader   has   the   choice   to   discard   the   novel  
that  he  has  chosen  and  decide  on  reading  another  text.  Yet,  the  reader’s  conscious  
decision  against  the  confrontation  with  a  child’s  reality,  or  with  any  other  reality  
that   does   not   correspond   with   his   own   worldview,   leads   to   a   debate   as   well.   When  
a   reader   rejects   a   novel,   he   consciously   or   unconsciously   asks   himself,   why   the  
book   did   not   appeal   to   him   and   by   asking   these   questions,   the   reader   is   also  
discussing   and   analyzing   part   of   his   attitude   and   of   his   self.   Thus,   the   reading  
process   and/   or   the   rejection   of   a   particular   type   of   novel   both   lead   to   a  
confrontation  of  the  author  with  his  own  attitudes,  desires  and  points  of  view.  
Additionally,   if   an   author   intends   to   give   a   voice   to   the   children   in   this  
world,  who  go  without  a  say,  then  the  author  needs  to  make  sure  that  he  endows  

  71  
 

his  child  narrator  with  an  authentic  childlike  voice  that  lacks  grammatical  accuracy  
and  that  includes  the  ticks  of  the  child’s  age  group.  Of  course,  voice  is  more  than  
tone  of  voice.  Voice  also  stands  for  the  words,  expressions  and  moments  in  time  a  
character  uses  in  order  to  narrate  his  story.  The  advantage  of  attributing  an  adult  
voice   to   a   child   character   is   that   mature   comments   are   sweetened,   by   childlike  
expressions.   Children   invent   their   own   language   and   so   it   seems   only   adequate  
that   an   insightful,   wise   comment   should   be   made   in   a   unique   tone   of   voice.  
Matthew   Kneale   uses   a   specific   childlike   writing   style   to   support   the   voice   of   his  
child  narrator  also  visually.  In  his  novel  When  We  Were  Romans,  Matthew  Kneale  
disregards   adult   grammar   rules   and   spelling   for   the   benefit   of   visualizing   the  
child’s  thoughts:  
 
This  was  bad,  mum  was  scratching  her  arm  now,  so  I  thought  “I  must  help  her  or  
she  will  fall  down  into  a  big  hole.”  Suddenly  I  really  hated  that  theif36,  I  wished  we  
hadn’t  sat  in  a  row  because  then  I  would  have  seen  him,  I  would  have  shouted  out  
really   loudly   and   frightened   him   away,   I   would   have   run   after   him   and   got   the  
police  to  put  him  in  jail  forever,  I  would  blow  him  up,  I  would  do  a  Caligulla.  I  said  
“wait   here   mum,   I   will   go   and   ask   Jeener”   so   I   ran   into   the   bar   really   fast,   but   it  
didn’t  do  any  good,  she  didn’t  understand  me  because  she  could  only  speak  Italian,  
she   just   put   up   her   hands   like   she   was   surrendering   and   said   “banyo?”   which  
means  loo.  (MK  77)  
 
On   the   one   hand,   this   paragraph   shows   that   children   can   convey   a   message   just   as  
adequate   and   effectively   to   a   readership,   without   paying   attention   to   the  
correctness   of   names   and   spelling.   Additionally,   the   narrator   invents   the  
expression   ‘to   Caligula   someone,’   and   even   if   a   reader   is   not   informed   about   the  
context,   everyone   understands   by   the   tone   attributed   to   this   expressions   that   it  
alludes  to  a  punishing  action.  
Matthew   Kneale’s   text   also   highlights   that   at   some   point   in   the   reading  
process  it  does  not  matter,  if  a  story  is  told  from  a  child’s  perspective  or  from  an  
adult   perspective,   because   it   is   the   understanding   between   two   people   that  
matters   and   not   their   age.   In   the   story,   the   Italian   waitress   cannot   understand  
Lawrence,   because   she   just   speaks   Italian   and   he   English.   The   waitress   assumes  
that   the   child   needs   to   go   to   the   bathroom.   Consequently,   the   story   highlights  
people’s  expectations  of  each  other.  The  waitress  would  not  spontaneously  assume  

                                                                                                               
36  The  spelling  mistakes  in  the  paragraphs  taken  from  When  We  Were  Romans  are  Matthew  Kneale’s  

choice  and  not  typing  mistakes  (sic).  


 72  
 

that  the  mother’s  handbag  was  robbed  and  that  the  child  is  now  in  charge  of  the  
situation,  because  the  mother  is  too  baffled  and  confused  to  take  any  action.  Thus,  
the   play   with   how   the   text   is   visually   portrayed   underlines   the   discrepancy  
between  the  child’s  age  and  his  mature  way  of  thinking  and  acting.  In  stories  told  
by   child   narrators,   the   child’s   voice   that   takes   over   the   narrative   indicates   that   the  
adults  lack  the  words  or  the  power  to  transmit  their  message  or  any  message  at  all.  
So   it   is   the   child   who   assumes   the   role   of   the   grown   up,   both   through   voice   and  
action:  
 
I  told  her  “give  me  that  piece  (sic)  of  paper  with  their  address,  give  me  the  guide  
book”   and   she   did,   she   just   did   what   I   said,   I   think   it   was   because   she   was   sad.   I  
tried  to  find  their  street  on  the  map  but  it  was  hard,  I  don’t  really  know  maps  and  
the  streets  all  just  went  round  and  round  like  a  big  jumble.  So  I  thought  “uhih  what  
will   I   do?”   then   I   thought   “I   know   I   will   ask   somebody.”   Mum   was   just   standing  
there   not   looking   at   anything,   it   was   like   she   was   asleep   or   something,   so   I   went   in  
a  bar  and  asked  the  man.  (MK  86/  87)  
 
Although   Lawrence   is   trapped   in   an   unfamiliar   situation   with   a   mother   who   is  
acting   really   strangely,   the   child   manages   to   overcome   his   reserve   and   approach  
strangers   for   help,   even   though   he   does   not   speak   their   language.   If   an   author  
chooses   to   put   a   child   at   the   centre   of   his   narrative,   the   writer   needs   to   make   sure  
that   the   child   has   a   specific   voice   of   his   own   and   dares   to   act   independently,   when  
the   adult   world   comes   to   a   stand   still.   Certainly,   unusual   situations   demand  
unusual  behaviour  and  maybe  it  is  people’s  survival  instinct  that  drives  them  on,  
when   there   is   looming   danger.   So,   maybe   it   is   too   exaggerated   to   say   that   the   child  
is   taking   up   the   position   of   the   adult,   because   maybe   the   child   is   just   acting  
naturally  conscientious,  when  the  family  is  confronted  with  a  dangerous  situation.  
Yet,  what  we  can  say  is  that  Matthew  Kneale  manages  to  portray  the  decay  of  the  
adult   world,   without   stifling   the   flow   of   his   narrative.   The   child   character   is  
affected   by   the   events   in   the   story,   but   he   remains   enough   of   an   unaffected  
outsider   to   comment   on   the   situation,   from   a   fresh   perspective   and   to   drive   the  
story   on,   by   acting   independently.   If   a   family   drama   was   told   from   an   adult’s   point  
of   view,   then   that   adult   would   need   to   be   an   omniscient   narrator   that   remains  
outside  the  story,  in  order  for  the  narrative  to  continue  smoothly.  If  the  narrator  
were   a   first   person   narrator   and   involved   in   the   relationship   drama,   then   the  
characters’  speechlessness,  when  confronted  with  their  lives’  disaster,  could  not  be  

  73  
 

conveyed  as  truthfully  as  possible,  since  the  characters  would  need  to  voice  their  
feelings   or   points   of   view.   In   When   We   Were   Romans,   the   mother   going   insane   is  
much   better   portrayed   through   Lawrence’s   eyes,   because   the   child   observes   the  
gradual   decay,   without   fully   being   able   to   grasp   its   extent.   This   situation   or  
observation   allows   the   growth   of   suspense   within   the   story,   because   the   reader  
really   senses   the   mother’s   silence   as   the   expression   of   helplessness   and   confusion,  
which  it  is.  
Moreover,   a   majority   of   the   children   that   remain   unheard   by   society   are  
mostly   those   children   that   grow   up   in   poverty   and   that   cannot   enjoy   a   proper  
education.  Consequently,  if  an  author  wants  to  give  an  authentic  voice  to  socially  
deprived   children,   then   the   author   needs   to   take   into   account   language   ticks   or  
expressions   that   belong   and   identify   lower   social   classes.   The   author’s   dilemma  
highlights   the   child’s   inferiority   even   more.   Yet,   Tanner   Tony   suggests   that   while  
Henry   James   ‘could   not   content   himself   with   the   poverty   and   simplicity   of   a   child’s  
“producible   vocabulary”   […]   Clemens   saw   that   such   unliterary   approximations  
might  be  made  to  yield  a  new  lyrical  intensity,  made  to  hit  a  new  note  of  emotional  
accuracy  and  sincerity’   (TT   209).  Samuel  Clemens,  better  known  as  Mark  Twain,  is  
right  by  pointing  out  the  accurate  observational  dimension  that  a  child’s  linguistic  
lack   can   add   to   the   narrative.   Through   the   narrator’s   language,   the   reader   can  
identify  which  social  class  and  which  age  group  the  narrator  belongs  to.  Language  
identifies   people   and   links   them   to   their   background.   Consequently,   Clemens   is  
right   when   he   says   that   the   accurate   use   of   specific   language   features   yields   an  
emotional   dimension,   because   language   discloses   a   person’s   background   and  
upbringing  and  hence,  exposes  his  emotional  roots.  
Moreover,   everyone   has   already   been   confronted   with   a   situation   that   left  
him   speechless.   Yet,   while   an   adult   struggles   to   find   the   right   words   to   express   his  
distress,   a   child   remains   accurately   and   appropriately   silent,   because   that   is   the  
way   of   expression   he   is   forcibly   used   to,   because   he   lacks   the   accurate   words  
anyway.  Thus,  the  child  arrives  at  accepting  and  mirroring  the  situation,  which  he  
has   to   deal   with,   in   a   more   accurate   way   than   an   adult,   because   of   current  
developmental   shortcomings.   In   that   respect,   the   child’s   linguistic   disadvantage  
turns  into  a  poetical  asset.  
Moreover,  Tony  Tanner  points  out  that  

 74  
 

 
if   we   push   a   little   deeper   for   the   difference   between   James   and   Clemens,   we   can  
see  that  James  disliked  the  vernacular  because  it  was  the  expression  of  an  area  of  
society   fundamentally   uncivilized.   Clemens   knew   this   area   well   and   say   artistic  
needs  and  potentialities  where  James  discerned  only  barbarism.  (TT  209)  
 
Nowadays,   children   are   more   and   more   encouraged   to   make   up   their   own   mind  
and  to  become  autonomous,  in  acting  and  in  thinking,  which  means  that  there  is  no  
real   need   to   create   a   platform,   where   children   defend   their   needs,   because   they  
already  have  a  say  of  their  own  and  parents,  teachers,  politicians  and  psychologists  
hear  the  young  people  anyway.  Yet,  this  positive  social  development  remains  still  a  
phenomenon,  which  is  limited  to  developed  and  educated  societies,  like  in  Henry  
James’   times.   Socially   and   financially   challenged   people   do   not   have   the   time   or  
energy  to  listen  to  and  fulfil  all  of  their  offspring’s  dreams  and  needs.  Thus,  Mark  
Twain  is  right  in  his  observation  that  there  is  potential  talent  slumbering  in  those  
people   that   cannot   afford   to   spend   time   on   the   refinement   of   their   linguistic  
abilities,   whether   they   are   adults   or   children.   In   that   respect,   expressing   the   world  
in   such   a   way   that   it   corresponds   with   one’s   daily   experiences   is   also   an   artistic  
expression,  because  it  preserves  the  social  authenticity  that  so  many  artists  strive  
to   create   or   integrate   in   their   work.   In   this   respect,   it   remains   a   timeliness   to  
address   social   problems   from   a   child’s   perspective,   because   the   child   reflects   his  
reality   the   way   it   is,   by   using   the   linguistic   and   behaviourist   patterns   that   he   is  
confronted   with   on   a   daily   basis.   Topics   like   prostitution,   financial   hardship   and  
violence   are   considered   as   problems   created   by   adults   and   as   being   solved   by  
adults.   Authors   like   Romain   Gary   or   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   though,   illustrate   the  
feelings   or   experience   of   children   living   in   socially   challenging   situations,   by  
discussing,  accessing,  and  deciphering  them  from  a  child’s  vantage  point.  
Drawing   attention   to   the   child’s   minor   status   in   society   helps   to   interest  
people  in  situations  demanding  improvement  and  motivates  the  reader  to  act  in  a  
supportive  way,  given  that  the  novel’s  message  is  poignant,  truthful  and  shocking  
enough  to  call  forth  the  reader’s  compassion  and  make  him  act  upon  his  feelings.  In  
that   case,   children   benefit,   when   a   book   is   written   from   a   child’s   perspective,  
because   readers   could   be   motivated   enough   to   create   foundations,   to   make  
donations   or   to   invest   at   least   more   time   looking   more   closely   at   the   silent  
suffering  of  the  young  people  surrounding  him,  in  order  to  help  children  in  need  
  75  
 

At   the   same   time,   the   author   can   also   benefit   when   he   draws   the   readers’  
attention   to   the   current   deficits   in   childcare,   because   social   engagement   attracts  
social   recognition   and   public   approval.   The   author’s   positive   public   status   has  
repercussions  on  the  number  of  books  he  sells  and  on  how  any  criticism  towards  
him   is   voiced.   In   turn,   the   author’s   high   social   status   helps   him   to   connect   with  
people,   who   are   influential   enough   to   create   foundations   or   to   raise   money,   in  
order   to   help   children   in   need.   Thus,   an   author,   who   focuses   on   children’s   needs  
and  enlightens  his  contemporary  world  about  children’s  social  shortcomings,  lays  
the  foundation  for  personal  and  social  profit  and  success.  
On  the  one  hand,  this  positive  effect  is  beneficial  for  the  growing  appeal  of  
fiction.   On   the   other   hand,   the   author   uses   a   child   narrator   under   the   pretext   of  
attributing   a   voice   to   those   unheard.   In   that   situation,   the   child   turns   yet   again   out  
to   be   abused   by   the   adult,   in   order   for   the   adult   to   reach   his   literary   or   social  
target.   It   is   of   secondary   matter,   if   the   author   was   genuinely   interested   in   drawing  
positive  attention  to  the  child’s  status  in  society  and  to  the  child’s  worldview.  The  
aftertaste   that   remains   is   that   of   a   child   abused   by   an   adult   for   the   transmission   of  
an   adult’s   message   in   the   world   of   the   grown-­‐ups.   If   we   were   pessimistic,   we  
would  say  that  the  child  remains  the  weakest  link  in  society  and  is  prone  to  adult  
abuse,  independently  of  the  adult’s  intention.  
Another   asset,   which   enhances   the   appeal   of   adult   books   featuring   a   child  
narrator,  is  that  every  reader  can  relate  to  a  child’s  feelings,  because  we  were  all  
once  children.  As  Rudyard  Kipling  writes:  
 
there   is   only   one   way   of   understanding   children;   they   cannot   be   understood   by  
imagination,   or   observation,   nor   even   by   love.   They   can   only   be   understood   by  
memory   …   I   was   a   child   once   myself,   and   by   some   fortunate   chance   I   remember  
exactly  how  I  used  to  feel  and  think  about  things.37  
 
Rudyard  Kipling  is  certainly  right  when  he  says  that,  in  general,  all  children  learn  
to   explore   and   understand   the   world   in   a   similar   way.   However,   there   is   the  
difference   in   upbringing   and   in   social   setting   that   create   a   divergence   in   the   way  
children  perceive  and  experience  the  world.  Accordingly,  everyone  can  understand  

                                                                                                               
37  Knoepflmacher,  U.C.  “The  Balancing  of  Child  and  Adult:  An  Approach  to  Victorian  Fantasies  for  

Children.”  Nineteenth-­Century  Fiction  37.4  (Mar.  1983):  497-­‐530,  499  –  Further  references  are  
included  in  the  text  (UCK).  
 76  
 

the  behaviour  and  learning  curve  of  children  that  grow  up  in  more  or  less  similar  
circumstances   as   oneself,   but   to   say   that   every   adult   reader   can   relate   to   every  
child’s  behaviour  and  attitude,  within  each  context,  is  exaggerated.  It  is  the  same  as  
if  we  would  say  that  every  adult  must  understand  all  the  other  adults,  because  we  
are   all   grown-­‐ups.   However,   everybody   knows   from   experience   that   this   general  
mutual  understanding  is  utopian  and  a  far  cry  from  reality.  
Yet,  when  the  reader  is  confronted  with  the  fully  developed  character  of  an  
adult  narrator,  with  all  his  ticks  and  whims,  then  only  a  limited  set  of  readers  can  
identify  with  that  specific  character.  Children’s  characters  on  the  contrary  are  less  
developed,   easier   to   deal   with   and   the   reader   has   a   general   notion   of   the  
inconsistency  and  babbling  that  he  needs  to  expect,  when  confronted  with  a  child.  
Of   course,   this   is   a   generalization,   because   there   are   also   young   people,   who  
display   a   complex   character   and   a   fully   developed   attitude,   in   relation   to   their  
environment.  In  the  case,  where  a  child  narrator  has  a  fully  developed  character,  
because   that’s   the   way   the   author   wants   to   present   his   narrator,   the   author   can  
create  such  a  childhood  setting  for  his  character  that  the  reader  is  coaxed  to  feel  
even  sympathy  for  a  nasty  child  character.  The  reader  criticizes  an  adult  narrator,  
who  behaves  inappropriately,  and  who  has  a  malevolent  character,  because  people  
instinctively  feel  that  everybody  is  responsible  for  their  own  destiny  as  soon  as  we  
are  grown  up,  even  if  we  have  had  a  difficult  childhood.  
Finally,   when   the   novel   is   narrated   from   a   child’s   perspective,   the   two,  
reader  and  writer,  get  the  chance  to  revisit  their  own  childhood.  Even  if  the  reader  
has   a   different   social   background   and   a   different   life   experience   than   the   child  
narrator,   as   discussed   in   the   preceding   paragraph,   reading   about   a   child’s  
experiences  and  history  still  triggers  memories  of  one’s  own  childhood  and  leads  
to  a  settlement  of  past  events.  Retracing  past  events  helps  people  with  coming  to  
terms  with  one’s  own  childhood.    
Additionally,   the   author,   too,   can   have   a   similar   psychologically   cleaning  
experience,   when   he   writes   from   an   adult’s   perspective   about   past   experiences.  
However,   the   advantage   in   employing   a   child   narrator   is   that   writing   about   a   child  
creates   the   necessary   distance   between   past   experience   and   one’s   current   life   as   a  
grown-­‐up.   At   the   time   of   the   writing   process,   the   author   is   an   adult   and   he   feels  
more   at   ease,   because   he   can   put   his   present   persona   in   the   foreground,   if   the  

  77  
 

reader   or   a   critic   attempt   to   compare   him   with   his   characters   and   to   draw   a  
parallel   between   the   author’s   childhood   and   his   fictive   character.   If   the   writer  
creates   adult   characters   then   there   is   a   tendency   that   the   reader   or   a   reviewer  
understands   the   author’s   text   as   a   biographical   processing   of   information,   which  
deflects   the   reader’s   attention   away   from   the   novel’s   actual   message   and   veers   the  
reader’s  awareness  to  the  author’s  private  life.  Elinor  Ochs  comments  that  
 
every   telling   provides   narrators   and   listener/readers   with   an   opportunity   for  
fragmented   self-­‐understanding.   Each   telling   of   a   narrative   situated   in   time   and  
space   engages   only   facets   of   narrator’s   or   listener/   reader’s   selfhood   in   that   it  
evokes   only   certain   memories,   concerns,   and   expectations.   In   that   sense,  
narratives   are   apprehended   by   partial   selves,   and   narratives   so   apprehended  
access  only  fragments  of  experience.  Marcel  Proust  captures  this  insight  in  writing,  
“it  is  only  in  one  small  section  of  the  complete  idea  we  have  of  [a  person]  that  we  
are   capable   of   feeling   emotion;   indeed   it   is   only   in   one   small   section   of   the  
complete   idea   he   has   of   himself   that   he   is   capable   of   feeling   any   emotion   either.”  
(EO  22)  
 
When  reading  a  novel,  it  can  be  one  small  passage  or  one  small  experience  that  the  
narrator  shares,  which  allows  the  reader  to  feel  one  with  the  narrator.  At  the  same  
time,   one   incident   in   the   story   can   grant   the   reader   an   insight   in   the   author’s  
psyche   and   emotional   aura.   In   a   way,   small   fragments   of   language,   like   single  
words  or  short  sentences,  can  suffice  to  bring  two  people,  in  our  case,  reader  and  
narrator   or   reader   and   author   closer   together.   Language   helps   people   to   realize  
that  we  share  a  common  reality  and  that  our  understanding  of  each  other  depends  
on  our  ability  to  accurately  express  what  we  mean.  Consequently,  it  is  only  logical  
to  me  that  writers  have  come  up  with  different  art  forms,  like  poems,  short  stories,  
and   so   on,   and   with   different   versions   of   narrators,   in   order   to   amplify   the  
possibility   of   being   accurately   understood,   by   their   readership.   If   an   author   fails   to  
touch  his  audience  at  heart,  by  writing  from  an  adult  perspective,  he  might  resort  
to   creating   a   child   character   and   if   that   fails   also   an   elderly   narrator,   in   order   to  
speak  to  a  broader  variety  of  readers.  Yet,  an  author  can  also  be  very  talented  and  
manage  to  create  convincing  narrators  from  all  walks  of  life.  Thus,  in  the  end,  the  
child   narrator   is   basically   just   another   form   of   expression   or   a   vehicle,   which  
allows  the  transmission  of  meaning.  In  that  respect,  the  importance  of  the  child  is  
made   redundant,   because   only   the   fact   that   a   message   adopts   a   different   form   is  
relevant  and  not  the  idea,  which  form  exactly  that  is.  

 78  
 

Additionally,  another  practical  aspect  that  comes  to  mind  when  one  thinks  
of  an  advantage  that  a  child  narrator  can  bring  about  is  the  fact  that  the  child  will  
grow  up  one  day.  So,  when  the  author  creates  a  child  character,  he  lays  at  the  same  
time   the   basis   for   the   creation   of   future   novels,   which   focus   on   the   growth   and  
development   of   the   same   character.   If   the   character   is   an   old   man   to   start   off   with,  
then  the  author  can  write  about  his  past  life,  his  experiences  and  later  on,  about  his  
children   or   grandchildren,   but   at   the   expense   of   the   emotional   and   psychological  
growth  of  the  same  character  throughout  a  series  of  books.  When  there  is  a  child  
character  to  start  off  with  though,  the  novel  can  have  a  sequel.  
On  the  other  hand,  the  gradual  development  of  the  main  character  and  his  
coming-­‐off-­‐age   means   loosing   his   childlike   character   that   the   narrator   used   to  
portray   in   the   very   first   novel   and   his   original   voice   that   constituted   the   unique  
appeal  for  the  reader.  Of  course,  those  readers,  who  enjoy  reading  novels  featuring  
child   narrators,   do   not   read   any   sequels,   where   the   child   narrator   is   a   grown-­‐up.  
Yet,  readers  who  are  mainly  attracted  by  the  specific  genre  of  novels  narrated  by  
child   characters,   might   start   to   find   a   liking   in   adult   characters,   when   they   start  
following  their  child  narrator’s  growth  and  coming-­‐off-­‐age.  At  the  same  time,  when  
a  series  of  novels  starts  loosing  its  appeal  to  readers,  who  prefer  child  narrators,  
because  the  child  narrator  has  turned  into  an  adult,  then  the  same  series  attracts  a  
different   readership,   which   enjoys   reading   narratives   by   adults.   In   that   case,   the  
author   keeps   the   same   amount   of   readers,   while   altering   his   target   readership.  
This   change   in   audience   has   a   positive   effect,   if   we   consider   that   the   author’s  
message   reaches   a   broader   variety   of   people   from   different   social   backgrounds  
and  with  different  interests.  
Still,  if  we  assume  that  an  author  creates  a  series  of  books  throughout  which  
the   main   child   character   grows   physically,   emotionally   and   psychologically,   we  
also  need  to  assume  that  the  author  masters  the  ability  to  create  a  convincing  and  
complex  adult  narrator.  An  advantage  for  the  author  in  terms  of  child  narrators  is  
that   child   characters   are   generally   less   complex   and   less   emotionally   and  
psychologically   developed,   than   adult   characters.   Of   course,   this   observation   is   a  
generalization   and   the   complexity   of   a   person   depends   on   his   background,  
upbringing   and   experiences   in   life.   Yet,   the   observation   that   the   character’s  
development  depends  on  his  experiences  in  life,  explains  the  challenge  of  creating  

  79  
 

and  writing  about  adult  characters.  When  an  author  wants  to  create  a  convincing  
adult   character   or   narrator,   the   writer   needs   to   find   explanations   for   the  
character’s   behaviour   by   inventing   and   writing   about   background   situations   and  
past   events   that   have   formed   his   character’s   personality.   A   child   narrator   in  
contrast   is   easier   to   portray,   because   the   reader   assumes   that   the   child   moulds   his  
worldview  according  to  the  way  in  which  the  adults  surrounding  him  influence  his  
thinking.   The   child   character   has   less   life   experience   to   draw   from   and   less  
linguistic   resources,   so   the   child   narrator   repeats   what   he   hears.   The   adult  
narrator  imitates  his  surrounding  too,  but  he  has  more  experience  to  fall  back  onto  
and  to  compare  other  people’s  opinion  and  behaviour  to  his  new  experiences  and  
thus,  can  approach  life  with  the  necessary,  but  more  critical  distance,  than  a  child.  
However,   the   gradual   development   of   a   child   character   into   an   adult  
character,  respecting  the  general  truthful  psychological  development  of  a  person’s  
nature,   according   to   his   circumstances,   is   a   challenge   for   any   author.   Children  
change   rapidly,   so   it   is   easier   to   define   a   child’s   learning   curve,   than   an   adult’s,  
because  adults  are  more  reluctant  to  transform.  Accordingly,  a  child  growing  more  
mature  throughout  a  novel,  or  who  is  acting  on  a  whim,  seems  more  natural,  than  
an   adult   who   suddenly   re-­‐evaluates   his   previous   attitude   and   way   of   thinking.  
Hence,   for   the   author   it   is   an   advantage,   if   he   sticks   with   the   elaboration   of   child  
characters   and   deepens   his   observation   and   portrayal   of   children,   so   that   his  
characters   become   more   lifelike   and   convincing,   from   one   novel   to   the   other,  
because   a   child’s   character   is   formed   by   his   current   circumstances,   whereas   an  
adult’s   nature   is   based   on   his   past,   present,   and   on   the   future   life   he   is   trying   to  
create.  
Yet,   we   need   to   agree   with   U.C.   Knopflmacher   according   to   whom,   ‘torn  
between   the   opposing   demands   of   innocence   and   experience,   the   author   who  
resorts  to  the  wishful  thinking  of  the  child  nonetheless  feels  compelled,  in  varying  
degrees,   to   hold   on   to   the   grown-­‐up’s   circumscribed   notions   about   reality’   (UCK  
499).   The   critic   is   of   course   right   to   point   out   that   an   author   needs   to   reproduce  

adult   reality   to   some   degree   in   his   work,   because   the   author   knows   who   his   target  
audience   is   and   consequently,   the   writer   formulates   his   text   in   such   a   way   that   his  
reader   can   understand   the   novel’s   message.   In   that   respect,   the   content   and   the  
novel’s   core   message   are   more   important   than   the   child’s   authenticity.   However,  

 80  
 

when   we   notice   that   the   author   does   not   strive   to   portray   a   realistic   child  
character,   but   rather   concentrates   on   his   narrative,   we   need   to   wonder   why   the  
author   still   uses   a   child   character,   instead   of   an   adult   narrator.   Of   course,   a  
combination  of  the  child’s  appeal,  like  his  innocence,  his  ability  to  question  events  
and   many   more   positive   aspects   like   mentioned   before,   make   the   author’s   text  
attractive   in   addition   to   the   novel’s   message.   Additionally,   it   is   hard   to   define   an  
authentic   child’s   character,   because   children’s   psychological   and   emotional  
development  depends  on  the  outer  circumstances  and  on  individual  character.  So,  
it   is   also   hard   to   locate   and   criticize   if   an   author   has   managed   to   portray   a   realistic  
child  or  not.    
In  a  coming-­‐off-­‐age  novel,  a  transformation  is  happening.  The  child  narrator  
is   growing   older   and   developing   emotionally,   socially,   psychologically   and  
physically.   Yet,   at   the   same   time   the   reader   and   author   are   also   evolving.  
Consequently,   at   the   end   of   the   story,   the   narrator,   the   reader   and   the   author   have  
discovered  and  developed  the  novel  and  their  own  life  story  simultaneously.  The  
evolutionary   effect   of   the   story   would   be   preserved,   if   an   adult   narrator   told   the  
story.  The  difference  between  an  adult  narrator  and  a  child  narrator  is  though  that  
the   development   of   a   child   narrator   is   more   obvious,   because   a   child’s   learning  
curve   is   steeper,   as   highlighted   earlier   on.   Consequently,   the   child’s   obvious  
development   helps   the   reader   to   note,   appreciate   and   understand   his   own  
personal   growth,   because   the   sensation   of   evolution   and   progress   is   more  
apparent  or  nearly  palpable  in  the  child  narrator.  
Furthermore,   a   child’s   narrative   includes   the   positive   aspect   of   natural  
truthfulness,  because  children  are  generally  not  calculating.  Whatever  a  child  says  
is  commonly  blurted  out,  without  any  second  thought  or  hidden  agenda.  Of  course,  
this   observation   is   an   oversimplification,   because   there   are   children,   who   are  
already   manipulative   and   calculating,   at   a   very   young   age.   Usually   though,   young  
people   are   straightforward,   say   what   is   on   their   mind   and   answer   questions  
honestly.   In   fact,   research   has   shown   that   children   find   it   challenging   to   control  
their   body   language,   whenever   they   are   lying.   So,   when   a   child   is   untruthful,   he  
quickly  puts  his  hands  in  front  of  his  mouth  or  hides  them  behind  his  back.  These  
indications  help  the  adult  and  reader  to  identify,  when  a  child  is  lying.  Of  course,  
this  method  only  works  when  the  text  reveals  the  child’s  body  language  or  when  

  81  
 

there  are  other  clues  in  the  text  that  identify  the  child  narrator’s  reality  as  different  
from  other  characters’  reality.  
Still,   children’s   truthfulness   is   advantageous   for   the   author,   because   the  
author   can   be   more   lenient   in   the   creation   of   his   characters,   because   when   his  
child  narrator  says  or  does  something  that  does  not  fit  into  the  linear  development  
of   the   novel   or   that   is   irrelevant   to   the   story,   then   the   reader   will   not   doubt   the  
author’s   talent   in   creating   a   deliberate   story   and   plot.   The   reader   assumes   that   the  
author  intends  the  child  character  to  act  according  to  his  whims  and  to  comment  
on  any  observation,  whether  it  is  relevant  in  relation  to  the  story  or  not.  In  When  
We   Were   Romans,   the   child   narrator,   for   example,   comments   on   his   environment  
and  describes  the  people  he  meets  in  detail,  while  the  focus  of  the  story  is  on  the  
mother’s  mental  derangement.  An  adult  character  would  have  focused  more  on  the  
woman’s  behaviour,  than  on  external  events.  For  the  young  boy  though,  their  trip  
to   Rome   is   more   captivating,   than   the   mother,   whose   behaviour   he   is   unable   to  
interpret.   In   Matthew   Kneale’s   story,   the   reader   notices   that   children   focus   on  
those   things   in   their   surroundings   that   they   manage   to   understand   and   to  
comprehend.   Accordingly,   when   an   author   uses   a   child   narrator   to   comment   on  
shortcomings,   this   procedure   is   more   subtle   than   pointing   out   characters’  
deficiencies   right   away.   Child   characters   omit   mentioning   those   things   that   they  
cannot   digest   or   they   marginally   comment   on   them.   This   behaviour   points   out  
other  characters’  shortcomings  without  addressing  them  directly.  
Of   course,   an   adult   narrator   could   also   ignore   the   mother’s   mental  
instability  and  focus  on  the  Italian  scenery.  However,  in  that  case,  the  reader  would  
wonder   which   kind   of   psychological   development   the   adult   narrator   has   that  
prevents  him  from  noticing  the  mother’s  mental  decline.  Thus,  in  that  situation,  the  
narrator  would  attract  the  reader’s  attention,  while  the  story’s  message  would  be  
circumcised.  
Additionally,  the  text’s  message  would  alter  altogether,  if  an  adult  narrator  
told  the  story,  because  discussing  an  adult  relationship  is  different  from  portraying  
and  analyzing  child-­‐parent  interaction.  
If   we   assume   that   the   child   narrator   is   mostly   truthful   and   relates   his  
environment  in  the  way  he  observes  the  people  and  events  surrounding  him,  then  
the   narrative   turns   more   into   an   observation   report   or   a   documentary,   than   into   a  

 82  
 

fictive   story.   The   child   narrator   is   an   eyewitness,   who   is   not   involved   in   the  
discussion   and   he   does   not   have   to   take   any   decisions.   The   reader   sees   what   the  
narrator   is   seeing,   but   the   reader   adopts   a   superior   position,   because   the   reader   is  
left   to   judge   and   to   develop   his   own   opinion.   The   child   observer   and   narrator   only  
proposes   the   facts   and   the   outside   world   as   he   sees   them.   Tanner   Tony   explains  
that   ‘the   “small   expanding   consciousness”   is   more   importantly   present   as   a  
“register  of  impressions,”  but  it  is  only  one  of  many  such  registers,  more  pathetic,  
more  idealistic  than  the  others  perhaps,  but  in  the  long  run  not  necessarily  more  
reliable’   (TT   207).   The   adult   reader   is   free   to   construct   and   interpret   the   child’s  
words,  according  to  his  own  understanding  and  worldview.  The  reader  can  project  
his  personal  reality  into  the  novel.  
On   the   other   hand,   the   reading   experience   becomes   more   challenging,  
because  attributing  more  depth  to  a  novel,  by  interpreting  the  text  on  a  personal  
basis  also  depends  on  the  reader’s  ability  to  fall  back  onto  personal  experience  and  
to   have   the   ability   to   question   descriptions   and   portrayal   of   events.   If   the   text  
remains  without  the  reader’s  ability  for  interpretation,  then  the  novel  remains  on  a  
basic  level,  because  the  child’s  logic  is  less  complex  and  varies  from  adult  logic.    
Moreover,   the   fact   that   children   have  less   responsibility   for   themselves   and  
for   other   people,   frees   them   more   time   to   observe   their   surroundings   and   to   point  
out  social  shortcomings.  In  When  We  Were  Romans,  Lawrence  observes  
 
Then   Franseen   started   asking   mum   all   about   dad,   so   I   thought   “uhoh,   be   carefull  
(sic),   don’t   forget   Jemima.”   She   wasn’t   doing   the   pots   this   time,   that   was   lucky,   she  
was   watching   telly   in   Italian   instead,   there   was   a   man   with   a   tiny   beard   asking  
questions  and  some  ladies  standing  in  a  line  just  wearing  their  underpants,  but  she  
was  listening  to  us,  I  could  tell,  her  eyes  looked  round  at  us  sometimes,  so  I  thought  
“don’t  make  her  go  off  like  an  airaid  siren  again.”  (MK  62)  
 
Adults   ignore   or   overlook   detail,   whereas   children   have   the   time   to   really   ‘see.’   On  
the   one   hand,   Lawrence   is   ‘free’   to   observe   his   sister’s   behaviour,   because   he  
remains  an  outsider  to  the  adult  discussion.  Additionally,  Lawrence  is  closer  in  age  
to   Jemima,   than   any   of   the   other   adults,   so   the   boy   still   remembers   how   he   used   to  
act  around  adults  and  how  he  used  to  listen  in  on  their  conversations.  
Children   are   also   less   used   to   theatrics   than   adults   and   children   are   more  
powerless  to  stop  other  people  from  behaving  in  a  disturbing  way.  So,  Lawrence  is  
more   sensitive   to   a   potential   tantrum   of   his   sister’s.   Yet,   whatever   circumstance  
  83  
 

allows  Lawrence  to  observe,  what  the  adults  in  this  scene  fail  to  detect,  Lawrence’s  
comment   still   highlights   that   children   as   young   as   they   might   be   are   able   to  
observe   and   assimilate   adult   behaviour.   Children   might   lack   the   necessary  
experience  to  process  what  the  words  or  behaviour  that  they  are  witnessing  mean,  
but   children   assimilate   their   environment   according   to   their   worldview.   Larry  
Wolff  quotes  Rousseau  in  his  research.  He  says  that  Jean-­‐Jacques  ‘Rousseau  urged  
the   reader   to   select   with   care   the   objects   surrounding   a   child,   since   “everything  
that   surrounds   him   is   the   book   in   which,   unconsciously   (…),   he   continually  
enriches  his  memory  while  waiting  for  his  judgment  to  be  able  to  profit  from  it.’38  
Rousseau  argues  that  a  child  is  unable  to  make  sense  of  the  world  surrounding  him  
straight  away.  In  that  situation,  the  reader  is  challenged  to  make  sense  of  the  world  
instead   of   the   child.   The   child   narrator   creates   the   necessary   affective   situation,   by  
appealing  to  the  reader’s  sympathy  and  the  effect  is  that  the  reader  constructs  his  
own  understanding  of  the  novel  and  completes  the  child’s  narrative  with  his  own  
adult  imagination  and  background  knowledge.    
Consequently,   there   is   simultaneous   creation   of   distance   and   proximity  
between  the  reader  and  the  child  narrator.  The  reader  feels  superior  to  the  child  
narrator,   because   he   can   interpret   the   facts   that   the   child   presents   and   is   in   a  
better   position   to   ponder   the   narrator’s   words   and   to   take   them   at   face   value   or   to  
alter  them,  in  order  to  create  valid  explanations  for  the  other  characters’  behaviour  
and  attitude.  On  the  other  hand,  the  reader  and  child  narrator  approach  each  other,  
because   the   reader   feels   responsible   for   the   child   character   and   they   both   share   in  
the  secret  of  observing  other  people.  The  reader  sees  behind  the  scenes,  because  
he  can  read  between  the  lines  and  interpret  the  child’s  global  situation.  The  appeal  
to  the  reader’s  responsibility  is  only  generated  when  there  is  a  child  narrator  at  the  
centre   of   the   novel.   If   the   main   character   were   an   adult,   then   the   adult   reader  
would   still   form   a   relationship   with   the   narrator,   but   a   less   intimate   one.   The  
reader   could   understand   the   adult   character   better,   even   not   necessarily,   but   the  
reader   would   not   feel   superior   anymore,   because   the   adult   character   can   make  
sense   of   his   own   surroundings   and   the   reader   feels   no   need   to   protect   his  
character  from  any  harm  that  he  is  not  aware  of.  Blodgett  Harriet  comments  that  

                                                                                                               
38  Wolff,  Larry.  “When  I  Imagine  a  Child:  The  Idea  of  Childhood  and  the  Philosophy  of  Memory  in  

the  Enlightenment.”  Eighteenth-­Century  Studies  31.4  (Summer  1998):  377-­‐401,  378.  


 84  
 

‘the  narrator  addresses  all  manner  of  readers  in  turn,  keeping  them  involved  with  
the  theme.  Although  the  characters  are  undeniably  responsible  for  their  personal  
misdeeds,   society   supplied   the   corrupting   worldly   atmosphere.   Perpetually,   the  
narrator   prods   the   public   conscience’  (GR   35).   When   a   child   is   accepted   as   he   is   and  
not  criticized  for  acting  aggressively  or  evil,  then  the  responsibility  is  taken  away  
from  the  child.  Yet,  somebody  must  be  responsible  for  the  child’s  foul  mood  and  so  
society   is   encouraged   to   question   their   attitude,   behaviour,   and   education   of  
children.  
In  The  Life  Before  Us,  Momo  describes  what  life  is  like  in  Parisian  boarding  
houses   for   orphans   or   children   of   prostitutes.   Those   houses   are   also   run   by  
prostitutes,  while  their  colleagues  are  at  work:  ‘Take  Madame  Sophie,  who  keeps  
another   illegal   nursery   on   the   rue   Surcouf,   or   the   one   they   call   the   Comtesse  
because  her  name  is  the  widow  Comte.  Well,  sometimes  they’ve  got  as  many  as  ten  
day  boarders,  and  the  first  thing  they  do  is  stuff  them  full  of  tranquilizers’   (GR  35).  
In   this   case,   Momo   can   observe   what   is   going   on   in   his   surroundings,   without  
having   any   responsibility   to   take   appropriate   action   in   altering   the   children’s  
situation.   Momo   is   too   young   to   interfere   and   to   help   those   children   who   are  
drugged,   in   order   to   keep   them   still.   If   there   were   an   adult   narrator,   then   the   adult  
character   would   need   to   take   action   and   to   try   and   change   the   course   of   events.   In  
that   case,   the   whole   plot   would   change   and   the   purpose   of   the   novel   would   be   lost  
or  at  least  be  altered  and  turn  into  a  different  story.  In  Momo’s  case,  the  narrator  
presents  the  facts  to  the  reader  and  the  reader  has  to  decide  for  himself,  how  he  
would   react   if   he   were   confronted   with   a   situation   like   Momo’s.   In   Momo’s   case,  
the   reader   is   challenged   to   make   up   his   own   mind,   to   think   about   social   issues   and  
to   come   up   with   a   solution,   because   Momo   is   too   young   to   think   of   a   solution  
himself.  Blodgett  Harriet  notes  that  the  child  narrator  is  meant  to  ‘make  mankind  
smile   wryly   even   while   shifting   about   uncomfortably”   (HB   214).   Momo   does   come  
up  with  his  own  solutions  to  his  own  personal  problems.  Yet,  those  resolutions  are  
short-­‐term  remedies  that  guarantee  Momo  survival,  but  which  lack  the  long  term  
view  that  adults  possess  and  which  would  help  him  to  settle  his  situation  in  a  more  
comforting  way,  for  a  longer  period  of  time.  If  the  main  character  was  a  grown  up  
and   if   that   person   would   take   no   action,   then   the   reader   would   accept   the  
character’s  decision  or  reject  it,  but  his  mind  would  not  be  challenged  as  much  to  

  85  
 

rummage  for  a  solution,  because  the  adult  character  proposes  a  potential  solution  
or  attitude,  in  times  of  hardship.  
Yet,  the  idea  that  the  reader  is  challenged  into  taking  action  or  into  getting  
involved,   at   least   emotionally   and   intellectually   with   the   situation   that   he   is  
witnessing,  only  works  if  the  reader  readily  accepts  Momo’s  description  of  his  life  
as   a   truthful   and   factual   account.   As   soon   as   the   reader   starts   to   question   the  
character’s  authenticity  and  reliability,  then  the  novel  loses  its  central  message  and  
appeal.  Still,  I  would  say  that  the  reader’s  acceptance  of  the  novel’s  setting  does  not  
depend   on   the   child   narrator’s   truthfulness   or   on   his   accurate   childlike   nature,   but  
rather   on   the   individual’s   approach   to   reading.   When   a   reader   manages   to   fully  
immerse  in  a  novel’s  setting  and  to  put  himself  in  the  characters’  shoes,  then  the  
reader   will   be   able   to   get   emotionally   and   intellectually   involved,   even   if   plot,  
characters,  and  setting  display  a  number  of  logistic  or  stylistic  shortcomings.  
Additionally,   the   author   puts   his   child   character   in   an   inferior   position   in  
relation  to  the  other  characters  in  the  novel,  because  the  child  does  not  understand  
the   world   of   the   grown-­‐ups   and   always   lags   behind   in   understanding   the  
development  of  the  story’s  events.  In  When  We  Were  Romans,  Lawrence  trusts  his  
mother   unconditionally,   although   the   reader   is   aware   of   the   mother’s   growing  
madness  and  loss  of  reality  that  develops  throughout  the  novel.  The  mother  says:  
 
”I’m   sure   they   won’t   mind   if   you   take   a   bit   of   time   off,   after   all   you’ll   be   learning  
about   Rome.   For   that   matter   you   could   even   go   to   school   here.”   That   made   me  
laugh,  I  said  “but  how  can  I  mum,  don’t  be  silly,  I  don’t  speak  italian  (sic)”  but  mum  
said  “you  can  learn  some,  I  can  teach  you.”  I  wasn’t  sure,  I  thought  “I  bet  it  will  be  
hard,  it  will  take  ages”  but  then  I  thought  “if  mum  says  they  won’t  mind  about  the  
tests  she  must  know.”  (MK  61)  
 
On  the  one  hand,  the  mother  is  right  when  she  says  that  finding  a  new  school  is  a  
simple   affair.   Yet,   this   discussion   between   the   two   characters   highlights   the   child’s  
dependence   on   his   mother.   Throughout   the   novel,   there   are   a   multitude   of  
situations   when   Lawrence   has   to   take   adult   control,   because   the   mother   is   too  
depressed   to   think   or   act   reasonably.   Yet,   the   child   craves   the   mother’s   support,  
approval  and  reassurance  in  everyday  situations.  The  child’s  potential  to  function  
like  an  adult  in  precarious  situations  and  to  act  like  a  common  child  at  other  times,  
highlights   the   idea   that   adult   and   childlike   behaviour   develop   according   to  

 86  
 

circumstances   and   that   a   child   narrator   cannot   really   be   labelled   unrealistic,  


because  his  features  resemble  that  of  an  adult  too  closely.  
The   child   narrator   functions   as   a   tool   that   illustrates   the   relationship  
between  adults  and  children,  reflecting  the  social  attitudes  towards  children  at  the  
time   when   the   novel   was   written   or   when   the   child   narrator   was   invented   by   its  
author.  Tamar  Schapiro  asks  the  question:  ‘when  is  a  parent  justified  in  preventing  
a  child  from  acting  according  to  her  will?  When  is  a  child  entitled  to  make  her  own  
choices  and  face  consequences?”   (TS  715).  In  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  the  
child  narrator,  Oskar,  takes  his  own  decisions.  He  freely  roams  New  York.  That  is  
what  it  seems  to  the  reader  because  the  reader,  like  Oskar,  is  unaware  that  Oskar’s  
mother   keeps   track   of   the   child’s   whereabouts   without   his   awareness.   To   the  
reader  it  seems  implausible  that  a  child  Oskar’s  age  is  left  to  decide  what  to  do  with  
his   time   and   where   to   go.   It   is   only   later   in   the   book,   that   this   fact   is   put   into  
perspective   and   the   reader   understands   that   what   we   as   readers   think   and   believe  
is   what   Oskar   believes   and   narrates.   There   are   two   reasons,   why   we   accept   the  
child’s   narrative   at   face   value:   for   one,   the   reader   is   immersed   in   the   story   and  
secondly,   we   are   aware   that   Oskar’s   account   is   fictive.   The   story’s   setting,   which   is  
different  to  our  real  life  setting,  allows  a  realism  different  to  ours,  which  remains  
little   questioned   to   a   certain   extent,   as   long   as   the   rest   of   the   story   forms   a  
coherent  whole  and  as  long  as  the  suspense  in  the  story  is  maintained.  If  the  reader  
starts  to  question  every  aspect  of  a  story,  then  the  entire  reading  process  starts  to  
lose  its  appeal.  
Secondly,   the   reader   also   accepts   alleged   unrealistic   situations,   like   a   ten-­‐
year-­‐old  roaming  the  city  of  New  York  without  any  adult  observation,  because  the  
story   is   told   from   a   child’s   perspective.   The   reader   consciously   or   unconsciously  
assumes  that  in  the  end,  there  will  be  a  reason  for  or  a  clarification  of  the  child’s  
situation,  which  is  the  case  in  Oskar’s  story.  Additionally,  the  reader  also  assumes  
that   the   child’s   perspective   does   not   manage   to   embrace   the   full   scope   of   his  
surroundings  and  that  the  child  is  more  focused  on  his  own  worldview  than  on  the  
adults’   responsibility   for   and   care   of   him.   Anew,   the   reader   and   the   author   adopt   a  
superior  position  in  relation  to  the  child.  
Schapiro  Tamar  points  out  that  ‘the  general  welfare  (of  our  society)  is  best  
promoted   if   older   people   take   control   of   the   lives   of   younger   people.   Being   more  

  87  
 

experienced,  they  are  likely  to  make  beneficial  choices,  whereas  young  people  are  
likely  to  make  costly  ones’   (TS   718).  On  the  one  hand,  Schapiro  Tamar  is  of  course  
right,   because   the   distinct   role   allocation,   distinguishing   between   provider   and  
receiver,   the   cared   for   and   the   caretaker,   allows   society   to   function   smoothly.  
People’s  roles  are  organized  according  to  their  general  physical,  mental  and  social  
capacities.   Adults   have   more   life   experience   that   allows   them   to   take   informed  
decisions   and   to   make   the   right   choices.   However,   what   do   we   as   adults   label   as  
‘informed’  or  ‘right  choices’?  In  Matthew  Kneale’s  novel,  Lawrence  observes:  
 
I  thought  “I  bet  she’s  going  to  say  something  serious”  and  I  was  right,  she  said  “what  would  
you   say,   lesonfon   (sic),   if   we   stay   on   for   a   bit   here?   Perhaps   until   the   summer?”   Jemima  
laughed,   she   said   “yes   yes,   lets   stay”   but   I   don’t   think   she   understood   really,   she   just  
thought  “if  we  stay  then  I  can  have  more  ice  cream.”  (MK  60)  
 
Of   course,   Lawrence   is   right   when   he   observes   that   the   mother   tries   to   trick   the  
children   into   complying   with   her   plan   of   staying   in   Italy   for   a   longer   period.  
Lawrence  is  the  link  between  the  adult  world  and  the  little  sister’s  point  of  view,  
who   manages   to   remain   childlike,   while   at   the   same   time   beginning   to   read  
between   the   lines.   Lawrence   starts   to   consciously   understand   that   adults   use  
deliberate  language,  both  verbal  and  physical,  in  order  to  manipulate  other  people.  
Of   course,   one   could   argue   that   the   mother   manipulates   her   children,   by   coaxing  
them  in  a  friendly  way  and  that  the  children  are  thus,  put  into  an  inferior  situation.  
On  the  other  hand,  Jemima  is  content  with  the  situation,  because  she  can  sense  her  
own  benefit  in  the  events  that  are  going  to  take  place.  So  in  a  way,  adults  are  made  
to   believe   that   they   pull   the   strings   and   that   they   manage   to   coax   their   children  
into   compliance.   Yet,   seen   from   another   perspective,   children   are   more   creative  
than   adults,   because   they   manage   to   extract   the   best   or   most   beneficial   for   their  
own  wellbeing.  A  child  narrator  manages  to  convey  this  duality  in  understanding  
and  in  looking  at  one  and  the  same  idea  from  different  perspectives,  because  the  
child  narrator  is  directly  speaking  from  his  frame  of  mind  and  reveals  an  attitude  
that   remains   undisclosed   to   the   adults   in   the   novel.   Consequently,   the   child  
narrator   makes   the   adult   reader   the   accomplice   of   his   world   and   explains   to   the  
adult  reader  how  much  understanding  a  child  has  of  the  adult  point  of  view.  Thus,  
reader   and   child   narrator   form   an   informed   entity   that   stands   in   contrast   to   the  

 88  
 

other   characters   in   the   novel,   who   do   not   know   what   the   narrator   is   thinking   or  
saying  about  them  or  about  himself.  
Furthermore,   as   already   mentioned   several   times   before,   I   am   convinced  
that   children   are   often   intuitively   right.   Adults   have   more   experience,   which   can  
help   them   to   make   the   right   choices,   but   adults   also   carry   a   bag   of   negative  
experiences  that  push  them  to  avoid  taking  certain  risks  that  could  allow  them  to  
expand  and  to  multiply  their  benefit.  Children  have  fewer  experiences  to  compare  
to   and   to   shy   away   from.   So   as   a   consequence,   a   lot   of   experiences   can   make   a  
person   wiser,   but   also   more   prudent,   in   either   a   protective   or   a   stifling   way.   In  
When  We  Were  Romans,  the  mother  takes  all  the  major  decisions,  like  leaving  the  
father  and  fleeing  to  Rome.  Yet,  when  the  family  arrives  in  Italy,  Lawrence  has  to  
hold  it  together,  because  the  mother  suffers  from  paranoia  and  depression.  
In   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close,   Oskar   says:   ‘She   was   obviously   mad   at  
me,   but   I   didn’t   know   why.   I   hadn’t   done   anything   wrong.   Or   if   I   had,   I   didn’t   know  
what   it   was.   And   I   definitely   didn’t   mean   to   do   it.’39   On   the   one   hand,   we   have  
argued   that   children   adopt   an   inferior   position   to   adults,   because   they   lack   the  
right  level  of  understanding,  in  order  to  debunk  ambidextrous  behaviour.  Yet,  this  
paragraph   illustrates   that   the   child   character   has   the   advantage   that   he   ignores  
adult   dismissal.   Children   are   very   adamant   and   insistent,   when   they   want   to   know  
or  understand  something.  Of  course,  this  statement  is  a  generalization  and  the  way  
an  adult  behaves  depends  on  his  cultural  background  and  education,  but  generally,  
an   adult   who   is   rejected   by   another   adult,   usually   renounces   on   asking   further  
questions   and   accepts   the   answer   that   he   has   been   given.   Children   though   keep  
asking,  until  they  get  the  answers  they  were  looking  for,  or  until  they  get  at  least  an  
answer   at   all.   In   that   respect,   it   is   advantageous   for   an   author   to   have   a   child  
narrator,   if   he   wants   to   introduce   a   gradual   amount   of   suspense   to   his   novel,  
because  at  first,  the  child’s  attempts  to  voice  any  criticism  and  to  change  the  events  
of   the   story   might   go   unheard,   but   later   on,   as   the   novel   develops,   the   child’s   voice  
becomes   more   poignant,   until   the   child   or   narrator   reaches   his   goal.   Whether  
getting   an   answer   at   any   cost   is   always   desirable   is   debatable,   but   at   least   the  

                                                                                                               
39  Safran  Foer,  Jonathan.  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close.  London:  Penguin  Books.  2006,  6  –  

Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (JSF).  


  89  
 

probing   process   creates   a   degree   of   suspense,   which   is   furthering   for   a   story’s  


appeal.  
Moreover,   the   child   character   is   more   vulnerable   to   deceit   and   dismissal,  
when   he   has   to   confront   the   reader   and   the   other   character   with   a   limited   amount  
of  background  knowledge  and  experience.  However,  the  reader  becomes  also  more  
vulnerable,   when   faced   with   a   child,   because   the   reader   starts   to   think   about   the  
issues  the  child  starts  to  question.  An  adult  who  challenges  problems  and  people  
that   the   adult   reader   or   the   other   characters   would   block   out   is   perceived   as  
smart-­‐alec.   A   child   though   appeals   to   an   adult’s   natural   desire   to   help   and   to  
nurture  the  child’s  development  and  intellectual  growth,  in  addition  to  preventing  
the  child  from  abuse  by  other  people,  who  are  cleverer.  Consequently,  the  reader  
starts   to   think   about   the   questions   the   child   narrator   asks   himself   or   the   other  
characters  in  the  novel  and  the  reader  is  challenged  to  make  up  his  own  mind  in  
relation  to  the  (social)  issue  in  question.  
Moreover,  the  reader’s  thinking  process  allows  his  intellectual  growth.  The  
reader   experiences   this   intellectual,   psychological   and   emotional   growth  
simultaneously   with   the   child   narrator.   The   child’s   way   of   thinking   is   of   course   a  
different  one,  when  the  author  has  created  a  generally  realistic  child.  However,  the  
narrator’s  way  of  thinking  can  be  along  the  same  lines  as  the  reader’s,  if  the  reader  
tries  to  retrace  the  child’s  way  of  thinking.  If  the  writer  has  managed  to  create  an  
authentic   child   narrator,   then   there   is   an   additional   dimension   of   thought-­‐
provoking   input   that   the   reader   can   draw   from,   because   he   has   to   look   into   a  
subject   from   a   perspective   different   to   his   own.   If   the   narrator’s   way   of   thinking   is  
very  similar  to  that  of  an  average  adult,  then  the  reading  process  is  less  challenging  
or   surprising,   but   in   that   case,   the   reading   process   backs   up   the   reader’s   world  
view   and   way   of   thinking,   which   gives   the   reader   self   confidence,   because   the  
reader  feels  that  he  is  understood  by  people,  who  act  and  think  in  the  same  way  as  
him.   Those   people   acting   like   the   reader   are   of   course   just   characters,   but   they  
have  been  created  by  the  author  and  embody  the  author’s  thoughts.  
Furthermore,  in  terms  of  advantages  that  a  child  narrator  adds  to  a  novel,  
we  have  mentioned  that  child  narrators  add  a  fun  dimension  to  any  novel,  because  
their  tone  of  voice  is  naturally  light-­‐hearted  and  the  children’s  presence  allows  the  
author   to   introduce   visual   material   that   portrays   or   reflects   the   child’s   varied  

 90  
 

world  view  and  way  of  thinking.  However,  in  terms  of  disadvantages,  we  need  to  
wonder,   on   the   other   hand,   to   what   extent   it   is   appropriate   to   treat   any   topic   from  
a   childlike   and   fun   perspective?   At   the   centre   of   Jonathan   Safran   Foer’s   novel  
Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close,   there   is   Oskar   a   ten-­‐year-­‐old   child   narrator.  
During  the  story,  Oskar  unravels  his  family’s  history.  The  narrator’s  father  died  in  
9/11  and  Oskar  goes  on  a  quest  to  find  the  lock  that  fits  a  key  that  his  father  had  
hidden   at   home   in   a   vase.   Death   and   terrorism   are   two   topics   that   people   find   it  
generally   hard   to   deal   with.   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   approaches   stupefying   topics  
from   a   child’s   perspective   and   throughout   the   reading   process   it   becomes   clear  
that  on  the  one  hand,  the  child  manages  to  lighten  the  novel’s  tone  and  to  make  the  
reader   smile,   despite   reading   about   a   desolate   topic,   because   his   ideas   are  
innovative  and  his  outlook  on  the  world  is  positive.  
On   the   other   hand,   the   reader   cannot   fully   enjoy   the   positive   atmosphere  
and   the   suspension   created   by   the   narrator’s   light-­‐hearted   quest   for   the   lock,  
because   the   reader   is   aware   of   the   child’s   distressing   familial   situation.   The   reader  
should  share  in  the  child’s  adventurous  quest,  but  we  as  grown-­‐ups  know  that  the  
child  narrator  goes  on  a  quest  to  forget  about  his  father’s  death  instead  of  dealing  
with  the  sad  situation  at  hand.  Laura  Miller  argues  that  
 
choosing   a   child   narrator   gives   Foer   access   to   extravagant   emotions   and   quirky  
imaginings  that  would  seem  cloying  or  self-­‐indulgent  in  a  grown-­‐up,  but  at  the  cost  
of  allowing  the  central  trauma  its  due.  September  11  was  a  surreal  intrusion  of  the  
spectacular   and   malevolent   into   the   banal   and   safe.   But   for   a   kid   like   Oskar,   reality  
has  yet  to  be  fully  established,  so  surreality  is  impossible.  How  and  why  his  father  
was  lost  matters  little  next  to  the  raw  fact  of  his  disappearance.40  
 
Laura   Miller   is   of   course   right,   when   she   points   out   that   Oscar’s   search   does   not  
discuss   the   profound   political   situation   that   has   led   to   his   father’s   death.   Yet,   we  
need   to   question   to   what   extent   the   political   destiny   is   relevant   for   the   story’s  
message.  By  discussing  Oskar’s  reality  and  by  depicting  his  way  of  dealing  with  his  
father’s  death  and  his  denial  of  his  reality,  the  narrative  also  highlights  the  broader  
political   and   social   picture   for   the   reader.   The   adult   reader   is   aware   of   the  
background   story   and   can   make   sense   of   the   fact   that   the   author   hints   at   the   effect  

                                                                                                               
40  Miller,  Laura.  “Terror  Comes  to  Tiny  Town.”  Nymag.com:  

http://nymag.com/print/?/nymetro/arts/books/reviews/11574  -­‐  Further  references  are  included  


in  the  text  (LM).  
  91  
 

of  political  decisions  in  general.  The  text  becomes  a  subtle  tool  to  highlight  social  
and  political  shortcomings.  The  story’s  content  and  the  parts  that  the  author  does  
not  explicitly  mention  underline  reality  even  more.  
Of   course,   the   reader’s   reaction   to   the   comic   aspects   of   the   novel   depends  
on   the   reader’s   individual   character   and   on   his   personal   attitude   towards   topics  
like   death   or   terrorism.   If   the   reader’s   way   of   coming   to   terms   with   those  
situations   in   life   is   also   by   resorting   to   humour   and   by   concentrating   on   the   fun  
aspect  of  life,  then  the  reader  will  be  able  to  benefit  from  the  funny  side  that  the  
child  narrator  creates.  
Yet,   even   if   the   reader   manages   to   enjoy   the   child   character’s   positive  
attitude   towards   life,   he   still   remains   aware   of   the   child’s   precarious   situation,  
which   leads   to   a   negative   connotation   that   pervades   the   whole   story.   If   the  
narrator  were  an  adult,  then  the  fun  aspect  would  sound  more  mature,  because  it  
would  show  through  sarcasm  or  irony  and  the  reader  would  be  more  confident  to  
believe  that  the  narrator’s  comic  way  of  dealing  with  the  situation  is  his  nature  and  
that   it   is   more   a   coming   to   terms   with   the   terrible   situation,   than   an   attempt   to  
block   out   reality.   In   The   Life   Before   Us,   Momo   says   that   ‘it’s   always   in   the   eyes   that  
people   are   the   saddest’   (RG   24).   If   the   author   uses   child   narrators   there   is   the  
problem   that   the   novel   is   perceived   as   playing   with   the   heart’s   strings.   There   is  
always  the  danger  that  a  serious  novel  becomes  a  tearjerker,  without  it  intending  
to   be   one,   because   the   child’s   voice   renders   the   text   melodramatic   and   as   a  
consequence,  the  novel’s  message  falls  to  pieces.  
In  the  end,  there  are  a  number  of  aspects  that  speak  in  favour  and  against  
putting  a  child  narrator  at  a  novel’s  centre,  but  it  always  depends  on  the  reader’s  
ability  for  interpretation  and  on  his  background,  to  which  extent  the  child  narrator  
is  perceived  as  authentic  and  to  which  extent  the  child  narrator  can  develop  his  full  
potential  effect,  in  favour  of  the  successful  and  most  affecting  transmission  of  the  
story’s   central   message.   In   the   following   chapter,   we   are   going   to   analyze   to   which  
extent   Romain   Gary   and   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   manage   to   employ   the   child  
narrator’s   assets   best,   in   order   to   support   the   successful   and   appealing  
transmission   of   their   novel’s   message.   Additionally,   I   am   also   going   to   discuss  
which  challenges  the  authors  had  to  face  as  a  consequence  of  choosing  a  child  as  
the  voice  of  their  narratives.  

 92  
 

4.   Creative   Thinking:   Uniqueness   and   Function   of   Child  


Narrators  
Jane  McKee  argues  that  novels  featuring  child  narrators  ‘all  remain  fundamentally  
romantic  for  they  evoke  extreme  situations  and  extraordinary  behaviour  and  avoid  
totally  the   usual   problems   of   everyday  life.’41  In  the  following   paragraphs   we   are  
going   to   have   a   more   detailed   look   at   The   Life   Before   Us,   by   Romain   Gary   and   at  
Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  by  Jonathan  Safran  Foer.  In  relation  to  these  two  
novels,  Jane  McKee  is  right  in  her  observation  that  books  featuring   child   narrators  
focus   on   extreme   situations   and   extraordinary   behaviour.   Romain   Gary’s  
protagonist,   Momo,   grows   up   in   the   extreme   setting   of   Paris’   brothel   scene,  
because  he  is  the  orphaned  child  of  a  prostitute  and  in  the  second  novel,   Extremely  
Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  ten-­‐year-­‐old  Oskar’s  father  has  died  in  the  9/11  attack  on  
the  Twin  Towers.  Since  these  two  novels  take  place  in  extraordinary  venues,  they  
call  for  their  characters’  peculiar  behaviour.  
Thus,   on   the   one   hand,   Jane   McKee’s   observation   is   accurate,   because   the  
novels   mentioned   above   suggest   intense   situations.   However,   we   need   to   ask  
whether   not   most   novels   focus   on   extraordinary   settings,   events   or   characters,  
because  the  reading  process  allows  the  reader  to  come  into  contact  with  a  world  
and   with   views   different   to   his   own.   Everyday   problems   show   that   we   all   basically  
share  the  same  common  concerns  and  worries.  So,  it  is  only  natural  that  a  writer  
tries  to  highlight  and  pick  an  unusual  or  curious  topic,  as  the  central  theme  of  his  
novel,   because   he   wants   to   make   the   unusual   and   special   part   of   our   average   lives.  
Authors   need   to   cater   for   what   their   audience   wants   to   read   and   it   is   in   human  
nature  to  look  out  for  and  discuss  extraordinary  events  and  behaviour.  We  are  all  
surrounded   by   the   ordinary,   on   a   daily   basis,   and   reading   allows   the   common  
citizen   to   escape   from   his   mediocrity   and   to   experience   a   world   different   to   his  
own.  Consequently,  why  would  an  author  choose  to  look  at  the  most  plain  aspects  
of   daily   life,   just   because   he   has   chosen   to   put   a   child   character   at   the   centre   of   his  
novel?   Of   course,   I   have   argued   earlier   on   that   children   look   at   the   world   from   a  
different  perspective  and  manage  to  convey  their  worldview  in  an  interesting  and  
artistically  challenging  way.  Seen  from  that  point  of  view,  it  would  make  sense  to  
                                                                                                               
41  McKee,  Jane.  “The  Symbolic  Imagination  of  Romain  Gary.”  The  Maynooth  Review  6.2  (May  1982):  

60-­‐71,  61  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (JMK).  
  93  
 

discuss   the   ordinary   and   common   from   a   child’s   perspective.   Yet,   one   cannot  
expect  that  all  the  novels  written  from  a  child’s  perspective  intend  to  examine  the  
ordinary  from  an  unusual  point  of  view.  
Certainly,   there   are   also   authors   who   especially   concentrate   their   writing  
attention   on   everyday   topics,   because   readers   also   find   it   comforting   to   compare  
their   own   daily   existence   with   other   people’s   experiences   and   attitudes.   Yet,  
whether  an  author  focuses  on  extraordinary  events  and  people  or  whether  a  text  is  
based  on  ordinary  lives,  a  writer  will  never  manage  to  completely  separate  the  one  
world   from   the   other:   there   will   always   be   extraordinary   in   the   ordinary   and   vice-­‐
versa,  because  both  worlds  are  intrinsically  linked.  Additionally,  it  also  depends  on  
each  individual,  what  a  person  views  as  ordinary  or  as  unusual.  Consequently,  the  
interpretation  of  the  text  depends  ultimately  on  the  reader  and  on  his  worldview.  
Furthermore,   the   criticism   that   child   narrators   react   in   an   extraordinary  
way   to   an   extreme   situation   can   be   challenged   too,   because   how   do   we   expect  
people  to  react  to  extreme  situations?  How  do  we  expect  children  to  react  to  their  
parents’   death   or   to   the   confrontation   with   drugs   and   prostitution?   Allowedly,   one  
could   argue   that   an   author   would   rather   choose   a   child   narrator   or   character   to  
feature   in   a   novel   with   an   extreme   setting,   because   it   is   more   interesting   for   the  
reader   to   see   how   a   child   reacts   to   a   crisis   and   develops   later   on,   because   children  
react  differently  than  adults.  Yet,  this  is  also  a  generalization,  because  no  one  can  
ever  accurately  predict  how  someone  else  is  going  to  respond  or  behave,  since  it  
depends  on  a  person’s  prior  experiences  and  on  his  current  mood,  how  he  judges  
and  evaluates  a  situation.  What  remains  interesting  though  is  that  children  have  to  
deal   with   an   extreme   situation   and   they   have   less   experience   to   fall   back   onto,  
which  could  assure  them  that  there  is  always  a  way  out.  
Yet,  because  children  have  less  experience  in  life,  they  also  avoid  viewing  or  
perceiving   the   new   negative   or   extreme   incident   as   another   one   in   a   series   of  
negative   experiences.   The   adult   can   perceive   a   negative   encounter   as   too  
overwhelming,  because  there  have  been  many  previous  negative  events,  whereas  a  
child  perceives  the  experience  as  a  first  and  still  is  free  to  deal  with  it  based  on  an  
optimistic  and  unconditioned  mindset.    
Furthermore,  Jane  McKee  argues  that  the  novels  featuring  child  narrators  
 

 94  
 

are  constructed  in  such  a  way  that  they  give  pride  of  place  to  the  elucidation  of  the  
motives,  which  govern  the  actions  of  the  characters.  Many  of  them  also  reveal  an  
amazingly   symmetrical   construction   of   plot   in   that   the   attitudes   and  
preoccupations   of   the   central   character   or   characters   are   reflected   to   a   very  
remarkable  extent  in  the  minor  characters  of  the  novel.  Each  work  tends  to  reflect  
a   certain   type   of   attitude   to   the   problems   posed   to   man   by   the   human   situation,  
evoked   in   greatest   detail   in   the   central   character,   but   reflected,   from   a   slightly  
different   angle,   in   many   of   the   characters   around   him   and   in   a   way   which   goes  
beyond  the  normal  convergence  of  interests  to  be  expected  in  a  shared  situation.  
(JMK  62)  
 
First   of   all,   the   fact   that   the   same   motive   is   recurrently   exposed   by   different  
characters   and   through   different   events   in   the   story   is,   on   the   one   hand,   only  
natural,   since   the   recurring   idea   is   the   one   key   issue   that   the   author   wants   to  
discuss   in   his   text   and   to   give   his   readers   an   understanding   of.   Additionally,   the  
idea  that  one  motive  is  consistently  discussed  and  adduced  in  a  text  mirrors  real  
life   thinking,   because   people   also   focus   on   the   same   issue   over   and   over   again,   if  
that  idea  is  what  occupies  their  current  world  view.  
In   addition,   if   we   look   at   Jane   McKee’s   point   in   relation   to   child   narrators  
and  if  we  assume  that  children  have  limited  access  to  background  experience,  then  
the   fact   that   the   same   motive   recurs   throughout   a   novel   is   also   lifelike,   because  
there   are   only   few   key   motives   or   strong   points   of   interest   in   the   focus   of   the  
child’s  worldview.  
Moreover,  Jane  McKee  also  argues  that  novels  narrated  by  children  tend  to  
constantly  concentrate  on  the  same  motive  and  to  reflect  this  motive  through  the  
text’s   minor   characters   and   their   actions   or   attitudes,   too.   In   my   opinion,   this  
repetitive   approach   to   a   specific   topic   reflects   true   to   life   movement,   because   we  
observe  in  other  people  the  character  traits  or  concerns  that  currently  occupy  our  
frame  of  mind  and  we  tend  to  form  relations  or  get  in  contact  with  those  people,  
who  are  similar  to  us  in  character  and  attitude.  
Of   course,   on   the   other   hand,   it   can   also   be   the   case   that   people   surround  
themselves   with   or   observe   ideas   that   represent   the   complete   opposite   of   their  
own  worldview.  In  that  case,  we  could  say  that  the  same  motives  are  still  recurring,  
just   reflected   from   the   opposite   perspective.   Additionally,   we   can   also   argue   that  
adults   influence   children   and   shape   their   way   of   thinking   and   acting.   Now,   if   we  
assume  that  the  child  narrator  is  the  main  character  of  a  novel  and  that  the  adults  
are  the  minor  characters,  then  the  minor  characters  will  of  course  share  the  same  

  95  
 

central  thinking  as  the  narrator,  because  the  child  reflects  the  behaviour  and  frame  
of  mind  of  the  adults  surrounding  him.  
And   then   again,   we   need   to   ask   ourselves   the   question   of   how   many  
different  motives  there  actually  are  in  terms  of  novel  writing  material.  Hence,  the  
idea  that  the  writer  recurrently  highlights  the  same  motive  throughout  a  novel  is  
also   due   to   a   limited   amount   of   topics   to   draw   from.   If   an   author   would   include  
many   different   motives,   then   the   author   would   need   to   expand   those   motives,   to  
weave   a   text   around   each   theme   and   to   interlink   the   different   topics.   This   cross-­‐
linking   would   lead   to   the   development   of   an   epic   story,   which   would   be  
challenging  for  the  reader  to  digest.    
Additionally,   if   we   think   in   terms   of   the   child   narrator,   then   we   also   need   to  
bear   in   mind   that   it   is   easier   for   a   child   character   to   display   one   motive   or   topic  
more  in  depth,  than  to  relate  to  different  motives  more  in  detail,  because  it  is  more  
plausible  that  a  child  has  only  made  one  or  two  influential  experiences  in  his  life,  
than   a   multitude   of   experiences,   which   are   worthy   of   discussion.   Of   course,   each  
novel  or  narrator  touches  upon  various  issues  throughout  the  novel’s  course,  but  
in   the   end   those   ideas   all   come   together   to   highlight   the   narrator’s   or   the   child  
narrator’s  major  concern  or  focus  in  life.  
Certainly,  if  we  say  that  it  is  easier  for  a  child  character  to  focus  on  one  topic  
and   to   illustrate   that   idea   more   in   detail,   we   could   object   that   the   author   is   the  
source   of   the   text   and   that   surely   an   adult   can   manage   to   interlink   and   discuss  
several  topics  within  one  text.  Yet,  then  again  it  is  the  author’s  interest  to  expand  
the   reader’s   understanding   of   one   key   idea   and   so,   it   makes   more   sense   to  
highlight  that  single  key  motive  recurrently  throughout  the  novel  than  to  introduce  
a  multitude  of  ideas.  
The   previous   discussion   has   made   it   clear   that   the   qualities   that   we   as  
critics   identify   as   specifically   belonging   to   novels   featuring   child   narrators   are   in  
fact   partly   universal   observations   and   expand   to   all   literary   genres   and   styles.   In  
the  following  chapters,  we  are  going  to  have  a  closer  look  at  The  Life  Before  Us,  by  
Romain  Gary  and  at  Extremely  Loud  and  Incredibly  Close,  by  Jonathan  Safran  Foer.  
To   what   extent   do   these   novels   mirror   the   ideas   previously   raised   and   to   what  
extent   do   these   two   novels   differ   from   texts   featuring   adult   narrators?   Which  

 96  
 

advantages  do  these  two  authors  see  in  employing  a  child,  as  the  narrator  of  their  
story,  or  which  disadvantages  does  their  technique  yield?  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

  97  
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 98  
 

4.1.  The  Life  Before  Us,  by  Romain  Gary  


The   Life   Before   Us,   by   the   French   author   Romain   Gary   is   a   first   person   narrative,  
which   centres   on   the   child   narrator,   called   Momo:   ‘My   name   is   Mohammed,   but  
everybody   calls   me   Momo,   because   it   sounds   littler’   (RG   2).   By   giving   his  
protagonist  a  nickname  and  making  him  look  harmless,  Romain  Gary  manages  to  
create   a   child   narrator   that   operates   on   different   social   and   emotional   levels.  
Whenever  a  situation  is  illustrated  from  a  more  mature  perspective,  ‘Momo’  turns  
into   ‘Mohammed’   and   the   reader   subconsciously   perceives   the   narrator   as   older.  
The   reverse   effect   is   created,   when   the   child   is   called   Momo.   Thus,   not   just  
specifying  the  narrator’s  age  gives  the  reader  a  specific  view  of  the  character,  but  
also  the  author’s  play  with  words  and  language  creates  a  very  specific  impression  
of  the  narrator  for  the  reader.  
The  words  the  other  characters  use  in  order  to  address  the  narrator  and  to  
talk   to   and   about   him,   create   an   image   of   the   narrator,   too.   Hence,   the   other  
characters’  language  and  the  narrator’s  language  shape  the  reader’s  perception  of  
the  character’s  age  and  correlating  attitude.  
Consequently,  on  the  one  hand,  the  language  used  in  the  novel,  in  order  to  
refer   to   the   child   narrator,   defines   the   idea   that   the   reader   has   of   the   narrator’s  
age,   as   pointed   out   in   the   preceding   paragraph.   However,   also   the   language   the  
other  characters  in  the  novel  use  or  the  words  that  the  narrator  employs,  in  order  
to   talk   about   the   other   characters,   frame   the   reader’s   impression   of   the   child  
character:   if   the   child   character   is   surrounded   by   magniloquent   characters,   who  
use   sophisticated   language,   then   the   contrast   between   the   child’s   way   of  
expression   and   his   surrounding   (adult)   world   is   more   pronounced.   As   a  
consequence,   in   that   case,   the   reader   perceives   the   child’s   language   as   even   less  
developed.  
On   the   other   hand,   if   the   author   decides   to   attribute   the   same   linguistic  
abilities   to   all   his   characters,   child   narrator   included,   then   the   reader   will   perceive  
the  child  narrator  as  more  mature,  due  to  the  language  he  uses,  which  resembles  
that  of  the  novel’s  adult  characters.  So,  even  if  it  is  mentioned  in  the  story  that  the  
child  narrator  is  eight  years  old,  the  character’s  advanced  language  will  make  the  
reader  imagine  an  older  person.  

  99  
 

Moreover,   Momo   addresses   the   reader   directly   and   admits   that   he   is   still  
inexperienced  and  young  and  that  his  judgment  needs  the  reader’s  relativization,  
at  times:  ‘now  I  understood.  I  hadn’t  lived  enough  yet  to  have  enough  experience,  
and  even  now  talking  to  you  I  know  that  even  after  years  of  taking  it  on  the  chin  
there’s   always   something   left   to   learn’   (RG   173).   Momo   puts   himself   in   an   inferior  
position,  in  relation  to  the  reader,  by  admitting  that  he  still  has  a  lot  to  learn.  On  
the  one  hand,  the  child’s  offensive  attitude  makes  him  sympathetic  to  the  reader,  
because   the   reader   feels   as   if   he   understands   Momo’s   helplessness.   Additionally,  
the  reader  also  feels  the  wish  to  follow  Momo’s  story  and  to  observe,  if  he  manages  
to  grow,  as  time  goes  by,  and  if  he  develops  through  experience.  
Moreover,   Momo   plays   with   the   idea   that   he   has   had   a   challenging  
childhood.  He  points  out  that  he  had  to  ‘take  a  lot  on  the  chin.’  In  relation  to  this  
statement,   the   reader   feels   more   moved,   when   a   child   narrator   expresses   this  
reality,   than   when   an   adult   has   had   to   endure   a   lot   of   suffering.   Every   individual  
has  had  his  share  of  personal  tragedy  and  misfortune  and  consequently,  the  adult  
reader   expects   the   characters   in   a   novel   to   equally   deal   with   their   fate   in   a  
dignified  way,  without  excessive  lamentation.  
In  contrast,  the  reader  can  also  find  it  interesting  to  witness  the  fate  of  an  
individual   who   cannot   deal   with   his   personal   misfortune   at   all   and   where   a   text  
lays   out   and   tracks   the   person’s   gradual   decline.   In   conclusion,   a   reader   is   much  
more   inclined   to   feel   for   and   emotionally   support   a   child   narrator,   who   has   to  
come   to   terms   with   a   lot   of   suffering,   than   with   an   adult   narrator,   who   finds  
himself  in  a  similarly  distressing  situation.  Of  course,  this  explanation  is  also  based  
on   a   generalization.   Thus,   the   fact   that   Momo   uses   a   direct   address   to   speak   to   the  
reader   bypasses   the   possibility   that   an   author   might   not   be   naturally   inclined   to  
sympathize  with  a  child  narrator.  Momo  involves  the  reader  directly  by  talking  to  
him  and  thus,  assures  that  he  is  being  heard.  
Furthermore,  Momo  is  a  nine-­‐year-­‐old  boy,  who  grows  up  in  an  orphanage  
and  day  care  centre,  which  is  run  by  an  ex-­‐prostitute,  called  Madame  Rosa:  
 
Madame   Rosa   was   an   ex-­‐whore   who’d   come   back   from   being   deported   to   the  
Jewish  homes  in  Germany  and  had  opened  a  clandestine  rest  home  for  the  children  
of   whores   who   could   be   blackmailed   with   loss   of   paternity   rights   for   illicit  
prostitution   and   have   to   hide   their   kids   because   neighbors   are   usually   bastards  
capable  of  reporting  you  to  the  Public  Welfare.  (RG  143)  

 100  
 

 
As   a   child   narrator,   Momo   has   the   advantage   that   he   can   comment   on   Madame  
Rosa   and   the   children’s   situation,   without   feeling   the   need   to   interfere   and   to  
meddle   with   the   circumstances.   Adults   commonly   feel   like   they   need   to   get  
involved,   when   people   seem   to   have   trouble   leading   a,   so-­‐called,   regulated   life.  
People  also  tend  to  condemn  each  other’s  passivity,  when  a  situation  calls  for  adult  
intervention.  Momo  though  does  not  feel  the  social  pressure  that  usually  dictates,  
what   is   morally   and   ethically   acceptable,   in   a   certain   culture,   or   not.   Consequently,  
Momo  manages  to  observe  a  situation  devoid  of  any  biased  judgment.  
Additionally,   Momo   is   a   child,   who   lives   in   a   situation   that   middle-­‐class  
society  normally  deems  inappropriate  for  a  child.  Hence,  speaking  from  his  point  
of   view,   Momo   can   convince   the   reader   that   the   desire   to   alter   another   person’s  
situation  can  be  well-­‐intentioned,  but  that  people,  who  we  deem  in  need  of  help  or  
change   do   not   necessarily   appreciate   or   need   external   support,   because   they   feel  
protected  and  secure  in  their  current  situation,  as  it  is.  Momo  belongs  to  that  social  
group   of   people,   who   are   dominated   by   individuals,   who   feel   morally   superior,  
because  they  have  enjoyed  an  education  and  because  they  feel  that  they  can  take  
informed   decisions.   Yet,   within   that   context,   Momo   points   out   the   emotional  
shortcomings  and  the  uprooting  that  for  children  can  be  the  end  result  of  overtly  
zealous   social   welfare:   ‘minors   are   wonderfully   protected   in   France,   and   when  
there’s   nobody   to   look   after   them   the   government   throws   them   in   jail   for  
safekeeping’  (RG  106).  Of  course,  on  the  one  hand,  Momo’s  statement  is  exaggerated  
and   additionally,   the   government   needs   to   solve   social   problems,   by   putting  
socially   deprived   children   in   safekeeping,   when   there   are   no   foster   families  
available.   Yet,   a   child   narrator   manages   to   illustrate   that   grown-­‐ups   view  
children’s   problems   from   an   adult   perspective   and   that   there   is   also   the   child’s  
own  opinion  of  what  is  best  for  him  that  adults  should  consider,  when  looking  for  a  
solution  to  the  problem.  
Furthermore,  Romain  Gary  gives  his  child  narrator  a  dimension  of  maturity,  
by   putting   him   in   a   situation,   where   children   are   not   pampered   and   carefully  
looked   after.   Momo   is   the   child   of   a   prostitute   and   grows   up   under   the   care   of  
Madame   Rosa,   an   ex-­‐prostitute,   who   dedicates   her   final   years   to   looking   after  
socially   disadvantaged   children,   like   Momo.   Within   that   context,   Momo   picks   up  

  101  
 

more   adult   talk,   than   children   in   sheltered   circumstances:   ‘I   stopped   being  


ignorant  when  I  was  three  or  four,  and  I  sometimes  miss  it’   (RG  1).  In  what  respect  
exactly  Momo  stopped  being  ignorant  is  not  specified  in  the  novel.  Of  course,  the  
reader   can   imagine   that   Momo   alludes   to   the   fact   that   he   learned   about   financial  
hardship,  prostitution,  crime  and  sexual  relations,  when  he  was  still  too  young.  Yet,  
on  the  other  hand,  the  reader  can  never  be  sure  what  Momo  learned  that  he  would  
rather  have  postponed  knowing  about,  since  what  disturbs  one  person,  might  not  
disturb  another.  What  Momo’s  vague  statement  illustrates  though  is  anew  the  idea  
that  Momo  has  too  little  linguistic  baggage  to  verbalize  his  experience.  Of  course,  
we   can   argue   that   the   ability   to   express   emotions   and   experiences   verbally   does  
not  depend  on  age.  Yet,  grown-­‐ups  have  more  experience  to  fall  back  onto  and  to  
use  as  reference  point  for  comparison,  also  in  a  linguistic  way.  Thus,  employing  a  
child   narrator   has   the   advantage   that   the   reader   can   leave   situations   and   events  
unexplained   and   still   preserve   the   character’s   authenticity   or   credibility,   because  
allegedly,  a  child  lacks  the  accurate  words  to  comment  on  everything,  anyway.    
On   the   other   hand,   children,   who   lack   their   own   words   to   describe   their  
surroundings,   imitate   the   adults’   way   of   expressing   themselves.   At   first   sight,  
Momo’s   social   background   seems   too   challenging   to   be   discussed   from   a   child’s  
perspective,   but   Romain   Gary   allows   his   child   narrator   to   repeat   what   he   hears.  
This   technique   makes   the   child’s   wording   sound   plausible.   What   Momo   puts  
forward   are   not   his   own   ideas,   but   the   chatter   of   Madame   Rosa   and   her  
acquaintances.   So,   when   Momo   says:   ‘with   all   the   pounds   she   had   to   lug   around  
with   her,   (Madame   Rosa)   had   more   than   her   share   of   daily   life   with   all   its   sorrows  
and   cares.   She   said   so   too’   (RG   1),   he   sounds   precocious   on   the   one   hand,   but   the  
reader   has   to   grant   that   the   child   grows   up   in   a   milieu,   where   children   can   pick   up  
all   sorts   of   expressions   and   bits   of   general   wisdom,   without   consciously   being  
aware  of  what  he  says.  
On   the   one   hand,   the   reader   might   think   that   Momo   repeats   the   adults’  
words   without   any   awareness   of   their   impact.   On   the   other   hand,   the   child   is  
impressed   enough   by   the   words   that   he   hears,   in   order   to   repeat   them   to   an  
audience.   Of   course,   even   if   the   child   does   not   understand   the   expression   and  
implied   meaning,   then   the   narrator’s   tone   of   voice   still   carries   the   importance   of  
the   message.   When   we   discuss,   if   Momo   understands   his   surroundings   or   not,   or   if  

 102  
 

he  manages  to  make  sense  of  the  words  he  hears,  then  this  discussion  is  basically  
purely   hypothetical,   because   Momo   is   a   fictional   character.   The   actual   level   of  
understanding  lies  between  author  and  reader.  Yet,  the  discussion  about  the  child’s  
level  of  comprehension  is  relevant,  because  it  illustrates  to  what  extent  an  author  
tries  to  portray  a  realistic,  common  child  as  the  narrator  of  his  story.  
Moreover,   we   have   argued   that   the   author   allows   his   child   narrator   to  
repeat   the   words   of   his   surroundings,   in   order   to   express   the   idea   that   the   child  
lacks   accurate   linguistic   knowledge   and   the   ability   to   formulate   his   ideas  
independently   of   others.   Of   course,   adults   also   repeat   other   people’s   words   at  
times,   because   other   people   know   better,   how   to   express   themselves   or   because  
we  admire,  what  we  have  heard  other  people  say.  Moreover,  there  is  also  the  idea  
that  not  just  children  lack  the  ability  to  formulate  their  ideas  accurately,  but  that  
also   adults   can   display   linguistic   shortcomings,   because   they   have   never   learned  
how  to  articulate  their  emotions  and  opinion:  ‘while  he  was  talking,  Monsieur  N’Da  
Amédée   used   to   gesticulate   and   work   himself   into   a   lather,   not   because   he   was  
angry,   but   because   he   had   many   more   things   to   say   to   his   parents   than   he   could  
express   with   his   low-­‐class   resources’   (RG   27).   Monsieur   N’Da   Amédée’s  
shortcoming   links   him   to   a   child’s   reality   and   thus,   illustrates   the   idea   that  
children,  like  lower  social  classes,  are  not  taught  or  meant  to,  by  upper  or  middle-­‐
class   society,   how   to   communicate   their   desires   and   how   to   become   noticeable  
through  language,  because  if  all  the  members  of  society  had  an  individual  say,  then  
that  situation  would  turn  established  social  organization  upside-­‐down.  
In  any  way,  repeating  other  people’s  phrases  is  a  way  of  trying  to  belong  to  
a   social   group.   The   fact   that   children   and   lower   social   classes   use   different  
language,   than   higher   social   classes,   illustrates   the   discrepancy   in   status   on  
different   levels.   Momo’s   language   identifies   him   as   a   member   of   Paris’   socially  
deprived  milieu.  This  fact  puts  him  in  an  inferior  position  in  relation  to  the  upper-­‐
class   society.   However,   the   people   surrounding   Momo   share   the   same   language  
features  as  the  child,  which  allows  the  group  to  identify  Momo  as  one  of  them.  In  
Momo’s   case,   the   child   is   trying   to   form   a   social   identity   in   relation   to   Madame  
Rosa,  because  he  is  an  orphan  or  at  least,  he  does  not  know  the  whereabouts  of  his  
parents.   So   Momo   repeats   Madame   Rosa’s   words,   in   order   to   learn,   how   to   behave  
within   his   foster   mother’s   social   environment   or   context.   It   might   also   be   that  

  103  
 

Momo   was   too   young,   when   he   was   separated   from   his   mother,   in   order   to  
remember  anything  about  the  ideas  he  learned  in  her  social  context.  So  Momo  tries  
to  form  an  identity  in  relation  to  his  current  setting.  
Moreover,  if  we  pick  up  on  the  idea  that  mirroring  other  people  helps  us  to  
form   an   identity,   then   we   can   also   say   that   people,   who   have   to   switch   between  
social   contexts,   because   of   changes,   in   terms   of   work   place   or   relationships,   also  
imitate  other  people’s  speech  or  actions,  in  order  to  feel  more  at  home  or  in  order  
to  synchronize  their  identity  with  their  new  and  unknown  environment.  
Additionally,   it   is   a   fact   that   people   copy   other   people’s   behaviour,   if   they  
like  what  they  see  or  hear.  Momo  likes  Madame  Rosa  of  course,  because  she  is  his  
guardian   and   consequently,   he   mirrors   her   mimics.   Vice   versa,   Momo   also   wants  
Madame  Rosa  to  accept  him.  Instinctively,  he  tries  to  behave  like  her  and  to  show  
her   that   he   is   one   of   her   kind:   ‘it   gave   me   a   bad   shock   to   hear   I   was   paid   for.   I  
thought   Madame   Rosa   loved   me   free   gratis   and   there   was   some   connection  
between  us.  I  cried  about  it  all  one  night,  and  that  was  my  first  big  sorrow’   (RG  2).  
Momo’s   words   illustrate   the   discrepancy   between   the   infantile   and   adult  
perception   of   the   world.   In   the   adult   world,   material   laws   reign,   whereas   in   a  
child’s   world,   mutual   sympathy   and   understanding   are   what   keeps   people  
together.   Now,   why   would   an   author   choose   a   child   as   the   narrator   and   not   an  
adult,   in   order   to   illustrate   that   people   imitate   the   people   surrounding   them,   in  
order   to   construct   a   feeling   of   sympathy   and   membership?   We   have   already  
established   that   adults   also   mirror   other   adults,   so   an   adult   narrator   could  
illustrate   the   same   idea.   Yet,   it   is   more   clearly   apparent   that   a   child   mirrors   his  
surroundings,   when   he   adopts   adult   expressions,   than   an   adult,   who   repeats   other  
adult  talk.  
Furthermore,   earlier   on,   we   have   pointed   out   that   first   person   narratives  
are  stories  of  ‘self-­‐interest’.  Although  Momo  talks  about  his  own  experiences,  and  
although   the   reader   lives   Momo’s   life,   by   listening   to   his   first-­‐hand   account,   we  
simultaneously  also  experience  other  characters’  lives  and  tragedies.  Thus,  a  first-­‐
person   narrator   manages   to   extent   the   story’s   scope   to   other   characters’  
experiences   and   tragedies.   Jane   McKee   points   out   that   Romain   ‘Gary’s   novels  
always  involve  a  degree  of  psychological  analysis,  and  psychological  realism’   (JMK  
60).   I  would  say  that  Romain  Gary’s  text  conveys  psychological  realism,  but  I  would  

 104  
 

add   that   the   author   also   manages   to   capture   realistic   human   interaction   and  
setting,  because  the  narrator’s  and  the  other  characters’  lives  overlap  and  interfere  
with   each   other.   Momo,   the   child   narrator,   is   the   miniature   version   of   the   older  
people   surrounding   him.   Momo’s   life   develops   along   the   same   lines   as   the   other  
characters’  lives.  The  reader  is  aware  of  this  parallel  in  lifestyle  and  experience,  but  
the   fact   that   Momo   is   still   a   child   makes   the   reader   want   to   hope   that   Momo  
manages  to  escape  his  current  setting  and  to  live  a  life  devoid  of  prostitution  and  
drug   abuse,   despite   the   similarities   between   him   and   the   adult   characters   in   his  
novel.   Consequently,   a   child   narrator   serves   the   purpose   of   highlighting,   what   a  
person   can   think   and   feel   at   the   beginning   of   his   life   and   to   which   extent   one’s  
surroundings  still  predominate  one’s  own  nature,  when  it  comes  to  the  question,  
how  a  life  develops  in  the  long  run.  
Moreover,   in   terms   of   realistic   setting,   Romain   Gary’s   novel   takes   place   in  
Paris,   but   the   narrative   refrains   from   sugarcoating   the   city   as   a   centre   of   fashion  
and   cosmopolites.   The   author   manages   to   show   Paris   realistically,   as   the  
metropolis  that  it  is,  with  all  its  duality  and  the  wear  and  tear  of  domestic  quarrels  
and   street   fights,   which   are   fought   on   a   daily   basis.   The   child   narrator,   Momo,  
describes   old   and   young,   native   and   immigrant,   health   and   disease,   as   if   they   were  
not   opposites,   but   ordinary   parts   of   daily   life.   21st   century   society   claims   to   be  
enlightened  and  to  regard  life’s  experiences  mentioned  above,  as  natural  aspects  of  
life,  which  they  are  in  fact,  and  the  media  pretends  that  we  find  a  voice  to  discuss  
those   topics   openly,   but   ideas   like   racism,   immigration,   and   death   still   remain  
taboos.  At  the  beginning  of  this  thesis,  we  have  argued  that  putting  a  child  at  the  
centre  of  a  novel  and  allowing  him  to  take  over  the  narrative  grants  a  voice  to  the  
weakest   members   of   society.   Romain   Gary   attributes   this   voice   to   Momo   and  
additionally,   the   author   allows   his   child   narrator   to   discern   the   precarious  
situation   of   people   that   are   also   deprived   of   a   voice   of   their   own.   Romain   Gary  
draws  attention  to  two  minor  ethnic  groups  in  France:  Momo  is  an  Arab  boy  and  
the  child  of  a  prostitute.  The  author  puts  his  main  character  in  a  situation,  where  
he   can   voice   criticism,   without   sounding   condescending,   because   the   narrator  
himself   belongs   to   the   two   socially   challenged   groups.   In   addition,   Momo   is   a   child  
and   thus,   he   does   not   occupy   a   social   position   that   allows   him   to   sound  
condescending   anyway.   In   that   respect,   we   can   turn   to   Tanner   Tony,   who   when   he  

  105  
 

characterizes   Huckleberry   Finn’s   situation,   sounds   as   if   he   were   talking   about  


Momo:    
 
[Huckleberry   Finn]   finds   himself   in   a   society   whose   sense   of   the   moral   has  
obscured  its  feeling  for  the  human,  and  so  he  has  to  adopt  a  flexible  morality  like,  
which   may   include   lying   and   stealing,   in   order   not   to   betray   his   own   best  
promptings.  The  anarchic  implications  are  strong  for  this  reason:  that  Huck  in  his  
own   person   demonstrates   the   need   to   dissolve   social   codified   morality   if   man   is   to  
remain  true  to  his  essential  humanity.  (TT  212)  
 
When   we   listen   to   this   statement,   we   can   say   that   Momo   finds   himself   in   the   same  
situation,   as   Huckleberry   Finn,   a   century   before   Romain   Gary’s   story   took   place.  
Momo   also   needs   to   adopt   a   flexible   morality   that   allows   him   to   steal   what   he  
needs,   in   order   to   survive,   because   money   is   rare   at   Madame   Rosa’s.   Yet,   on   the  
other  hand,  Huck’s  life  differs  from  Momo’s,  because  in  Momo’s  world  ‘the  sense  of  
the   moral   has   [not]   obscured   its   feelings   for   the   human.’   Although   the   setting,  
where   Momo   grows   up,   is   on   the   one   hand,   riven   with   human   abuse   and  
corruption,  people  on  the  other  hand  stick  together  even  more  closely.  Exceptional  
living   conditions   lead   to   and   demand   the   dissolution   of   the   conventional   moral  
code  that  is  commonly  accepted  by  the  middle  class  society.  Upper-­‐class  society,  in  
general,   and   the   lower-­‐class   society   at   the   core   of   Romain   Gary’s   novel   need   to  
reconstruct  their  own  moral  standards,  by  which  each  individual  can  live.  Momo’s  
interpretation   of   ethical   behaviour   illustrates   that   all   ages   need   to   adapt   to   their  
social  circumstances  and  that  adults  cannot  separate  their  offspring  from  the  social  
setting,  where  those  children  grow  up.  Although  Momo  is  still  little  informed  about  
prostitution   and   sexuality,   the   child   still   falls   victim   to   the   pull   of   the   every   day  
events   in   his   current   social   milieu.   Romain   Gary   could   of   course   also   have  
employed  an  adult  narrator  and  illustrated  just  as  effectively  the  consequences  of  
social   restrictions   for   family   life.   Yet,   Momo’s   special   domestic   situation   allows   the  
author  to  illustrate  how  a  minor  reacts  to  hardship,  when  he  is  not  firmly  guided  
by   an   adult.   Madame   Rosa   looks   after   Momo   and   helps   him   to   survive,   but   the  
woman   does   not   lead   a   regulated   life   either.   Romain   Gary   has   managed   to   create   a  
more   or   less   independent   child   character,   who   can,   on   the   one   hand,   observe,  
benefit,   and   learn   from   an   adult   world,   but   who,   on   the   other   hand,   is   detached  
enough  from  regular  family  life,  in  order  to  illustrate  how  children  react  to  social  
challenges   independently   of   their   elders.   The   fact   that   Momo   is   a   child   narrator  
 
106  
 

facilitates  the  illustration  of  the  link  between  the  external  events  and  the  internal,  
mental   or   psychological   growth   of   the   child.   Of   course,   the   author   could   also  
employ   an   omniscient   adult   narrator,   who   outlines   the   child’s   physical   and  
psychological   development   in   relation   to   his   social   context.   However,   the   reader  
feels  more  involved,  when  a  character  directly  relates  his  own  situation,  than  when  
there  is  another  narrator,  who  is  just  describing  and  commenting  from  the  outside.  
The  vantage  point  in  these  two  situations  is  slightly  different  and  it  depends  on  the  
author,  which  effect  he  wants  to  create  with  his  narrator.  
Moreover,   Borsch   Jean   points   out   that   ‘the   author’s   system   of   broken-­‐up  
composition,  of  very  short  chapters  each  of  which  relates  a  single  episode,  allows  
him   to   introduce   small   detached   pieces   under   the   guise   of   short   stories.’42   These  
short   stories   all   relate   different   stories   of   love,   hope,   prostitution   and   otherness,  
while   at   the   same   time,   sharing   the   common   message   of   how   different   lives   are,  
yet,   how   commonly   they   are   lived,   with   the   same   need   to   belong   to   someone,  
somewhere.  
In  addition,  Momo’s  life  itself  is  a  short  version  of  a  human  life,  because  it  
represents   childhood,   which   is   a   small   part   of   a   complete,   average   human   life.  
Short  stories  have  an  internal  logic  of  their  own  and  a  child  has  also  a  personally  
coherent  philosophy,  by  which  he  lives.  Furthermore,  short  stories  usually  end  in  a  
final   conclusion,   which   is   comparable   to   the   different   stages   of   a   human   life,   which  
would  be   in   Momo’s   case   his   childhood.  Yet  one   could  argue  that  a  life   moves  from  
one  phase  to  another:  from  childhood,  to  adulthood,  to  old  age.  Yet,  one  short  story  
can  also  be  the  basis  for  another.  Consequently,  Romain  Gary’s  way  of  composing  
his  novel,  based  on  a  series  of  ‘short  stories,’  mirrors  the  various  stages  a  person  
runs  through,  from  his  birth  to  his  death.  
Within  his  childhood  phase,  Momo’s  life  is  also  a  composition  of  broken  up  
fragments   that   have   been   reconstructed   to   form   a   whole   new   identity.   Momo’s  
early   childhood   is   a   blur   of   fragments,   while   his   encounters   with   foreigners   are  
also   fragments   that   allow   him   to   reconsider   his   own   position   in   society,   as   an  
immigrant  child  and  orphan,  while  the  loss  of  Madame  Rosa  later  on,  fragments  the  
child’s  life  and  identity  once  again,  before  he  can  think  of  recreating  an  identity  of  
his  own.  Before  we  come  to  have  another  close  look  at  the  novel’s  primary  text,  we  
                                                                                                               
42  Boorsch,  Jean.  “Romain  Gary.”  Yale  French  Studies  8,  What’s  Novel  in  the  Novel  (1951):  51-­‐55,  52.  

  107  
 

can  mention  here  that  Romain  Gary  had  to  grapple  with  identity  himself,  just  like  
his  characters:  
 
At  a  certain  point,  Gary  concluded  that,  as  a  writer  at  least,  he  was  tired  of  being  
the  famous  Romain  Gary.  He  wanted  to  be  someone  else.  As  he  put  it,  quoting  from  
the  Polish  novelist  Witold  Gombrowicz,  “there  comes  a  day  when  a  writer  is  held  
prisoner  by  ‘la  gueule  qu’on  lui  a  faite,’  the  mug  which  the  critics  have  given  him  –  
an  appearance  which  has  nothing  to  do  with  his  work  or  himself.  (RG  185)  
 
For  one,  the  author  exposes  the  idea  that  people  define  each  other,  on  the  basis  of  
first   impressions,   on   hearsay   or   on   their   own   standards   and   once   an   impression  
has  been  created  that  perception  of  another  individual  seems  to  be  set  in  stone.  On  
the   one   hand,   people   cling   of   course   to   the   idea   that   their   impression   of   another  
person  is  accurate,  because  everybody  wants  to  be  right  in  his  assumptions  about  
the   world.   Additionally,   people   are   creatures   of   habit.   Consequently,   it   is   much  
easier  to  assume  that  a  person  is  always  the  same,  because  we  can  then  react  in  a,  
to   us,   similar   way   too,   which   makes   human   interaction   and   life,   in   general,   much  
easier,  albeit  less  interesting  and  challenging.  
In  addition,  not  only  the  critics  label  the  author,  but  the  readers  define  the  
narrator   of   a   text,   too.   The   reader   conceives   and   defines   the   narrator.   The   initial  
image   that   the   narrator   has   adopted   because   of   the   reader   becomes   challenging   to  
alter  throughout  the  later  reading  process.  Of  course,  it  is  natural  that  the  reader  
views   the   narrator   in   a   more   or   less   consistent   way   throughout   the   novel,   because  
it   is   the   reader,   who   interprets   the   character’s   actions   and   attitude   and   since   the  
reader’s   character   and   nature   remains   little   altered   for   the   duration   of   the   reading  
process,  his  view  of  the  narrator  also  remains  stable.  
Additionally,  the  fact  that  the  reader’s  perception  of  a  character  is  settled  at  
the   beginning   of   the   novel,   and   remains   consistent   throughout   the   reading  
operation  facilitates  the  creation  of  a  convincing  and  coherent  child  narrator.  If  a  
reader   accepts   that   the   narrator   of   a   certain   text   is   a   ten-­‐year-­‐old   child,   the   reader  
has   that   image   in   mind,   whenever   he   sits   down   to   read   that   text.   When   the  
narrator   acts   or   speaks   differently,   than   we   would   expect   a   child   to   act,   then   the  
reader   still   subconsciously   accepts   the   text   as   a   child’s   narrative,   because   his   mind  
associates   the   words   with   the   image   of   a   minor.   That   and   the   reader’s   desire   for  
consistency  and  logic  lead  him  to  accept  any  way  of  expression,  as  that  of  a  child  

 108  
 

narrator,   because   the   reader   wants   to   pursue   the   way   of   least   confusion.   Earlier  
on,  we  have  argued  that  it  does  not  depend  on  how  realistic  a  child  narrator  is,  in  
order  for  the  reader  to  accept  him,  but  on  the  novel’s  coherency  as  a  whole.  Now,  
we  can  add  that  it  does  not  just  depend  on  the  author’s  talent  to  render  a  novel  or  a  
story  internally  coherent,  but  also  on  the  reader’s  ability  to  make  sense  of  the  story  
as  a  whole  and  to  ignore  inconsistencies  as  a  necessary  part  of  the  story.  
Romain   Gary   has   felt   constricted   by   the   image   the   critics   have   given   him.  
Similarly,   the   author   also   manages   to   convey   the   fate   of   those   people   that   have  
been   defined   and   classified   as   substandard,   by   society.   Romain   Gary   illustrates   the  
lives   of   prostitutes   and   immigrants,   who   have   been   stigmatized.   When   a   person  
has   defined   another   person,   then   it   might   be   disagreeable   to   be   always   viewed  
from  the  same  perspective  and  especially,  if  people  have  understood  you  wrongly,  
according   to   your   own   perception   of   yourself.   Yet,   if   the   stigma   a   person   has   given  
another   individual   is   positive,   like   in   Romain   Gary’s   case,   then   the   consequences  
are   still   mostly   beneficial.   For   example,   if   the   critics   view   Romain   Gary   as   a  
generally   talented   writer,   then   he   enjoys   the   liberty   to   produce   a   mediocre   text  
and   critics   will   view   his   creation   as   a   one-­‐off   disappointment,   even   if   in   fact   his  
masterpieces  were   one-­‐offs.  Thus,  people  can  also  benefit  from  a  stigma  that  other  
people  (falsely)  attribute  to  them.  
In   contrast,   it   can   also   be   the   case   that   people   attract   negative  
stigmatization,   even   as   a   whole   group,   like   Arab   people   in   The   Life   Before   Us.   In  
that   case,   the   stigma   a   person   attracts   does   not   depend   on   individuality,   character,  
and  personal  attitude  anymore,  but  on  social  and  ethnical  background.  
Additionally,   the   way   people   portray   themselves,   by   the   way   they   dress,  
triggers  stigmatization  by  others:  
 
They  looked  at  me  like  a  lump  of  shit.  My  rags  were  terrible,  I  felt  it  right  away.  I  
had  a  cap  that  was  always  standing  up  in  back  because  I  have  too  much  hair  and  an  
overcoat  that  hung  down  to  my  heels.  When  you  snatch  garmentry,  you  haven’t  got  
time  to  measure  if  the  stuff  is  too  big  or  too  little,  you’re  in  a  hurry.  They  didn’t  say  
anything,  but  we  weren’t  from  the  same  block.  (RG  147/  148)  
 
An   adult   narrator   could   just   as   easily   address   the   reality   that   there   are  
discrepancies   between   social   classes   and   that   there   are   a   large   number   of   adults  
and   children,   who   suffer   from   financial   hardship.   Yet,   turning   a   child   into   the  

  109  
 

observer   of   and   commentator   on   class   differences   is   more   poignant,   because   the  


reader  gets  a  first-­‐hand  account  of  what  it  feels  like  for  a  child  to  live  in  financial  
hardship.   Adults   generally   assume   that   adults   suffer   more   from   a   lack   of   money,  
because  adults  are  the  caretakers  of  and  providers  for  the  family.  It  might  be  true  
that  children  do  not  feel  the  psychological  pressure  generated  by  hardship  as  much  
as  adults,  because  children  do  not  feel  responsible  to  such  an  extent  as  their  elders.  
Yet,   socially   deprived   children   also   notice   the   difference   in   appearance   and  
behaviour  between  themselves  and  children,  who  belong  to  a  different  social  class.  
An  adult  narrator  could  raise  the  same  social  issue,  but  the  attained  effect  would  
be  a  different  one.  
In  relation  to  child  narrators,  it  is  easier  for  an  author  to  address  the  reader  
on  a  more  or  less  neutral  level,  if  the  narrator  is  a  child.  People  stigmatize  children  
less   readily,   according   to   their   social   or   ethnical   background.   Or   if   people   judge  
and  stigmatize,  like  in  Momo’s  case,  then  people  judge  adult  behaviour  and  not  the  
child’s  manners.  The  reader  assumes  that  adults  have  failed  to  secure  a  future  for  
Momo   and   he   does   not   judge   Momo   for   his   poor   attire.   A   child   narrator   allows   the  
reader   to   form   an   opinion   of   the   world,   based   on   the   narrator,   yet   without   judging  
the  narrator.  As  a  consequence,  the  reader  remains  unbiased  and  open  to  the  child  
narrator’s  criticism  and  portrayal  of  the  world,  while  remaining  in  the  position  to  
react  critically.    
Jane   McKee   comments   that   ‘love,   too,   plays   an   important   part   in   Gary’s  
fiction,   and,   in   keeping   with   the   romantic   tradition,   it   is   a   perfect   love,   bringing  
warmth   and   comfort   and   free   from   all   the   humdrum   problems   which   beset   human  
relationships   in   ordinary   life’   (JMK   60).   Of   course,   on   the   one   hand,   Jane   McKee   is  
right,   when   she   identifies   the   love   between   Madame   Rosa   and   Momo   as   an  
innocent   and   unconditionally   loyal   connection   that   lasts   until   death   sets   in.   Yet,   on  
the   other   hand,   ‘the   warmth   and   comfort’   that   Jane   McKee   perceives   in   the   novel’s  
relationships  is  at  times  also  the  character’s  illusion  or  wishful  thinking.  Momo  is  a  
child  and  he  craves,  of  course,  unconditional  love.  Thus,  it  is  understandable  that  
there   must   be   a   dimension   of   unconditional   love   present   in   the   book,   because   that  
feeling  is  what  the  characters  are  looking  for.  
On  the  other  hand,  we  can  ask  the  question  to  what  extent  Madame  Rosa  is  
capable   of   feeling   ‘perfect   love.’   Madame   Rosa   is   an   ex-­‐prostitute   with   no   deeper  

 110  
 

social   connections   and   no   remaining   family.   People   all   her   life   have   trampled  
Momo’s  caretaker.  Her  sexual  relations  were  commonly  devoid  of  love,  since  they  
were   based   on   business   and   she   has   never   managed   to   form   any   deeper   human  
relations.  Thus,  it  is  debatable  to  what  extent  Madame  Rosa  is  capable  of  forming  a  
deep   inter   human   connection   with   Momo,   when   she   has   never   experienced   or  
learned  how  to  react  to  other  people  without  being  on  guard.  
Consequently,   one   can   say   that   the   characters   and   the   reader   idealize   the  
relationship   between   Momo   and   Madame   Rosa,   when   they   identify   their   bond   as  
‘perfect.’  Viewing  the  relation  between  adult  and  child  as  an  opportunistic  contract  
would   offer   a   bleak   outlook   on   the   world,   but   would   sound   more   plausible,   as   a  
conclusion   to   the   foregoing   analysis   of   their   union.   One   could   say   that   the  
relationship  between  Madame  Rosa  and  Momo  is  not  one  founded  on  human  love  
and   a   necessity   for   warmth,   but   that   it   is   an   alliance   created   out   of   fear;   the   fear   of  
facing  the  world  alone  and  of  dying  alone.  Both  characters  are  in  need  of  support,  
because   one   person   has   been   exploited   and   both   have   been   rejected   by   society.   So  
both  characters  hold  on  to  each  other  and  develop  the  illusion  that  they  bring  each  
other  comfort  and  warmth.  
Moreover,  the  relationship  between  Momo  and  Madame  Rosa  is  tainted  by  
social   and   financial   problems.   It   may   be   true   that   Madame   Rosa   and   Momo’s  
problems   are   different   to   that   of   a   regular   ‘couple,’   yet   they   do   have   problems,  
which  they  would  not  have  as  individual  people.  Of  course,  this  diagnosis  sounds  
negative   at   first,   but   it   also   illustrates   that   there   is   some   sort   of   love   between  
Momo   and   Madame   Rosa,   which   makes   them   stay   together,   although   they   could  
steer  clear  of  certain  hardship,  by  going  their  separate  ways,  like  Momo,  who  could  
escape  the  encounter  with  death,  if  he  left  Madame  Rosa.  
Since   Momo   is   a   child,   he   allows   Madame   Rosa   to   act   out   of   pure   love,  
because   he   cannot   offer   her   anything:   the   child   cannot   pay   Madame   Rosa   any  
money,   nor   can   he   protect   her   from   any   harm.   Seen   from   that   point   of   view,   the  
relationship   between   the   two   characters   is   that   of   pure   affection,   because   they  
allow   each   other   to   be,   who   they   are,   without   asking   questions   or   without  
demanding  anything.  The  relationship  between  Momo  and  Madame  Rosa  expands  
even   to   that   extent   that   Momo   completely   identifies   himself   with   his   former  
caretaker:   ‘[I   ]was   cold   during   the   night.   I   got   up   and   put   another   blanket   over  

  111  
 

[her]’   (RG   163).   Now,   Momo   has   taken   up   the   position   of   caretaker.   Earlier   on,   we  
have   argued   that   Momo   has   nothing   to   offer   Madame   Rosa,   but   this   scene  
illustrates   that   Momo   has   to   offer   his   full   dedication   to   and   investment   in   a  
relationship.   This   attitude   stands   in   contrast   to   our   current   materialistic   21st  
century  stance.  
Moreover,  the  role  reversal  between  Madame  Rosa  and  Momo  only  works,  
because  Momo  is  a  child.  If  Momo  were  an  adult  narrator  the  full  affectionate  effect  
of  one  person  caring  for  another  would  be  lost,  because  we  expect  adults  to  look  
after  each  other  in  times  of  illness,  but  we  assume  that  children  despair  in  such  a  
situation   and   do   not   know   how   to   react.   Of   course,   this   assumption   is   a  
generalization,  but  the  point  I  want  to  make  is  that  a  child,  who  merges  his  identity  
to  such  an  extent  with  a  grown  up  that  he  feels  the  need  to  cover   her  when  he  feels  
cold,  appeals  more  to  the  reader’s  sentiment,  than  an  adult  carrying  out  the  same  
action.  
Momo   appeals   to   the   reader’s   common   sense   and   shows   that   the   obvious  
and   plain   is   at   times   the   only   route   to   pursue:   ‘Madame   Rosa’s   absences   were  
getting  longer  and  longer,  and  sometimes  she  didn’t  feel  anything  for  hours  on  end.  
[…]  I’d  sit  on  the  stool  beside  her,  take  her  hand,  and  wait  for  her  to  come  back’  (RG  
98).   As   I   have   argued   earlier   on,   children   do   not   feel   the   need   to   act   according   to  

social  conventions,  because  they  have  no  reference  point  to  compare  to.  If  children  
have  a  well-­‐developed  opinion  of  what  is  ethically  and  socially  acceptable,  within  
their  cultural  context,  then  the  child’s  level  of  consciousness  has  been  fostered  by  
adult  teaching  or  role  model  behaviour.  In  Momo’s  case,  the  child  had  to  develop  
his  own  ethical  standards,  based  on  natural  intuition  and  on  personal  experience.  
Momo’s   age   and   his   social   situation   prevent   him   from   seeking   medical   help   that  
would   maybe   be   superfluous,   since   in   vain,   anyway.   Thus,   by   putting   a   child  
narrator   at   the   centre   of   his   novel,   Romain   Gary   manages   to   bring   his   story   to   a  
standstill,  because  the  child  character  lacks  the  maturity  and  experience  to  resort  
to   any   action.   The   reader   and   the   characters   get   the   chance   to   pause   for   a   moment  
and   to   assimilate   or   absorb   the   story’s   events.   The   plain   and   fanciless   is  
highlighted,   as   the   most   effective   remedy.   The   social   and   financial   security   that  
people  strive  to  attain  does  not  necessarily  lead  to  genuine  human  understanding,  
emotional  maturity,  and  security.  Children  as  young  as  ten,  like  Momo,  learn  how  

 112  
 

to   form   stable   and   mature   relationships   independently   of   age   and   social  


background.   In   the   end,   it   is   not   Social   Welfare   or   money   that   secures   Madame  
Rosa’s   future,   but   her   genuine   care   for   a   new   generation   and   for   those   children  
that  are  generally  rejected  by  society.  
Finally,  the  role  reversal  of  adult  and  child,  also  illustrates  the  idea  that  the  
reader’s   assumptions   are   just   general   ideas   that   we   have   in   mind   and   that   the  
ability  to  take  care  of  a  person  or  to  act  like  an  adult,  does  not  necessarily  depend  
on   age,   but   on   individual   understanding   and   on   the   personal   desire   to   care   for  
someone  else.  In  Momo’s  situation,  notions  like  ‘time’  and  ‘age’  become  irrelevant.  
The   narrator’s   age   only   plays   a   role   for   the   reader,   because   that   fact   alters   the  
reader’s   perception   of   the   world   and   his   attitude   towards   children   and   people’s  
behaviour   in   general.   However,   for   Madame   Rosa   it   is   irrelevant   if   a   child   or   an  
adult  is  looking  after  her.  What  matters  to  her  is  the  fact  that  somebody  is  taking  
care   of   her   at   all   and   that   a   person   is   close   to   her,   because   she   finds   herself   in   a  
daunting   and   degrading   situation,   where   one   wants   to   be   surrounded   by   people,  
whom  one  can  trust:  ‘I  ran  and  kissed  her.  She  didn’t  smell  good  because  she’d  shat  
and  pissed  in  her  pants  by  reason  of  her  condition.  I  kissed  her  even  more  because  
I  didn’t  want  her  to  think  she  disgusted  me’  (RG  150).  Momo  allows  Madame  Rosa  to  
be   as   she   is.   The   real   innocent   love   that   Momo   displays   ignores   the   unpleasant  
reality  that  has  invaded  their  home.  The  role  reversal  that  has  taken  place,  where  
the   child   cares   for   the   adult   does   not   take   place,   because   nature   has   intended  
Momo   to   care   for   Madame   Rosa   or   because   someone   has   asked   the   child   to   look  
after   the   adult,   like   a   grown-­‐up,   but   it   is   the   unusual   condition   and   the   unusual  
circumstances  Momo  grew  up  in,  which  render  Momo  apt  as  a  caretaker.  
Additionally,   a   child   narrator   reminds   the   reader   of   the   fact   that   life   is  
composed   of   different   stages   that   are   interlinked.   The   whole   of   life   is   in   fact   a  
coherent   cycle   and   people   in   advanced   age   are   a   lot   like   they   were   as   children:  
‘After  they  left,  Moïse  and  me  undressed  Madame  Rosa  from  top  to  toe  and  cleaned  
her   up   with   Clorox,   because   she’d   soiled   herself   during   her   absence.   Then   we  
powdered  her  ass  with  baby  powder  and  put  her  back  in  her  armchair,  where  she  
liked  to  reign’   (RG   118).  The  story  constantly  comes  back  to  the  ideas  of  birth  and  
death,  which  are  closely  interlinked  in  the  story.  In  order  to  be  able  to  talk  about  
birth,  the  writer  was  clever  to  include  a  child.  Talking  about  birth  and  looking  for  

  113  
 

one’s   date   of   birth   makes   more   sense   in   relation   to   a   child.   An   adult,   who   has  
succeeded   in   constructing   a   personally   balanced   life   style,   is   not   defined   by   his  
origin   anymore.   An   adult   can   construct   and   justify   his   identity   in   relation   to   his  
social   network   of   friends   and   partners,   to   his   education   and   work   or   to   his  
religious   disposition   or   social   attitude.   A   child   however   does   not   have   many  
parameters  to  fix  his  identity  onto.  Momo  says:    
 
That’s  what  started  me  worrying  about  my  mother.  Everybody  seemed  to  have  one  
but  me.  I  began  getting  stomach  cramps  and  convulsions  to  make  her  come  and  see  
me.  On  the  sidewalk  across  the  street  there  was  a  kid  with  a  ball,  who  told  me  his  
mother   always   came   to   see   him   when   he   had   a   stomach   ache.   I   had   myself   a  
stomach  ache,  but  it  didn’t  get  me  anything.  (RG  4)  
 
The   child   narrator   can   comment   on   his   own   internal   reflections   that   lead   to   the  
actions  that  the  reader  and  the  people  surrounding  him  perceive.  An  adult  narrator  
could   also   observe   the   development   of   a   child,   who   was   separated   from   his  
biological  parents  at  birth.  Yet,  the  focus  on  the  child’s  internal  world  would  be  lost  
in  that  case.  
In  contrast  to  the  relationship  between  Madame  Rosa  and  Momo  stands  the  
relationship   between   Momo’s   parents.   At   the   beginning   of   the   book,   the   reader  
assumes   that   the   identity   of   Momo’s   father   is   unknown,   but   the   father   suddenly  
appears   on   Madame   Rosa’s   doorstep   and   discloses   the   fact   that   he   has   killed   the  
child’s  mother,  who  was  also  a  prostitute:  ‘I  acted  in  a  fit  of  jealousy.  Think  of  it.  Up  
to  twenty  tricks  a  day.  In  the  end  I  got  jealous  and  killed  her.  I  admit  it.  But  I  am  not  
responsible.  I  was  certified  by  the  best  French  doctors.  I  didn’t  remember  a  thing  
afterwards.  I  loved  her  madly.  I  couldn’t  live  without  her’  (RG  124).  Momo  also  loves  
Madame   Rosa   madly,   but   he   does   not   resort   to   killing   her,   but   to   prolonging   her  
life,  beyond  death,  because  Momo  keeps  watch  by  Madame  Rosa’s  side  for  several  
days  after  her  death.  The  child’s  way  of  altering  his  reality  is  more  harmless,  but  
equally   mad.   The   two   scenes   illustrate   that   the   fear   of   losing   a   person   can   lead  
people   of   all   ages   to   resort   to   extraordinary   behaviour.   Momo’s   situation   shows  
that  the  new  generation  and  the  old  generation  are  equally  affected  when  middle-­‐
aged   people   fail   to   organize   their   life   according   to   socially   accepted   conventions  
within  a  certain  cultural  setting.  

 114  
 

Tanner  Tony  originally  analyzed  Huckleberry  Finn’s  situation,  when  he  said  
that  
 
indeed   Huck   is   a   modern   type   of   hero:   a   hero   with   no   power   to   remedy   the  
unbearable   wrongs   he   sees   in   the   world,   a   hero   by   dint   of   his   inner   honesty   and  
the   equality   of   his   impartial   sensitivity   only   -­‐   a   person   who   is   heroic   in   flight.   He   is  
detached  and  lonely  as  all  innocents  are  and  his  allegiance  is  to  an  inner  range  of  
feeling,   but   this   is   not   to   say   that   he   is   fully   immersed   in   the   world   at   large.   (TT  
212)  
 
On   a   first   level,   Momo   is   unable   to   alter   reality,   because   he   is   a   child   and   not   in   the  
leading   position   that   could   allow   him   to   take   substantial   action.   Consequently,   a  
child  narrator  is  a  perfect  fit  for  the  role  of  modern  hero,  as  Tony  Tanner  sees  him,  
because   the   child   can   portray   the   current   human   condition,   without   offering   an  
alleged  miracle  cure.  Momo’s  character  and  situation  is  comparable  to  Huckleberry  
Finn’s  existence.  
Moreover,  Momo  is  also  detached  from  his  roots,  because  he  does  not  know  
anything   about   his   parents   and   he   feels   lonely   in   a   world   that   he   does   not  
understand.  He  tries  to  find  comfort,  by  making  friends  with  a  prostitute,  but  at  the  
same   time,   Momo   needs   to   emotionally   detach   himself   from   Madame   Rosa,   in  
order   to   protect   himself   from   too   much   hurt,   because   the   old   woman   is   about   to  
die.  In  the  end,  the  reader  sees  that  Momo  is  still  a  child  who  cannot  consciously  
make  the  decision  to  create  the  necessary  distance  between  himself  and  Madame  
Rosa,   because   he   remains   with   her   dead   body   in   the   cellar   for   a   week   and   keeps  
watch:  
 
I  spread  some  makeup  on  her  lips  and  cheeks  and  painted  her  eyebrows  the  way  
she  liked.  I  made  her  eyelids  blue  and  white  and  pasted  little  stars  on  them  like  she  
did.   I   tried   to   put   on   false   eyelashes   but   they   wouldn’t   stick.   I   could   see   she’d  
stopped   breathing,   but   it   was   all   the   same   to   me,   I   loved   her   even   without  
breathing.  (RG  178)  
 
Part   of   the   readers   might   argue   that   in   this   passage,   Momo   tries   to   alter   reality,  
because   he   is   blinded   by   love   and   he   does   not   want   to   accept   that   the   most  
important  person  in  his  life  has  died.  In  contrast,  Momo’s  wish  for  Madame  Rosa  to  
continue   living   can   also   be   seen,   as   the   child’s   deep   fear   to   face   the   world   on   his  
own   and   is   maybe   more   driven   by   internal   anxiety,   than   by   a   deeper   emotional  
connection  to  Madame  Rosa.  In  addition,  putting  makeup  on  Madame  Rosa’s  face  
  115  
 

gives  Momo  something  to  occupy  himself  with  and  to  take  his  mind  off  her  death.  
The   layers   of   make-­‐up   help   to   conceal   reality   and   make   it   easier   for   the   child   to  
look  at  the  dead  body.  
Yet,  on  the  other  hand,  Momo  tries  to  ‘embellish’  his  friend  and  to   make  her  
look  the  way  ‘she  liked  it.’  Momo  does  not  arbitrarily  put  colour  on  Madame  Rosa’s  
face,   but   he   tries   to   reproduce   Madame   Rosa’s   reality   and   not   embellish   his   own.  
Seen   from   that   perspective,   Momo’s   love   is   altruistic,   since   he   does   not   benefit  
from  putting  make-­‐up  on  Madame  Rosa’s  face,  because  that  will  not  bring  her  back  
to  life  and  it  will  not  secure  Momo’s  future,  in  any  way.  The  child  keeping  watch,  by  
the  dead  woman’s  body,  reminds  the  reader  indeed  of  ‘romantic  love’  and  appeals  
to   the   reader’s   sympathy.   The   reader   is   observing   the   intimate   moment,   when   a  
child   is   confronted   with   the   death   of   a   beloved   one,   for   the   first   time,   and   is  
struggling   to   come   to   terms   with   death’s   mercilessness.   In   that   respect,   the   reader  
can   also   understand   the   scene   as   overtly   romantic,   like   Jane   McKee   has   argued  
earlier   on.   It   depends   on   the   reader’s   attitude   to   romanticism   and   to   kitsch,   to  
which   extent   he   allows   sentimental   scenes   to   be   part   of   a   novel,   without  
condemning  the  whole  text  as  an  overtly  emotional  tearjerker.  
In   relation   to   child   narrators,   the   final   scene   between   Momo   and   Madame  
Rosa   only   works   to   perfection   between   a   child   and   an   adult.   If   an   adult   narrator  
would  tamper  with  a  dead  person’s  body,  the  reader  would  feel  embarrassed  and  
the   passage   would   allude   to   necrophilia   or   sexually   deviant   actions.   How   people  
define  love  and  which  forces  motivate  people  to  remain  together  depends  on  each  
individual.   Yet,   which   becomes   clear   in   the   relationship   between   Momo   and  
Madame   Rosa   is   the   idea   that   the   novel’s   core   relationship   setting   can   only  
function  with  the  cast  of  a  child  narrator.  If  Madame  Rosa  had  been  living  with  an  
adult,   the   innocence   would   have   been   removed   from   the   relationship   and   Madame  
Rosa’s  past  sexuality  would  have  moved  into  the  foreground,  because  an  intimate  
relationship  between  two  adults  evokes  images  of  sexual  involvement.  Even  if  the  
characters  would  affirm  their  platonic  friendship,  the  reader  would  still  associate  
two   adults   living   together   with   the   idea   of   a   shared   sexuality,   especially   if   one   of  
the   two   had   formerly   worked   as   a   prostitute.   Of   course,   interpreting   adult  
interaction   with   a   dead   corpse   as   sexually   deviant,   while   allowing   the   child   the  
freedom  to  come  to  terms  with  death,  in  his  own  manner  and  time,  is  a  personal  

 116  
 

interpretation   and   varies   from   one   reader   to   another.   Additionally,   the   reader’s  
interpretation   also   depends   on   his   culture   and   social   background.   Thus,   the   device  
of  the  child  narrator  might  function  well  as  transmitter  of  a  message  in  one  culture,  
while  another  culture  might  reject  the  idea  of  a  child  closely  interacting  with  death.  
The   reader’s   reaction   to   Momo   and   Madame   Rosa’s   relationship   beyond  
death   also   reveals   the   reader’s   cultural   setting   and   his   social   attitude   towards  
death  and  of  how  to  deal  with  illness  and  bereavement:  
 
Then   she   didn’t   say   anything   at   all,   just   sat   there   looking   empty   at   the   wall   and  
shitting  and  pissing  in  her  chair.  
There’s  something  I’ve  got  to  tell  you.  Such  things  shouldn’t  be.  That’s  my  honest  
opinion.  I’ll  never  understand  why  abortion  is  only  allowed  for  the  young  and  not  
for   the   old.   In   my   opinion   the   guy   in   America   who   beat   the   world’s   vegetable  
record  was  worse  than  Jesus,  because  he  stayed  on  the  cross  for  seventeen  years  
and  then  some.  In  my  opinion,  there  is  nothing  crummier  than  ramming  life  down  
the  throats  of  defenceless  people  who’ve  had  enough.  (RG  175)  
 
On   the   one   hand,   Momo’s   previous   comments   about   prostitution   and   now   his  
comments   about   euthanasia   sound   inoffensive   to   the   reader,   because   Momo’s  
comments   are   just   that:   comments.   Momo   talks   in   a   very   factual   way   about  
prostitution   and   euthanasia   and   the   reader   buys   into   the   child’s   non-­‐judgmental  
description  of  his  environment.  The  author  manages  to  create  this  effect,  because  
Momo  is  a  child.  Although  Momo  grows  up  in  a  milieu  nerved  with  sexual  deviance  
and   daily   hardship,   he   still   has   limited   access   to   the   complete   truth   and   reality  
behind   the   scenes.   Momo   explains   what   he   sees   and   hears,   but   he   lacks   the  
understanding  of  the  entire  picture,  in  order  to  make  full  sense  of  his  experiences.  
Momo  is  unaware  of  the  political  debate  related  to  euthanasia  and  of  the  question  
at  what  point  a  person’s  life-­‐sustaining  machines  can  be  switched  off.  Yet,  there  is  
an  undeniable  truth  in  the  child’s  words.  Although  the  reader  is  aware  that  there  is  
actually  an  adult  author  at  the  source  of  Momo’s  words,  the  reader  still  accepts  the  
words  as  those  of  a  child,  because  Momo  is  not  debating  or  pondering  the  question  
or   referring   to   political   correctness,   like   adults   commonly   do,   but   the   child  
narrator   in   this   case   is   just   plainly   stating   his   truth   and   expects   his   readers   to  
accept  his  reality  and  outlook  on  the  world.  
In   contrast,   we   have   earlier   on   said   that   Momo   points   out   social  
shortcomings   in   a   very   factual   way.   However,   the   effect   that   is   created   in   the  
reader  is  one  of  shock,  because  the  child  character  uses  very  strong  language  to  get  
  117  
 

his  point  across.  Romain  Gary  puts  words  and  expressions  like  ‘shitting,’  ‘pissing,’  
and   ‘ramming   life   down   the   throat   of   a   person,’   in   his   narrator’s   mouth.   As   a  
consequence,   it   is   not   the   child’s   talent   for   debate   nor   his   logical   argumentation  
that   convince   the   reader   of   the   narrator’s   firm   point   of   view,   but   the   crude  
language  that  we  do  not  usually  associate  with  a  child’s  world,  but  that  accurately  
mirrors   the   barbaric   conditions   that   the   narrator   is   addressing   in   his   speech.  
Romain   Gary   employs   his   child   narrator   as   a   tool   that   is   meant   to   disclose   social  
questions,  but  that  allows  the  author  to  retain  any  judgment  that  could  influence  
the   reader’s   own   thinking.   When   a   story   is   narrated   by   a   child,   the   reader   is   urged  
to   make   up   his   own   mind   and   to   ponder   the   accuracy   of   the   child’s   statement  
within  his  own  current  social,  ethical  and  ethnical  context.  
In  addition  to  the  love  between  Momo  and  Madame  Rosa,  there  is  Momo’s  
affection  for  his  dog:  
 
when  I  took  him  out  walking,  I  felt  important,  because  I  was  all  he  had  in  the  world.  
I   loved   him   so   much   that   I   finally   gave   him   away.   I   was   nine   by   then,   or  
thereabouts,   and   at   that   age   you   begin   to   think,   except   maybe   if   you   are   happy.  
Besides,   between   you   and   me,   without   wanting   to   hurt   anybody’s   feelings,   it   was  
gloomy  at  Madame  Rosa’s,  even  when  you  were  used  to  it.  So  when  Super  started  
growing  on  me,  emotionally   speaking,  I  decided  to  give  him  a  better  life.  I’d  have  
done  the  same  for  myself  if  I’d  been  able.  (RG  13)  
 
This   scene   also   just   functions,   because   Momo   is   a   child   character   and   narrator,  
because   this   scene   clearly   illustrates   to   which   extent   the   child   assumes   mature  
thinking,   in   contrast   to   the   adult,   who   remains   egoistic   and   possessive.   Momo  
identifies   the   dog’s   miserable   living   conditions   and   gives   him   away,   because   he  
‘loves   him   so   much.’   Momo   achieves,   what   Madame   Rosa   is   incapable   of,   namely  
separating  her  own  fear  from  Momo’s  life  and  ‘setting  him  free,’  in  order  to  lead  a  
happier,  more  untroubled  life.  If  Momo  were  an  adult,  he  could  ‘set  himself  free,’  by  
just  walking  out  on  Madame  Rosa,  but  the  fact  that  he  is  a  child  binds  him  to  his  
environment   to   a   certain   extent.   Of   course,   there   are   also   adults,   who   remain  
frozen  and  stuck  in  their  daily  routine,  although  they  feel  miserable.  Yet,  it  is  easier  
for   an   adult   to   fend   for   himself,   than   for   a   child.   Especially,   because   a   child   is   more  
emotionally   attached   to   the   people   that   have   shaped   his   early   years   and   thus,   it  
becomes  a  challenge  for  a  child  to  walk  out  on  his  educator.  

 118  
 

Additionally,   there   is   Momo’s   relation   to   an   umbrella   he   calls   Arthur:   ‘I  


couldn’t  give  him  up  over  night  in  spite  of  the  four  years  I’d  suddenly  put  on.  Other  
people  take  a  lot  longer  to  put  on  four  years,  and  I  wasn’t  going  to  let  anyone  hurry  
me’  (RG  162).  One  cannot  really  say  that  there  is  ‘love’  between  Momo  and  an  object.  
Yet,  the  umbrella  embodies  Momo’s  childhood  and  it  is  the  love  for  his  youth  that  
makes  Momo  cling  to  that  object  that  he  constantly  carries  around  with  him.  On  a  
first  level,  the  reader  can  interpret  Momo,  who  is  hanging  on  to  his  umbrella,  as  a  
metaphor  for  nowadays’  youth,  who  has  to  give  up  on  their  childhood  all  too  early,  
because   of   social   circumstances   or   because   of   the   confrontation   with   advanced  
media.  It  makes  sense  that  a  child  narrator  draws  attention  to  the  children’s  need  
to  stay  in  a  fantasy  world  of  their  own,  until  they  naturally  and  gradually  develop  
into   mature   adults.   Momo   highlights   that   it   is   not   people’s   age   that   defines   their  
desire   to   take   their   own   decisions   and   to   look   after   themselves,   but   that   outer  
circumstances  direct  people’s  psychological  and  emotional  development:  ‘”Tell  me,  
Doctor,   are   you   sure   I’m   fourteen?   Are   you   sure   I’m   not   twenty   or   thirty   or   even  
more?  First  the  story  is  ten,  then  fourteen.  Couldn’t  I  be  a  midget,  damn  it  all?’   (RG  
158).   This   paragraph   illustrates   that   the   attitudes   of   the   people   surrounding   Momo  

define   who   he   is.   On   the   one   hand,   Momo   has   to   act   like   and   adult,   because   he  
grows  up  in  a  little  inviting  environment:  ‘I’m  not  a  child  in  the  first  place.  I’m  the  
son  of  a  whore  and  my  father  killed  my  mother.  When  a  kid  knows  that,  he  knows  
everything   there   is   to   know   and   he’s   not   a   child   anymore’   (RG   156).   Of   course,   in  
that  respect,  the  question  arises  if  knowledge  can  make  a  child  more  mature,  or  if  a  
child  remains  in  a  minor’s  frame  of  mind  for  the  time  being.,  until  he  can  process  
the  new  information.  Here  we  can  say  that  knowledge  or  orally  transmitted  facts  
themselves  do  not  change  a  child’s  level  of  maturity.  However,  information  like  the  
social  history  of  Momo’s  parents  lead  to  and  are  linked  to  a  different  social  setting,  
which  the  child  is  propelled  into.  This  change  in  atmosphere  and  setting  alter  the  
child’s  level  of  development  and  maturity  and  not  knowledge  itself.  
On  the  other  hand,  Madame  Rosa  tells  Momo  that  he  is  four  years  younger  
than  he  actually  is,  in  order  to  keep  him  by  her  side.  The  reader  understands  that  
treating   people   like   children   manipulates   them   to   such   an   extent   that   they   become  
dependant   of   other   people’s   support.   The   age   you   feel   is   always   conditioned,   by  
what   you   are   told   to   act   like   and   by   what   other   people   expect   you   to   act   like.   In  

  119  
 

Momo’s  case,  the  people  surrounding  him  treat  him  alternately  as  a  child  or  as  an  
adult,  depending  on  their  needs  and  on  their  personal  demands.  Thus,  Momo  clings  
to  Arthur  his  umbrella  and  similarly  to  his  childhood,  because  growing  up  would  
also  mean  deciding  on  an  identity  of  his  own,  which  he  has  not  had  the  chance  to  
construct   so   far,   because   his   caretakers   have   alternately   altered   his   identity,   in  
order  to  satisfy  their  needs.  
On  the  one  hand,  the  reader  wonders,  why  Momo  clings  to  his  childhood  to  
such   a   degree,   because   his   youth   is   certainly   not   desirable   in   many   aspects.   On   the  
other  hand,  Momo  currently  has  a  place  to  live  and  a  person  he  belongs  to.  If  Momo  
were  an  adult,  he  would  need  to  fend  for  himself.  He  does  not  have  any  education,  
nor   does   he   know,   which   direction   to   pursue   in   life.   It   might   be   a   generalization,  
but   children   tend   to   orientate   their   lives,   in   relation   to   their   parents,   or   to   the  
broader  circle  of  the  grown-­‐ups  surrounding  them.  Either  children  want  to  be  like  
their   role   models   or   they   intend   to   walk   in   a   completely   opposite   direction.   In  
Momo’s   case,   the   child   cannot   adopt   the   same   lifestyle,   as   his   foster   mother.   Yet  
attempting  to  get  an  education  or  to  start  an  apprenticeship  is  a  scary  thought  for  
Momo,  too,  because  he  has  nobody  in  his  immediate  surroundings,  who  has  taken  
up   that   path   and   whom   he   could   aspire   to.   Consequently,   it   is   understandable   that  
Momo  hesitates  to  grow  up.  
Moreover,  the  fact  that  Momo  is  still  a  child  allows  him  to  attract  people  and  
primarily,   Madame   Rosa’s   attention.   If   Momo   accepts   the   fact   that   he   is   actually  
older   than   he   thought   he   was,   he   also   accepts   the   loss   of   Madame   Rosa’s   care.  
Momo’s  love  for  his  childhood  reflects,  at  the  same  time,  his  affection  for  Madame  
Rosa:   ‘I   can   assure   you   that   some   whores   are   the   best   of   mothers,   because   it’s   a  
change  from  their  customers  and  besides  a  kid  gives  them  a  future.  Of  course  there  
are   some   that   drop   out   of   sight   and   you   never   hear   of   them   again,   but   that   doesn’t  
mean   they’re   not   dead   or   haven’t   got   some   other   excuse’   (RG   30).   Vice-­‐versa,  
Madame   Rosa   has   not   disclosed   Momo’s   real   age   to   the   child,   because   children  
‘give  their  parents  a  future,’  as  Momo  accurately  observes.  Although  Momo  is  not  
Madame   Rosa’s   biological   child,   he   still   secures   the   woman’s   future,   because   he  
looks   after   her   until   her   death.   In   a   way,   this   scenario   is   only   possible,   because  
Momo  is  still  a  child,  or  because  Momo  believes  that  he  is  younger,  than  he  actually  
is   and   consequently,   does   not   want   to   leave   ‘home’   yet.   If   Momo   were   an   adult  

 120  
 

narrator,  then  he  would  comment  on  Madame  Rosa’s  physical  and  mental  decline,  
but   he   would   be   more   physically   and   emotionally   detached.   An   adult   narrator  
would  react  in  a  more  factual,  practically  oriented  way  and  would  not  colour  the  
story  in  such  a  romantically  caring  way.  
In  contrast,  one  could  also  argue  that  an  adult  narrator  could  even  look  at  
his   childhood   in   a   more   nostalgic   way,   than   a   child   narrator,   who   examines   his  
immediate   and   current   situation,   because   looking   back   at   the   past   commonly  
induces  people  to  embellish  their  memories.  
Finally,   Momo   says:   ‘people   need   millions   and   millions   to   feel   concerned,  
and  you  can’t  blame  them,  because  little  things  don’t  amount  to  much’  (RG  146).  Yet,  
by   putting   a   child   narrator   at   the   centre   of   his   novel,   Romain   Gary   manages   to  
show  that  ‘little  things’  do  amount  to  much,  because  Momo  achieves  to  reach  and  
illicit  the  thinking  process  of  a  large  amount  of  readers.  Even  if  we  are  critical  and  
point  out  that  Momo  is  the  author’s  construct  and  that  it  is  not  really  a  child,  who  
reaches  the  audience,  but  an  adult,  then  we  can  still  say  that  it  is  one  single  person  
that   reaches   a   larger   amount   of   people   and   consequently,   ‘little   things   still   amount  
to  much.’    
In   conclusion,   Momo’s   narrative   is   on   the   one   hand,   an   apprenticeship  
novel,  because  the  novel  
 
recounts  the  childhood  and  young  adulthood  of  a  character  in  order  to  show  how  
he   or   she   develops   and   changes   through   experience   and   spiritual   crisis.   It  
emphasizes  the  importance  of  early  years  upon  later  choices  and  behavior,  and  the  
gradual  elaboration  of  a  philosophy  of  life.43  
 
Françoise   Grellet   highlights   that   ‘such   novels   usually   end   when   heroes   have  
reached   a   sense   of   identity   and   a   clearer   understanding   of   their   own   values   and  
purposes’   (FG   126).   Of   course,   Momo   grows   because   of   his   experiences   and   he  
survives   Madame   Rosa’s   death.   Since   Momo   has   access   to   all   kinds   of   narcotic  
substances,  the  child  could  just  as  well  have  killed  himself,  by  taking  an  overdose  
of   drugs   or   alcohol,   because   he   cannot   cope   with   the   emotional   pressure   he   is  
exposed   to   and   because   he   has   no   other   person   to   turn   to   after   Madame   Rosa’s  
death.   So   in   a   way,   we   can   say   that   Momo   has   overcome   his   ‘spiritual   crisis’   and  

                                                                                                               
43  Grellet,  Françoise.  Literature  in  English:  Anthologie  des  Littératures  du  Monde  Anglophone.  Paris:  

Hachette  Supérieur.  2002,  126  –  Further  references  are  included  in  the  text  (FG).  
  121  
 

that   the   experiences   he   had   to   go   through   have   helped   the   child   to   grow   into   an  
adult,   whose   experiences   have   rendered   him   more   resilient   towards   the   world’s  
challenges.  
Yet,   the   novel   ends   with   Madame   Rosa’s   death   and   the   reader   remains   in  
the   dark   about   Momo’s   future.   Françoise   Grellet   argues   that   at   the   end   of   an  
apprenticeship   novel,   the   hero   has   reached   ‘a   sense   of   identity   and   a   clearer  
understanding  of  his  own  values  and  purposes.’  Yet,  in  Momo’s  case,  the  child  had  
to   suffer   from   such   a   traumatic   loss   and   has   been   abandoned   by   his   parents   and  
then  by  Madame  Rosa.  Although  Momo’s  foster  mother  has  died  a  natural  death,  to  
Momo  her  death  still  embodies  a  personal  loss.  Consequently,  the  reader  is  left  to  
wonder   whether   the   child   does   not   feel   like   unworthy   of   stable   attention   and  
consistent   adult   devotion   and   whether   he   will   ever   develop   a   ‘sense   of   identity,’  
because  people  have  lied  to  him  about  his  self  all  his  life.  
The   title   The   Life   Before   Us,   reminds   the   reader   of   our   lives   that   lie   ahead   of  
us.   Every   day   is   a   new   beginning,   yet   the   question   remains   whether   every   day   is  
influenced  and  already  tainted  by  previous  experiences.  Jane  McKee  sums  up  that  
 
in   the   midst   of   all   this   diversity,   however,   there   is   a   fundamental   unity,   provided  
on  the  one  hand  by  a  permanent  concern  with  the  problems  of  mankind  and  with  
the   human   situation   in   general   and   on   the   other   by   a   creative   imagination  
dominated   by   a   love   of   what   is   strange,   colourful,   beautiful,   grotesque   or   in   any  
way  unusual  or  outstanding.  (JMK  60)  
 
Momo’s   narrative   illustrates   that   the   past   makes   up   part   of   the   future,   but   that  
one’s  actions  can  alter  the  course  of  events,  on  a  daily  basis;  subtly  but  effectively.  
The   reader   observes   Momo   and   his   choices   and   we   see   how   his   life   develops,   by  
Madame   Rosa’s   side,   and   at   certain   points,   the   reader   feels   the   urge   to   advise  
Momo  to  get  adult  help  and  to  spare  himself  the  encounter  with  death.  Yet,  on  the  
other  hand,  the  reader  is  silenced,  because  he  cannot  interfere  and  the  reader  has  
to   acknowledge   that   Momo’s   life   and   character   would   not   be   what   they   are,   if  
Momo’s   life   had   been   directed   by   other   people   or   by   different   adults.   The   child’s  
narrative  achieves  to  convey  the  message  that  young  lives  can  be  lived  with  limited  
adult   influence   and   that   the   outcome   is   each   time   unique   and   sufficient   in   itself.  
The   fact   that   Momo   is   a   child   narrator   creates   a   level   of   suspense   that   expands  
beyond   the   story   itself,   because   there   is   Momo’s   whole   life,   which   is   still   waiting  

 122  
 

for  him,  after  the  story  in  the  novel  has  already  ended,  so  that  the  reader  is  left  to  
wonder,  what  will  happen  of  Momo  in  later  years  to  come.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

  123  
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 124  
 

4.2.  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  by  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  
The   21st   century   novel   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close   was   written   by   the   young  
American  author  Jonathan  Safran  Foer.  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close  stands  in  
contrast   to   The   Life   Before   Us,   because   the   two   novels   stem   from   authors   with  
different   social,   ethical   and   cultural   background.   Consequently,   the   reader   might  
think   that   the   two   texts   differ   greatly,   in   terms   of   their   content   and   in   terms   of   the  
way   their   content   is   presented.   Yet,   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   and   Romain   Gary   have  
both   chosen   to   put   a   child   narrator   at   the   centre   of   their   novels.   It   is  
understandable  that  an  author  like  Romain  Gary  wanted  to  put  a  child  at  the  centre  
of  his  narrative,  because  it  was  the  author’s  intention  to  voice  social  criticism.  The  
figure   of   the   child   narrator   has   allowed   Romain   Gary   to   highlight   the   social  
shortcomings   of   his   time   and   social   context,   while   creating   a   certain   amount   of  
distance   between   himself   and   his   character’s   ideas.   If   Romain   Gary   had   put   an  
adult   narrator   at   the   centre   of   his   novel,   then   critics   could   have   made   a   much  
tighter  link  between  himself  and  the  fictional  text.  Of  course,  there  is  no  doubt  that  
the  author  always  remains  the  source  of  the  text  that  he  produces,  yet,  the  way  in  
which  an  author  presents  his  text  renders  the  author’s  voice  either  more  palpable  
or   more   subtle   for   the   reader,   depending   on   the   tool   that   the   author   chooses,   in  
order  to  propagate  his  message.  
In   the   foregoing   discussions,   we   have   established   the   numerous   literary  
advantages   that   a   child   narrator   can   contribute,   in   order   to   render   a   novel   a  
success.   Additionally,   we   have   also   highlighted,   why   an   author   like   Romain   Gary  
would  resort  to  employing  a  child  narrator.  However,  why  would  Jonathan  Safran  
Foer   want   to   use   a   child   character   as   the   transmitter   of   his   novel’s   message?  
Although   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   lives   and   works   in   a   different   social   and   cultural  
setting,   than   Romain   Gary,   could   it   still   be   the   case   that   the   young   author   wants   to  
distance   his   character   from   his   own   persona,   in   order   to   voice   social   criticism  
more   freely?   After   all,   Jonathan   Safran   Foer’s   novel   concentrates   on   the   terrorist  
attacks  of  9/11  and  discusses  a  delicate  topic.  
Moreover,   at   the   beginning   of   the   thesis   at   hand   we   have   argued   that  
children   had   to   die   in   real   life,   in   order   to   find   a   literary   voice.   However,   since  
Jonathan  Safran  Foer  is  an  author  of  our  modern  times,  the  reader  might  wonder  
to   what   extent   an   author   still   needs   to   grant   children   a   voice   nowadays,   since  
  125  
 

Jonathan   Safran   Foer   lives   in   a   society   that   directs   psychological,   political   and  
educational   attention   on   children   anyway.   Yet,   in   contrast,   literature   to   a   great  
extent   mirrors   the   reality   of   the   time   in   which   the   text   was   produced.  
Consequently,   it   is   logical   that   a   young   modern   author   picks   up   on   his   current  
society’s   need   to   discuss   the   child’s   status   and   to   point   out   the   most   beneficial  
support  for  young  people.  
Yet,  when  I  was  doing  research  and  looking  for  clues  that  could  help  me  to  
answer   the   question,   why   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   has   chosen   a   child   narrator   for   his  
novel,  I  came  across  answers  for  an  interview  that  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  has  given  
a  journalist  for  the  newspaper  Mother  Jones.  In  this  interview,  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  
gives  clear  reasons,  why  he  tells  his  story  in  a  child’s  voice.  The  author’s  reasons  
contradict   all   of   my   previous   guesses,   but   the   novel’s   success   shows   that   the  
author’s  motives  were  founded  on  good  judgement:  
 
Mother  Jones  (MJ):  Did  you  feel  like  you  were  taking  a  risk  dealing  with  9/11  in  
Extremely  Loud?  
 
Jonathan  Safran  Foer  (JSF):  Actually,  I  think  it’s  a  greater  risk  not  to  write  about  
it.   If   you’re   in   my   position—a   New   Yorker   who   felt   the   event   very   deeply   and   a  
writer  who  wants  to  write  about  things  he  feels  deeply  about—I  think  it’s  risky  to  
avoid   what’s   right   in   front   of   you.   None   of   the   ways   people   were   talking   about  
September  11  felt  right  to  me.  I  don’t  buy  into  the  way  Bush  talks  about  it.  I  don’t  
buy   into   the   way   the   9/11   commission   talks   about   it.   It   isn’t   that   I   don’t   believe  
them.  It’s  just  that  they’re  not  the  tellings  for  me.44  
 
Politicians   and   people   in   charge   of   controlling   the   situation   have   another  
perspective  on  the  events  of  9/11,  than  the  common  citizen,  who  had  to  bare  the  
impact  of  the  attack  on  a  different  level.  Adults,  who  are  not  in  a  position  to  find  a  
solution  against  terrorist  attacks  or  to  prevent  future  attacks,  can  still  go  out  and  
work  as  immediate  helpers  on  the  affected  territory.  According  to  Craig  Beyerlein,  
‘expressing   solidarity   with   victims   through   volunteering   […]   helped   to   create   a  
meaningful  collective  identity  that  generated  emotional  energy  for  taking  action.’45  
Children,  however,  are  removed  from  the  situation  and  it  seems  that  children  are  
forgotten  during  the  time  it  takes  for  life  to  take  up  its  routine  again.  Of  course,  this  

                                                                                                               
44  Wolf  Schenk,  Joshua.  “Jonathan  Safran  Foer:  Living  to  Tell  the  Tale.”  Motherjones.com:  

http://motherjones.com/media/2005/05/jonathan-­‐safran-­‐foer  -­‐  Further  references  are  included  


in  the  text  (JWS).  
45  Beyerlein,  Craig  and  David  Sikkink.  “Sorrow  and  Solidarity:  Why  Americans  Volunteered  for  9/11  

Relief  Efforts.”  Social  Problems  55.2  (May  2008):  190-­‐215,  196.  


 126  
 

impression   does   not   hold   true,   because   psychologists   and   parents   attend   to  
children,  when  a  catastrophe  has  taken  place.  Yet,  children  are  removed  from  the  
immediate   focus   of   the   media   and   of   the   parents’   attention,   because   the   adults  
have   to   attend   to   the   needs   of   the   situation   at   large.   Jonathan   Safran   Foer’s   idea   of  
putting  a  child’s  reality  at  the  centre  of  his  novel  reminds  the  reader  of  the  fact  that  
the   grander   political   and   social   scheme   also   affects   the   smallest   members   of  
society,  even  if  that  truth  does  not  constantly  remain  apparent.  
In  contrast,  Laura  Miller  criticizes  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close,  when  
she  says  that:  
 
in  a  novel  about  the  Holocaust,  this  kind  of  oblique,  even  playful,  strategy  worked,  
partly   because   the   subject   has   already   been   so   exhaustively   and   earnestly  
explored.   But   September   11,   that   spectacular   monstrosity   plopped   into   the   middle  
of  an  ordinary  Tuesday  in  downtown  Manhattan,  is  another  matter.  We’re  still  not  
entirely   sure   what   it   signifies,   or   even   if,   philosophically   speaking   (…),   it   might  
signify   nothing   at   all.   It   may   just   be   too   early   to   get   cute   in   writing   about  
September   11;   on   the   other   hand,   there’s   never   a   good   time   to   get   as   cute   as  
Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close  gets.  (LM)  
 
Laura   Miller   deems   the   child’s   voice   too   cute,   in   order   to   narrate   a   novel   with   a  
serious   matter   from   a   child’s   perspective.   The   critic   argues   that   a   shocking   topic  
like  9/11  can  only  be  treated  from  a  child’s  perspective,  when  it  has  already  been  
discussed   under   any   other,   so-­‐called,   serious   or   political   light.   However,   who  
decides   which   approach   to   a   painful   event   helps   people   most   effectively   to   deal  
with   it?   Why   cannot   a   child’s   light-­‐hearted   voice   offer   as   much   relief   and   a   fresh  
outlook  on  grief  as  a  solemn  and  serious  attitude?  People  can  be  very  serious  about  
and  engaged  in  a  social  issue,  while  at  the  same  time  keeping  their  good  humour.  
The  fact  that  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  puts  a  child  at  the  centre  of  his  novel  does  not  
mean   that   the   writer   wants   to   trivialize   the   difficulty   of   9/11,   but   the   author’s   text  
mirrors  his  interest  in  the  events  of  his  time.  
Moreover,   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close   also   highlights   the   universal  
truth   that   people   speak   about   and   deal   with   problems   differently.   At   least,   the  
writer  has  found  a  way  to  express  his  concerns  in  relation  to  the  terrorist  attacks  
in   his   country   and   has   managed   to   render   these   worries   palpable,   while   the  
majority   of   people   have   been   silenced   by   the   impact   of   9/11.   The   child   narrator  
can  also  stand  as  a  metaphor  for  a  small  entity  that  is  repressed.  In  Extremely  Loud  
&  Incredibly  Close,  Oskar  represents  the  United  States  of  America.  Like  Oskar,  who  
  127  
 

has   lost   his   father   and   other   ancestors,   even   before   he   was   born,   the   United   States  
have   lost   many   people   through   wars,   illness,   terrorism   and   the   more.   Oskar  
operates  as  a  minor  scale  reflection  of  the  country  he  lives  in.  
Additionally,   Oskar   Schell   is   taken   as   much   by   surprise,   by   the   attacks   of  
9/11,   as   the   United   States   themselves.   Accordingly,   the   United   States   take   on   a  
powerless  status,  like  a  child.  This  situation  shows  us  that  the  power  of  an  entity  
depends   on   circumstances.   Grown-­‐ups,   even   in   high-­‐ranking   positions,   are   as  
powerless,  when  confronted  with  unknown  situations  as  a  child.    
 
MJ:  How  did  the  idea  for  Oskar  first  come  to  you?  
 
JSF:  My  test  for  writing  is  always,  is  this  fun  or  does  it  feel  like  a  job?  Is  it  moving  
me?  Or  am  I  just  fulfilling  my  own  expectations—or  even  worse,  somebody  else’s?  
I   was   working   on   another   story   and   I   just   started   to   feel   the   drag   of   it.   And   so,   as   a  
side  project,  I  got  interested  in  the  voice  of  this  kid.  I  thought  maybe  it  could  be  a  
story;   maybe   it   would   be   nothing.   I   found   myself   spending   more   and   more   time   on  
it  and  wanting  to  work  on  that.  (JWS)  
 
Jonathan   Safran   Foer   manages   to   make   his   child   narrator   sound   like   an  
independent   person,   with   a   character   of   his   own   and   not   like   a   figure   that   the  
author  has  invented.  I  suppose  that  once  the  writer  has  an  idea  of  his  protagonist  
in   mind,   the   child’s   way   of   expression   comes   about   naturally,   because   the   writer  
has  a  global  idea  in  mind  of  his  figure’s  nature.  Yet,  according  to  Laura  Miller,  
 
Oskar   resembles   nothing   so   much   as   a   plastic   bag   crammed   with   oddities.   For  
every  eccentricity  that  makes  psychological  sense  –  fear  of  public  transportation  or  
an   overly   clinical   interest   in   the   bombing   of   Hiroshima,   for   example   –   there’s  
another   that’s   just   piled   on.   We   never   learn   why   Oskar   insists   on   wearing   only  
white  or  plays  the  tambourine  incessantly.  (LM)  
 
While  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  explains  that  he  has  allowed  his  creativity  to  take  over,  
when  he  was  constructing  Oskar’s  character,  Laura  Miller  criticizes  that  the  author  
has   not   succeeded   in   bestowing   psychological   realism   on   his   child   character.   On  
the  one  hand,  Laura  Miller  is  right,  when  she  says  that  Oskar  is  like  ‘a  plastic  bag  
crammed  with  oddities,’  because  the  child  displays  numerous  fads  and  spleens  that  
pepper   the   complete   narrative.   Laura   Miller   makes   this   diagnosis   sound   like   a  
negative   feature,   though   and   it   seems   as   if   the   critic   wants   to   point   out   that  
Jonathan   Safran   Foer   has   failed   at   creating   a   psychologically   coherent   character.  
However,   Oskar   has   experienced   deep   psychological   and   emotional   trauma   and   no  
 128  
 

one  can  accurately  predict,  which  and  how  many  oddities  an  individual  develops,  
as   a   consequence   to   a   personal   ordeal.   Consequently,   labelling   Jonathan   Safran  
Foer’s  novel  as  a  psychologically  unrealistic  construct  is  mere  speculation.  
Additionally,   Laura   Miller   criticizes   the   fact   that   the   reader   never   gets   to  
know,   why   Oskar   behaves   the   way   he   does.   Of   course,   the   most   obvious  
explanation  for  the  character’s  strange  manners  is  self-­‐explanatory:  when  a  child  
has  lost  his  father  in  a  terrorist  attack,  then  there  is  little  room  left  for  wondering,  
why   a   child   starts   to   act   in   a   peculiar   way.   So   why   would   an   author   need   to  
highlight  this  obvious  factor  even  more?  
Moreover,   every   individual   has   odd   ticks,   which   have   developed   and  
emerged  over  time,  but  for  most  of  these  fads,  we  ignore,  which  events  in  our  lives  
have  triggered  a  tick  or  another.  In  that  respect,  Jonathan  Safran  Foer’s  approach  
of  leaving  certain  information  in  the  story  unexplained  is  a  true  to  life  method.  
Furthermore,  Mother  Jones  has  asked:  
 
MJ:  When  you’re  writing  about  a  small  child,  do  you  develop  protective  feelings  the  
way  you  would  with  a  real  child?  
 
JSF:   Definitely,   and   that   was   one   of   the   things   that   was   painful   about   the   book.   I  
knew   I   couldn’t   give   him   what   he   wanted.   I   felt   protective   of   him,   but   I   was   also  
creating  the  harms  that  befell  him.  It  was  a  relationship  that  I  felt  deeply.  (JWS)  
 
To  me  it  is  interesting  to  read  that  the  feelings  the  child  narrator  provokes  in  the  
reader  are  the  same  feelings  that  are  produced  in  the  writer.  On  the  one  hand,  the  
writer’s   statement   provokes   the   reader,   because   it   makes   his   audience   wonder,  
why  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  does  not  change  the  events  in  his  story,  in  order  to  come  
to   a   happy   end,   when   he   and   the   reader   are   suffering,   when   they   are   confronted  
with  the  story’s  tragedy.  
On  the  other  hand,  people  want  to  be  confronted  with  reality,  as  painful  as  it  
might  be,  rather  than  having  to  deal  with  the  illusion  of  perfection.  A  child  narrator  
himself   can   render   a   story   softer   and   more   melodramatic,   because   of   the   child’s  
innocent  tone  of  voice  and  because  of  his  naivety.  Accordingly,  the  author  can  and  
needs   to   opt   for   a   more   challenging   topic,   which   can   end   in   human   disaster,   in  
order  to  maintain  a  certain  level  of  literary  poignancy.  
 
MJ:  Both  of  your  books  have  narrators  who  are,  for  lack  of  a  better  word,  naive.  

  129  
 

 
JSF:   Yeah,   they   both   have   a   sort   of   rawness.   Their   limitations   define   them.   In   the  
case   of   Alex   in   Everything   Is   Illuminated,   it’s   a   linguistic   limitation.   In   the   case   of  
Oskar,  it’s  limitation  of  experience.  He  hasn’t  been  in  the  world  that  much.  In  both  
cases,   they   look   at   things   differently,   and   they   help   us   do   the   same,   which   is   one   of  
the   virtues   of   books.   They   can   strip   us   of   all   the   ways   we’re   jaded,   or   numb   to  
things.  (JWS)  
 
In  a  way,  Jonathan  Safran  Foer’s  statement  admits  that  the  novel’s  characters  show  
personal   deficiency,   because   the   narrator   can   only   offer   a   limited   amount   of  
experience   and   of   linguistic   complexity.   Yet,   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   emphasizes   that  
the   ultimate   goal   of   any   narrator   is   to   trigger   the   reader’s   response   to   and   interest  
in  a  certain  topic.  The  narrator  alerts  the  reader’s  awareness  to  the  fact  that  each  
topic   offers   several   vantage   points,   from   which   we   can   examine   or   portray   a  
problem.   Thus,   the   question   whether   a   child   displays   psychological   accuracy   or  
common   childlike   features   or   not,   becomes   irrelevant.   What   matters   is   the   effect  
the  narrator  creates  and  not  the  coherent  truthfulness  of  the  narrator,  which  the  
writer  has  created.  
Moreover,   Jonathan   Safran   Foer’s   novel   Extremely   Loud   &   Incredibly   Close   is  
also   a   novel   of   self-­‐interest   like   The   Life   Before   Us,   because   the   child   narrator  
comments  on  his  personal  daily  experiences.  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close  is  
not   just   narrated   by   a   child,   but   the   text   also   includes   an   adult   voice.   The   adult  
voice   builds   the   contrast   to   the   child’s   reality.   The   adult   voice   speaks   of  
possibilities  that  have  been  lost  over  the  course  of  a  life  and  the  child’s  narrative  
illustrates  the  possibilities  that  a  life  offers  at  the  start:  ‘How  did  that  boy  making  
love   behind   that   shed   become   this   man   writing   this   letter   at   this   table?’   (JSF   216).  
The   writer   creates   a   fictional   situation   where   all   three   generations;   children,  
parents   and   grandparents;   have   to   deal   with   secrets   of   their   own,   on   their   own.  
Oskar,   though,   the   youngest   member   of   the   family,   is   the   one,   who   ventures   out  
into   the   world   and   looks   for   answers   to   his   questions.   Oskar’s   daily   undertaking  
focuses  on  the  revelation  of  the  question,  why  his  father  had  hidden  a  key  in  a  vase  
before   his   death   and   which   lock   this   key   belongs   to.   On   the   one   hand,   Oskar’s   trips  
help  him  to  escape  home  and  the  thoughts  of  his  father.  
Additionally,  Oskar  feels  guilty,  because  he  has  hidden  the  family’s  answer  
machine   on   which   the   father   left   a   message   just   before   his   death.   Oskar   uses   his  
actions   to   cover   the   father’s   voice,   yet   all   his   actions   are   guided   by   the   father’s  

 130  
 

voice.   Even   beyond   death   parents   influence   their   children   and   the   father   speaks   to  
the  reader  through  his  child,  who  is  the  narrator  of  his  own  story,  but  also  of  the  
father,   the   mother’s   and   the   grandparents’   story:   ‘”But   if   you   don’t   tell   me  
anything,   how   can   I   ever   be   right?”   He   circled   something   in   an   article   and   said,  
“Another   way   of   looking   at   it   would   be,   how   can   you   ever   be   wrong?”’   (JSF  9).   If   the  
author  includes  a  child  narrator,  the  writer  manages  to  put  the  child’s  world  into  
perspective,  by  introducing  an  array  of  ancestors,  whose  habits  and  ideas  explain  
the  child’s  development.  Oskar’s  ancestors  had  special  narratives  of  their  own.  The  
father’s   death   allows   Oskar   to   construct   his   own   narrative,   based   on   what   the  
father  left  him  behind,  in  terms  of  memory.  Thus,  the  child’s  narrative  becomes  a  
sort   of   multilevel   biography,   whose   roots   reach   way   back   into   the   past,   and   whose  
future   can   be   expanded   in   the   form   of   Oskar’s   life.   Hence,   one   narrative  
encompasses  a  broader  amount  of  narratives,  than  becomes  visible  at  first  sight.  
Moreover,   Oskar’s   memory   of   his   dad   is,   of   course,   meant   to   move   the  
reader   and   to   attract   the   reader’s   sympathy.   The   child   who   has   lost   his   father  
points   out   which   consequences   people’s   self-­‐righteous   actions   like   acts   of  
terrorism   have   on   a   lot   of   other   people;   innocent   people   like   Oscar:   ‘I   loved   having  
a  dad  who  was  smarter  than  the  New  York  Times,  and  I  loved  how  my  cheek  could  
feel   the   hairs   on   his   chest   through   his   T-­‐shirt,   and   how   he   always   smelled   like  
shaving,  even  at  the  end  of  the  day.  Being  with  him  made  my  brain  quiet.  I  didn’t  
have   to   invent   a   thing’   (JSF   12).   If   an   adult   had   lost   his   partner,   then   the   reader  
would   also   feel   compassion,   by   hearing   the   same   words,   but   the   effect   would   be  
different.  An  adult  woman  mourning  her  husband,  who  was  killed,  falls  under  the  
category  of  romance  or  tearjerker.  Astonishing  to  note  is,  why  an  audience  or  the  
reader   reacts   so   differently   to   one   and   the   same   lines,   but   voiced   by   different  
people.  I  suppose  that  adults  expect  other  adults  to  keep  their  suffering  internally  
or   at   least,   to   voice   their   pain   in   a   more   matter   of   fact   way.   The   lines   Oskar  
pronounces   sound   melodramatic.   The   reader   finds   it   acceptable   that   a   child  
narrator  expresses  his  grief  in  any  way  he  can,  while  an  adult  is  supposed  to  find  
the   right   words   without   embarrassing   other   people.   Of   course,   there   are   also  
readers,   who   find   any   emotional   expression   too   melodramatic,   like   Laura   Miller,  
who  has  argued  earlier  on  that  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close  inappropriately  
trivializes  the  topic  of  9/11,  by  viewing  the  events  from  a  child’s  point  of  view.  

  131  
 

Moreover,   the   scene   Oskar   describes   depicts   a   very   intimate   moment  


between   him   and   his   father.   If   the   same   scene   would   take   place   between   two  
adults,  then  the  nature  of  the  scene  would  have  a  sexual  connotation.  When  Oskar  
describes   how   safe   he   felt   with   his   father,   the   reader   perceives   his   childlike  
innocence   and   natural   need   for   protection.   Consequently,   the   reader   feels   even  
more   compassionate   towards   Oskar,   who   was   bereaved   of   the   protection,   he  
craved  and  needed.  Of  course,  adults  also  need  honest  affection  and  support,  but  in  
our   society   the   open   display   of   weakness   and   the   demand   of   others’   support   is  
perceived   as   a   flaw.   Nowadays,   people   need   to   have   successful   careers,   working  
relationships  and  remain  good-­‐looking  in  order  to  create  the  impression  that  they  
lead   a   successful   and   happy   life.   Neediness   is   something   that   just   children   can  
display  in  our  modern  world,  without  being  frowned  at.  
Moreover,  Laura  Miller  criticizes  that  
 
Oskar   isn’t   the   only   character   prone   to   drifting   out   of   focus   and   becoming   a   device  
serving  the  author’s  purposes  rather  than  a  fully  imagined  human  being.  How  else  
could  Oskar’s  grandmother,  a  nice,  seventy  something,  bourgeois  German  woman,  
in  a  letter  to  her  grandson,  describe  the  loss  of  her  virginity  in  such  poetic  detail?  
(LM)  
 
Laura   Miller   criticises   that   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   does   not   concentrate   on   the  
creation   of   a   coherent   child   character   or   characters,   in   general,   who   manage   to  
attract  the  reader’s  unwavering  attention  throughout  the  novel,  because  they  seem  
‘like  a  plastic  bags  crammed  with  oddities.’  The  critic  argues  that  Jonathan  Safran  
Foer   is   more   concerned   with   the   transmission   of   the   novel’s   message,   than   with  
the   character’s   authenticity   and   realism.   However,   we   have   already   pointed   out  
earlier   on   that   the   character’s   perceived   coherence   does   not   just   depend   on   the  
author’s   talent,   but   also   on   the   reader’s   ability   to   interpret   and   understand   the  
child,  according  to  the  reader’s  individual  worldview.  
Additionally,   it   is   common   that   a   writer   focuses   on   the   accurate  
transmission   of   the   message   he   wants   to   send   the   reader   on   the   way   with.   The  
author   can   never   achieve   the   creation   of   a   completely   realistic   child   narrator,  
because   characters,   like   real   people,   are   unpredictable   and   the   author   or   reader  
can  never  accurately  estimate,  if  a  real  life  person  would  act  like  the  character  does  
or  not,  because  everybody  reacts  differently,  when  confronted  with  a  challenging  

 132  
 

situation.   Thus,   it   is   logical   that   an   author   concentrates   more   on   the   accurate  


transmission   of   the   text’s   message,   rather   than   on   the   characters’   realism,   because  
no  matter  how  hard  he  tries,  the  writer  can  never  be  sure  that  the  reader  perceives  
the  novel’s  characters  as  psychologically  authentic.  
In  the  end,  though,  the  author  must  have  been  successful  in  the  creation  of  a  
convincing  child  narrator,  when  the  reader  has  understood  the  author’s  message.  
The  idea  that  Oskar  has  turned  into  Jonathan  Safran  Foer’s  puppet  and  only  serves  
the  author’s  purposes  cannot  really  be  taken  as  criticism,  because  each  character  
in   a   novel   serves   a   function,   which   is   controlled   by   the   writer.   In   real   life,   each  
person  also  functions  in  relation  to  other  people:  an  employee  embodies  the  ideas  
of   his   boss   or   if   a   person   is   self-­‐employed,   then   he   caters   for   the   needs   of   his  
clients.   Additionally,   also   in   a   family   each   family   member   serves   the   purpose   to  
make  the  family  work  and  thus,  functions  as  the  puppet  of  the  whole  micro-­‐system  
that  a  family  is.  In  relation  to  the  child  narrator,  we  can  say  that  Oskar  is  Jonathan  
Safran  Foer’s  ‘brainchild’  and  consequently,  Oskar  serves  the  purpose  to  make  his  
‘father’s’  world  work  as  well.  Vice-­‐versa,  if  Jonathan  Safran  Foer  manages  to  render  
his   novel   a   success,   because   of   the   importance   of   the   text’s   message,   the   child  
narrator  is  also  a  success,  no  matter  how  realistic  or  unrealistic  he  appears  to  the  
reader.  
Like  in  The  Life  Before  Us,  Jonathan  Safran  Foer’s  child  narrator  encourages  
adults   to   precisely   define,   what   they   say,   not   necessarily,   because   they   are   more  
probing  than  adults,  but  because  children  lack  the  linguistic  understanding  that  is  
necessary  to  take  part  in  a  conversation:  ‘She  said,  “Believe  it  or  not,  I  used  to  be  
idealistic.”   I   asked   her   what   “idealistic”   meant’   (JSF  150).   Child   narrators   do   not   just  
naturally  point  out  a  perspective  that  contrasts  adult  perception,  but  children  also  
ask  adults  to  reconsider  the  words  they  use,  in  order  to  convey  or  transmit  their  
conceived  reality.  Hence,  an  author,  who  uses  a  child  narrator,  who  challenges  the  
exact   meaning   of   the   words   people   use,   is   automatically   reminded   to   evaluate   or  
re-­‐evaluate  the  words  that  he  uses,  in  order  to  accurately  transmit  his  message  via  
a  written  text.  
Moreover,  an  adult  narrator  can  point  out  the  idea  that  people  need  to  seize  
the   opportunity   to   live   their   lives,   according   to   their   own   desires,   wishes   and  
character:  ‘I  regret  that  it  takes  a  life  to  learn  how  to  live,  Oskar.  Because  if  I  were  

  133  
 

able   to   live   my   life   again,   I   would   do   things   differently.   I   would   change   my   life’   (JSF  
184).  Child  narrators  though  can  visualize  the  idea  that  people  of  all  ages  face  the  

same   problem   of   making   the   most   of   their   days   and   it   is   even   more   tragic   to  
observe   a   child   narrator,   who   falls   short   on   fulfilling   his   life’s   purpose   and   true  
goal.   On   the   other   hand,   it   is   most   satisfying   to   observe   that   a   child   learns   from   his  
elders,  how  to  act  according  to  his  own  true  nature.  
Finally,   the   child   narrator   manages   to   extend   a   conversation   beyond   the  
moment,   when   the   conversation   is   taking   place,   because   the   reader   is   allowed   to  
share   in   the   child’s   frame   of   mind,   after   the   conversation   and   to   get   a   glimpse   of  
what  a  child  extricates  from  a  conversation  with  an  adult:    
 
On   Tuesday   afternoon   I   had   to   go   to   Dr.   Fein.   I   didn’t   understand   why   I   needed  
help,   because   it   seemed   to   me   that   you   should   wear   heavy   boots   when   your   dad  
dies,  and  if  you  aren’t  wearing  heavy  boots,  then  you  need  help.  But  I  went  anyway,  
because  the  raise  in  my  allowance  depended  on  it.  (JSF  200)  
 
Of  course,  it  is  true  that  an  adult  narrator  can  also  grant  the  reader  an  insight  into  
his  train  of  thoughts  after  the  conversation  has  taken  place,  which  can  be  equally  
interesting   for   the   reader.   Yet,   it   is   more   interesting   to   read   about   a   child’s  
perspective,   because   the   child’s   view   mostly   goes   unnoticed.   Psychologists,  
teachers,   politicians   and   parents   nowadays   focus   more   on   attributing   a   voice   to  
young   people,   but   the   child’s   reality   remains   generally   discussed   from   an   adult’s  
point   of   view.   Adults   decide   what   is  best  for  children,  without  at  least  consulting  
their   kids:   ‘Most   of   the   kids   in   my   class   have   ADD’   (JSF   142).   Parents   seem   to  
individually   act   responsibly   by   trying   to   find   remedies   for   their   children’s  
behaviour,   but   children   observe   the   extent   of   the   measures   that   parents   have  
taken,   because   they   are   confronted   with   each   other   as   a   group.   Children   make  
adults’  alleged  rational  behaviour  seem  irrational  and  relativize  the  adult’s  action.  
Of   course,   in   order   to   highlight   this   fact,   a   novel   can   also   be   written   from   a   teacher  
or  educator’s  point  of  view,  because  he  also  views  children’s  developments  within  
a  group  context.  Yet,  children  also  form  groups  and  act,  even  more  freely  in  groups,  
outside   of   school.   So,   it   is   logical   that   a   child   can   portray   a   group   reality   more  
accurately   than   an   adult.   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   offers   his   child   narrator   the  
possibility   to   discuss   the   outcome   of   adult-­‐child   interaction   from   a   child’s  
perspective.   The   scene   between   Dr.   Fein   and   Oskar   shows   anew,   like   in   Momo’s  
 134  
 

case,  that  adults  have  an  idea  in  mind,  of  what  is  psychologically  best  for  a  child,  
and   adults   feel   good   about   the   alleged   remedy   that   they   have   come   up   with.   The  
adult   plan   might   be   elaborate,   but   might   fail   to   take   into   account   the   broader  
picture.  
Finally,   on   the   one   hand,   we   have   argued   that   children   and   their   innocent  
and   naïve   voice   can   render   a   novel   overtly   romantic   or   even   kitsch,   which  
diminishes   a   story’s   intellectual   seriousness.   On   the   other   hand,   since   we  
stereotypically   believe   a   child   to   behave   shier   and   in   a   calmer   way,   a   child,   who  
loses   his   temper   can   develop   a   more   shocking   emotional   impact,   which   shakes   the  
reader  and  makes  him  want  to  react:  ‘I  keep  smashing  the  skull  against  his  skull,  
which  is  also  RON’s  skull  (for  letting  MOM  get  on  with  life)  and  MOM’s  skull  (for  
getting   on   with   life)   and   DAD’s   skull   (for   dying)   and   GRANDMA’s   skull   (for  
embarrassing  me  so  much)  and  DR.  FEIN’s  skull  (for  asking  if  any  good  could  come  
out  of  dad’s  death)  and  the  skulls  of  everyone  else  I  know’   (JSF  146).  The  actions  of  
the   adult   world   shake   the   child’s   world   and   render   him   almost   mad.   In   contrast,  
the  child’s  words  are  so  shocking  that  they  can  make  the  reader  shudder.  Thus,  in  
the  end,  the  child  narrator  represents  the  entity  that  stands  in  contrast  to  the  adult  
world.   The   two   worlds   influence   and   complement   each   other,   in   order   to   form   a  
complex  network  of  necessary  and  challenging  human  interaction.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

  135  
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 136  
 

5.  General  Thinking:  Conclusion  


The  present  thesis  was  meant  to  discuss  the  question  why  an  author  would  put  a  
child’s   voice   at   the   centre   of   his   novel.   Throughout   the   foregoing   discussion,   the  
realization   has   emerged   that   the   functions   of   the   child   narrators   are   similar   to  
those   of   adult   narrators.   Adult   narrator   and   child   narrator   are   both   puppets   that  
are   meant   to   transmit   a   novel’s   message   in   the   most   accurate   and   in   the   most  
appealing  way  for  the  reader.  Child  narrator  and  adult  narrator,  both  raise  social  
and  ethical  questions  and  they  can  discuss  any  topic  that  the  author  wants  to  put  at  
the   centre   of   his   novel,   because   the   author   is   always   the   source   of   the   narrator’s  
words   and   the   author   manages   to   find   a   way   to   render   his   story   and   characters  
internally  coherent.  
Moreover,  as  we  have  pointed  out  earlier  on,  even  if  the  author  fails  to  bring  
about   internal   coherence,   the   reader   contributes   to   the   story’s   logic,   because   the  
reader   wants   to   personally   understand   the   story,   which   only   functions   if   the  
reader  patches  up  any  textual  inconsistency  with  his  own  logic.  
Furthermore,   adult   narrator   and   child   narrator   can   both   adopt   different  
levels   of   maturity,   because   a   child   can   copy   adult   behaviour   or   be   more   mature  
than   generally   expected   in   relation   to   his   age.   The   development   of   the   child’s  
character  traits  depends  on  character  and  on  social  circumstances  and  the  author  
can   create   any   background   situations   for   his   characters   that   justify   their  
behaviour.   Vice-­‐versa   an   adult   can   adopt   a   child’s   way   of   thinking   by   offering  
flashbacks  of  his  childhood  or  by  displaying  a  youthful  or  childlike  attitude.  
Thus,  it  depends  on  the  author’s  preference,  which  figure  he  employs  as  the  
narrator   of   his   story.   Either   the   author   chooses   a   narrator,   because   he   can   identify  
with  that  narrator  and  highlights  that  he  is  his  own  creation,  or  the  author  wants  
to  create  a  certain  distance  between  himself  and  the  narrator,  because  he  wants  to  
voice  social  criticism.  In  that  case,  a  child  narrator  suits  the  author’s  purpose  best.  
This   realization   leads   to   the   fact   that   although   child   narrator   and   adult   narrator  
fulfil   the   same   function   or   adopt   the   same   role   in   a   novel,   there   are   some  
advantages   for   reader   and   author,   when   a   novel   is   narrated   from   a   child’s  
perspective.   These   advantages   have   been   extensively   discussed   in   the   foregoing  
chapters.  Yet,  at  this  point,  we  can  recall  one  or  two  most  poignant  features  once  
again:    
  137  
 

First   of   all,   we   have   discovered   that   a   child   narrator   can   render   a   novel  
more   emotionally   charged   and   challenging   for   the   reader,   which   makes   the   reader  
feel   more   involved.   In   addition,   the   child’s   negative   emotional   reaction   or  
development,  throughout  a  novel,  can  render  a  novel’s  message  more  emotionally  
shocking  or  poignant,  which  livens  up  the  reading  process.  
In   contrast,   we   need   to   acknowledge   that   child   narrators   are   not   always  
suitable   for   the   transmission   of   a   message,   because   a   child’s   voice   also   brings  
about   shortcomings.   One   drawback   is   for   example   that   a   child   narrator   can   render  
a   novel   soppier   and   circumcise   the   poignancy   and   cutting-­‐edge   seriousness   of   a  
topic.   A   child’s   voice   can   render   a   novel   more   emotionally   tainted   and   have   the  
effect  that  a  text  which  centres  on  a  serious  social  matter  can  be  perceived  by  the  
reader  as  a  tearjerker  and  as  overtly  fishing  for  the  reader’s  sympathy.  However,  
the  way  in  which  a  reader  perceives  a  character  and  a  text’s  message  also  depends  
on  the  reader’s  frame  of  mind  and  experience.  
Now,   in   the   end,   we   need   to   ask   the   questions   whether   there   is   such   a  
literary  device  as  a  stereotypical  child  narrator  or  if  all  child  narrators  are  different  
because   of   the   authors’   individuality.   On   the   one   hand,   there   are   indicators   that  
reveal   that   all   child   narrators   are   individuals,   because   in   each   novel,   the   child  
narrator   has   a   different   name,   for   instance.   Names   generally   stand   for  
individuality,   because   they   distinguish   people   and   characters.   When   a   literary  
figure   does   not   have   a   name,   this   use   usually   means   that   the   character   is  
interchangeable   and   that   the   nameless   character   is   meant   to   represent   the  
common   person.   In   the   novels   discussed   in   this   paper,   the   characters   have  
individual   names,   like   Oskar,   Lawrence,   Christopher,   and   Momo.   In   Momo’s   case,  
who  is  at  times  called  Mohammed,  the  child’s  name  is  even  used  in  order  to  convey  
different   kinds   of   meaning.   Thus,   the   fact   that   all   child   narrators   have   different  
names  indicates,   on   a   first   level,   that  all  those  literary  figures  have  an  independent  
nature.  
Moreover,  a  different  author  has  created  each  individual  character.  Thus,  a  
different   writer   is   the   source   of   each   narrator.   So,   also   the   product   is   each   time  
different.   In   the   beginning   we   have   asked   the   question   whether   a   child   narrator  
mirrors  the  author’s  social  and  cultural  background  or  whether  all  child  narrators  
are   identical.   My   research   has   shown   that   author   and   narrator   are   intrinsically  

 138  
 

linked   and   that   the   author’s   experiences   influence   or   colour   the   nature   of   his  
literary  figure.  Even  if  the  author  wants  to  detach  himself  from  his  character,  the  
distance   the   author   strives   and   manages   to   achieve   reflects   the   writer’s  
background  and  culture,  too.  
In   addition,   the   narrator   does   not   just   mirror   the   author’s   social   and  
cultural  background,  but  the  importance  and  seriousness  a  reader  attributes  to  the  
child  narrator  also  reflects  the  reader’s  social,  ethical,  and  cultural  background  and  
experience   and   bears   witness   to   the   attitude   towards   children,   which   the   people  
surrounding  the  author  display.  
To   sum   up,   on   the   one   hand,   each   child   narrator   is   unique   in   terms   of   his  
origin,  in  terms  of  his  individual  character  traits,  in  terms  of  the  function  he  serves  
and   in   terms   of   the   different   ways   in   which   he   can   be   understood   by   various  
readers.  
On   the   other   hand,   which   are   the   features   that   all   child   narrators   have   in  
common?   First,   in   all   the   novels   that   we   have   discussed   throughout   the   present  
thesis,  all  the  child  narrators  are  male.  On  the  one  hand,  this  fact  is  a  coincidence,  
because  there  are  novels  featuring  child  narrators  that  have  a  girl’s  voice,  like  To  
Kill  a  Mockingbird  (1960),  by  Harper  Lee,  which  is  narrated  by  Jean  Louise  ‘Scout’  
Finch.  
On   the   other   hand,   if   we   assume   that   the   author   identifies   with   his   narrator  
or  that  an  author  wants  to  keep  a  link  between  himself  and  his  creation,  then  it  is  
understandable   that   the   narrators   in   the   novels   we   have   discussed   are   male,  
because   their   respective   authors   are   male.   If   we   have   a   second   glance   at   Harper  
Lee,   we   notice   that   a   female   author   has   chosen   a   female   child   narrator,   which  
would   prove   my   theory   that   the   author   looks   to   maintain   a   link   between   himself  
and  his  literary  figure.  On  the  one  hand,  the  character  has  been  removed  from  the  
author,   because   the   narrator   is   a   child.   On   the   other   hand,   narrator   and   author   are  
linked  by  the  fact  that  they  share  the  same  sex.  
Additionally,  all  the  mentioned  stories  are  not  child-­‐centred.  They  all  focus  
on  broader  social  issues,  like  death,  love,  prostitution,  and  financial  hardship.  Like  
Anne  Schulock  says:  
 
Because   for   all   their   cuteness,   the   novels   are   really   about   surviving   death   and   loss.  
Several   of   the   characters   assemble   literal   survival   kits,   that   include   items   like   a  
  139  
 

telescope,   compasses,   drafting   paper,   duct   tape   (…)   But   what   good   is   a   compass   or  
stuffed  animal  –  where  can  you  go,  and  what  second-­‐rate  comfort  will  you  find?  –  
when  you  are  a  child  whose  parents  or  sibling  has  died?  (ASL)  
 
That  the  topics  are  portrayed  from  a  child’s  perspective  is  more  a  literary  device  or  
a  function,  as  explained  before,  than  a  real  concern  for  the  child’s  voice.  Of  course,  
we   can   argue   that   Jonathan   Safran   Foer   and   Romain   Gary   especially   picked   a   child  
as   the   transmitter   of   their   message,   because   they   did   not   feel   comfortable   with   the  
combination  of  an  adult  voice  and  the  political  concerns  discussed  in  their  novels.  
However,   vice   versa,   we   can   say   that   their   choice   is   one   based   on   the   wish   to  
exclude  the  adult  voice,  rather  than  on  the  desire  to  introduce  a  child’s  narrative.  
Moreover,   the   two   novels   tell   us   how   adults   think   that   children   cope   with  
death,   illness,   and   sex.   It’s   the   adults’   interpretation   of   the   children’s   behaviour,  
but  the  child’s  real  feelings  are  kept  from  us.  Of  course,  the  reader  associates  the  
text’s   message   with   a   child   and   thus,   the   reader   is   made   to   think   about   a   child’s  
reality.   This   consequence   is   desirable   and   furthering   for   the   child’s   status   in  
society,   even   if   the   author’s   intention   was   more   focused   on   the   novel’s   message  
than  on  the  child.  
Finally,   all   the   novels   featuring   child   narrators,   which   I   have   read,   include  
distinct  child  vocabulary,  which  renders  the  novels  more  authentic.  However,  the  
novels   are   not   consistently   written   in   child   language,   but   children’s   expressions  
are   combined   with   adult   talk.   Pure   child   language   would   generally   limit   the  
author’s   possibilities   of   expressing   his   concern   and   of   transmitting   the   text’s  
intended   message.   Which   consequence   this   approach   has   on   the   child   has   also  
been  discussed  in  the  foregoing  discussion.  
Finally,  both  novels  clearly  draw  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  narrator  is  a  
child.  In  Extremely  Loud,  Oskar  says:  ‘I’m  not  allowed  to  watch  TV  at  home’   (JSF  4).  
This   fact   highlights   that   the   author   wants   to   attract   the   reader’s   sympathy   and  
make  him  side  with  the  narrator,  in  order  to  render  him  more  open  and  alert  for  
the   narrative’s   message.   Oskar   says:   ‘He   asked,   “How   old   are   you?”   I   said   seven,  
because  I  wanted  him  to  feel  more  sorry  for  me,  so  he  would  help  me’  (JSF  90).  Child  
narrators  manage  to  manipulate  the  other  characters  in  the  story  and  the  reader.    
In   conclusion,   in   The   Life   Before   Us,   Momo   phrases   it   quite   right   when   he  
says:  ‘in  my  opinion  you  can’t  judge  everything  by  the  same  standards,  like  turtles  

 140  
 

and   hippopotamuses,   for   instance,   because   they   are   just   not   the   same   as   other  
people’   (RG   163).   So,   even   if   there   are   two   child   narrators   who   embody   the   same  
character  traits  or  who  address  similar  problems,  then  one  can  still  not  say  that  all  
child   narrators   are   the   same.   Each   novel   and   each   novel’s   message   are   different  
and   consequently,   the   characters   who   narrate   these   stories   are   also   independent  
individuals.  
The  entity,  which  creates  a  significant  difference,  between  reading  a  novel  
with   a   child   narrator   and   reading   a   novel   with   an   adult   narrator,   is   the   reader.  
When  the  reader  knows  that  the  narrator  is  a  nine-­‐year-­‐old  child,  because  that  has  
been  pointed  out  at  the  beginning  of  the  story,  then  during  the  reading  process  the  
reader   creates   images   of   a   child   in   his   head,   who   is   experiencing   what   is   described  
on  the  page.  The  message  that  the  author  wants  to  transmit  would  just  as  clearly  
have  come  across  if  there  had  been  an  adult  narrator,  but  on  an  emotional  level  the  
appeal  would  have  been  a  completely  different  one.  Reading  about  and  imagining  a  
child  having  a  hard  time  and  meeting  different  kinds  of  people,  raises  in  the  reader  
a   natural   instinct   to   protect   the   child.   The   reader   is   much   more   alert   to   the  
emotional  and  physical  distress  of  the  child  narrator  than  he  would  be  to  that  of  an  
adult   character,   because   adults   have   more   power   to   sort   themselves   out.   The  
reader   feels   more   involved   and   more   personally   challenged   as   an   instance   of  
authority   and   support   than   as   if   the   perspective   of   another   adult   had   been  
presented.   According   to   Mary   L.   Northway   that   ‘”we   see   things   not   as   they   are,   but  
as   we   are”   has   become   a   psychological   platitude,’46   but   a   text   is   as   much   an  
author’s   construct   as   it   is   a   reader’s   creation.   It   depends   on   the   reader   if   a   child  
narrator   turns   into   a   laughing   stock   or   if   the   reader   feels   more   deeply   involved,  
because  of  the  child  character.    
Finally,   do   I   think   that   my   aim   of   analyzing   the   child   narrator   has   been  
reached?   On   a   first   level,   I   believe   that   I   have   managed   to   narrow   down   and   define  
the  majority  of  aspects  in  relation  to  child  narrators.  I  have  analyzed  the  different  
perspectives  from  which  a  child  narrator  can  talk  and  highlighted  the  advantages  
and  disadvantages  that  a  child  narrator  can  bring  about.  

                                                                                                               
46  Northway,  Mary  L.  and  Joyce  Detweiler.  “Children’s  Perception  of  Friends  and  Non-­‐Friends.”  

Sociometry  18.4  (Nov.  1955):  271-­‐275,  271.  


  141  
 

In   contrast,   there   is   a   part   of   the   child   narrator   that   remains   undefined,  


because  in  order  to  completely  pinpoint  an  idea  or  concept,  I  would  have  needed  to  
analyze  a  broader  variety  of  novels  and  include  a  wider  range  of  cultural,  ethical,  
and  political  background.  The  concepts  of  ‘real  author’  and  ‘implied  author’  could  
also   have   been   explained   in   relation   to   the   topic   at   hand.   However,   I   needed   to  
make  a  choice  in  terms  of  the  books  that  I  wanted  to  include  in  the  present  analysis  
and   I   needed   to   limit,   which   concepts   I   wanted   to   define,   in   order   to   restrict   my  
research  paper  and  to  render  my  thesis  conclusive.  
However,   even   if   I   would   have   done   still   more   expansive   research   that  
approach  would  not  have  guaranteed  that  the  concept  of  the  child  narrator  could  
have   been   defined   any   better   by   me,   because   the   idea   of   the   ‘child   narrator’   will  
always   remain   partly   vague,   because   each   author   interprets   his   narrator   and   his  
conception   of   ‘child’   differently.   Additionally,   also   the   reader   understands   the  
child’s   development   and   the   narrator’s   function   in   different   ways,   which   renders  
the  explicit  definition  of  the  two  entities  an  insurmountable  challenge.  
Finally,   I   would   like   to   end   my   research   paper   with   a   quote   by   Anne  
Schulock,   because   it   summarizes   the   appeal   that   accounts   for   the   attraction   a   child  
narrator  exerts  on  its  readers:  
 
In   an   age   of   shortening   attention   spans   and   glorification   of   stupidity,   I   find   it  
comforting   and   exciting   to   spend   time   with   young   characters   for   whom   books,  
maps,  notebooks,  letters,  research,  drawings,  imagined  inventions  and  classic  films  
are   central   and   essential.   Precocious   narrators,   and   the   ambitious   novelists   who  
create   them,   give   proof   of   the   power   of   intelligence,   imagination,   curiosity,   and  
even  “gee-­‐whiz  wonderment.”  (ASL)  
 
In   the   end,   child   narrators   yield   beneficial   aspects   and   supply   a   text   with   a   fresh  
outlook  for  the  most  poignant  transmission  of  the  author’s  message.  However,  we  
also   need   to   conclude   that   employing   a   child   narrator   is   at   times   just   an   artistic  
preference   or   author’s   tool   that   could   be   replaced   by   an   adult   narrator   without  
circumcising  the  novel’s  message.  Finally,  discussing  the  concept  of  ‘child  narrator’  
is  only  possible,  if  we  treat  the  fictive  narrator  in  a  story  like  a  real  person,  because  
the   documentation   and   refutation   of   the   initial   thesis   question   only   worked,  
because  I  have  discussed  the  child  narrator  based  on  real  life  situations.  
 
  
 142  
 

Bibliography  
 
  

Primary  Reading  
 
GARY,  Romain  (Emile  Ajar).  The  Life  Before  Us.  New  York:  New  Directions  Books.    
1978.  
 
SAFRAN  FOER,  Jonathan.  Extremely  Loud  &  Incredibly  Close.  London:  Penguin    
Books.  2006.  
 
HADDON,  Mark.  The  Curious  Incident  of  the  Dog  in  the  Night-­Time.  London:  Vintage.    
2004.  
 
KNEALE,  Matthew.  When  We  Were  Romans.  London:  Picador.  2008.  
 
 
 

Secondary  Reading  
Cited  Works  
 
ABRAMS,  M.  H.  A  Glossary  of  Literary  Terms  (7th  edition).  Boston:  Heinle  &  Heinle.    
1999.  
 
ALMEN,  Byron.  “Narrative  Archetypes:  A  Critique,  Theory,  and  Method  of  Narrative    
Analysis.”  Journal  of  Music  Theory  47.1  (Spring  2003):  1-­‐39.  
 
BEYERLEIN,  Craig  and  David  Sikkink.  “Sorrow  and  Solidarity:  Why  Americans    
Volunteered  for  9/11  Relief  Efforts.”  Social  Problems  55.2  (May  2008):  190-­‐  
215.  
 
BIELBY,  D.D.  “Commitment  to  Work  and  Family.”  Annual  Review  of  Sociology  18    
(1992):  281-­‐302.  
 
BLANCHARD,  Phyllis.  “Status  of  the  Child.”  The  American  Journal  of  Sociology  35.6    
(May  1930):  1085-­‐1090.  
 
BOORSCH,  Jean.  “Romain  Gary.”  Yale  French  Studies  8,  What’s  Novel  in  the  Novel    
(1951):  51-­‐55.  
 
BLODGETT,  Harriet.  “Necessary  Presence:  The  Rhetoric  of  the  Narrator  in  Vanity    
Fair.”  Nineteenth-­Century  Fiction  22.3  (Dec.  1967):  211-­‐223.  
 
BRUCE,  Robert.  Cliffs  Notes  On  Twain’s  Huckleberry  Finn.  N.Y.:  Wiley  Publishing.    
2000.  
  143  
 

 
BRYANT,  Sophie.  “Antipathy  and  Sympathy.”  Mind,  New  Series  4.15  (Jul.  1895):    
365-­‐370.  
 
CHESTER,  Alexander.  “Antipathy  and  Social  Behavior.”  The  American  Journal  of    
Sociology  51.4  (Jan.  1946):  288-­‐292.  
 
CROTTY,  Patrick.  “’All  Toppers’:  Children  in  the  Fiction  of  John  McGahern.”  Irish    
University  Review  35.1  Special  Issue:  John  McGahern  (Spring-­‐Summer    
2005):  42-­‐57.  
 
DONNELLY,  Brian.  “Inventing  a  Voice:  Irish  Fiction  from  1800.”  The  Harp  15    
(2000):  65-­‐74.  
 
FERRUCCI,  Franco.  “The  Dead  Child:  A  Romantic  Myth.”  MLN  104.1  (Jan.  1989):    
117-­‐134.  
 
FISCHER,  Therese.  “From  Reliable  to  Unreliable  Narrator:  Rhetorical  Changes  in    
Joyce’s  ‘The  Sisters.’”  James  Joyce  Quarterly  9.1  (Fall  1971):  85-­‐92.  
 
GRELLET,  Françoise.  Literature  in  English:  Anthologie  des  Littératures  du  Monde    
Anglophone.  Paris:  Hachette  Supérieur.  2002.  
 
HOWARD,  Judith  A.  “Social  Psychology  of  Identities.”  Annual  Review  of  Sociology  26    
(2000):  367-­‐393.  
 
KNOEPFLMACHER,  U.C.  “The  Balancing  of  Child  and  Adult:  An  Approach  to    
Victorian  Fantasies  for  Children.”  Nineteenth-­Century  Fiction  37.4  (Mar.    
1983):  497-­‐530.  
 
McCALL  SMITH,  Alexander.  Collins  Dictionary  of  Quotations.  Glasgow:  Harper    
Collins.  2003.  
 
McKEE,  Jane.  “The  Symbolic  Imagination  of  Romain  Gary.”  The  Maynooth  Review    
6.2  (May  1982):  60-­‐71.  
 
NORTHWAY,  Mary  L.  and  Joyce  Detweiler.  “Children’s  Perception  of  Friends  and    
Non-­‐Friends.”  Sociometry  18.4  Sociometry  and  the  Science  of  Man  (Nov.    
1955):  271-­‐275.  
 
OCHS,  Elinor  and  Lisa  Capps.  “Narrating  the  Self.”  Annual  Review  of  Anthropology    
25  (1996):  19-­‐43.  
 
SCHAPIRO,  Tamar.  “What  is  a  Child?”  Ethics  109.4  (Jul.  1999):  715-­‐738.  
 
SCHNEIDER,  Helena.  Harper  Lee  “To  Kill  a  Mockingbird”  (1960)  –  Die  Perspektive    
des  Kindes.  Nordherderstedt:  GRIN  Verlag.  2004.  
 
STEELE  Alexander.  Gotham  Writer’s  Workshop:  Writing  Fiction  –  The  Practical    

 144  
 

Guide  from  New  York’s  acclaimed  Creative  Writing  School.  N.Y.:  Bloomsbury.    
2003.  
 
TANNER,  Tony.  “The  Literary  Children  of  James  and  Clemens.”  Nineteenth-­Century    
Fiction  16.3  (Dec.  1961):  205-­‐218.  
 
VOGRIN,  Valerie.  “Point  of  View:  The  Complete  Menu,”  in  Alexander  Steele.  Gotham    
Writer’s  Workshop:  Writing  Fiction  –  The  Practical  Guide  from  New  York’s    
acclaimed  Creative  Writing  School.  N.Y.:  Bloomsbury.  2003.  
 
WOLFF,  Larry.  “When  I  Imagine  a  Child:  The  Idea  of  Childhood  and  the  Philosophy    
of  Memory  in  the  Enlightenment.”  Eighteenth-­Century  Studies  31.4  The    
Mind/  Body  Problem  (Summer  1998):  377-­‐401.  
 
 
 
Cited  Online  Sources  
 
KIM,  Jocelyn,  Andrew  Wong,  and  Jean  Wong.  “Children  as  Inherently  Good.”    
Umich.edu:    
http://www.umich.edu/~ece/student_projects/childrens_lit/Children_as_G  
ood.html  
 
KOTH,  Amit.  “Socrates.”  Quotationsbook.com:    
http://quotationsbook.com/quote/44998/#ixzz1K9ef61bh  
 
LAMBERT,  Tim.  “A  Brief  History  of  Children.”  Localhistories.org:    
http://www.localhistories.org/children.html  
 
MALONEY,  Evan.  “Why  Young  Narrators  So  Often  Sound  Phony.”  Guardian.co.uk:    
http://www.guardian.co.uk/books/booksblog/2010/feb/03/young-­‐  
narrators-­‐sound-­‐phony  
 
MILLER,  Laura.  “Terror  Comes  to  Tiny  Town.”  Nymag.com:    
http://nymag.com/print/?/nymetro/arts/books/reviews/11574  
 
SCHULOCK,  Anne.  “In  Praise  of  Precocious  Narrators.”  Themillions.com:    
http://www.themillions.com/2010/07/in-­‐praise-­‐of-­‐precocious-­‐  
narrators.html  
 
SERAPHINOFF,  Michael.  “Through  a  Child’s  Eyes:  A  Special  Role  of  the  Child  as    
Narrator  in  Macedonian  Literature.”  Macedonianlit.com:    
http://www.macedonianlit.com/pdfs/critical/Through%20a%20Child's%2  
0Eyes.pdf  
 
WIKIPEDIA.  “Child.”  Wikipedia.org:  http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Child  
 
WOLF  SCHENK,  Joshua.  “Jonathan  Safran  Foer:  Living  to  Tell  the  Tale.”    
Motherjones.com:  http://motherjones.com/media/2005/05/jonathan-­‐  
  145  
 

safran-­‐foer  
 
 
 

Included  Visual  Material  


 
Commarts.  com:  http://www.commarts.com/fresh/jay-­‐taylor.html.  Web.  
 
Dollsfrom  the  Attic.  com:  http://dollsfromtheattic.blogspot.com/2010/02/dolls-­‐of-­‐
middle-­‐ages.html.  Web.  
 
Billhillsblog.com:  http://billhillsblog.blogspot.com/2009/07/les-­‐miserables-­‐would-­‐
victor-­‐hugo.html.  Web.  
 
Nocloo.com:  http://www.nocloo.com/gallery2/v/charles-­‐robinson-­‐secret-­‐
garden/crobinson-­‐secretgarden07.jpg.html.  Web.  
 
 
 

Additional  Reading  
Consulted  Works  
 
BRIDGES,  William  E.  “Family  Patterns  and  Social  Values  in  America.”  American    
Quarterly  17.1  (Spring  1965):  3-­‐11.  
 
BYRNE,  George.  “The  Child  in  Literature.”  The  Furrow  3.4  (Apr.  1952):  183-­‐  
188.  
 
CUNNINGTON,   Phillis   &   Anne   Buck.   Children’s   Costume   in   England:   From   the  
Fourteenth  to  the  End  of  the  Nineteenth  Century.  London:  Adam  &  Charles  Blacke.  
1965.  
 
HÄRDLING,  Roger,  Hanna  Kokko,  and  Kathryn  E.  Arnold.  “Dynamics  of  the  Caring    
Family.”  The  American  Naturalist  161.3  (Mar.  2003):  395-­‐412.  
 
JAGER,  Eric.  “The  Parrot’s  Voice:  Language  and  Self  in  Robinson  Crusoe.”    
Eighteenth-­Century  Studies  21.3  (Spring  1988):  316-­‐333.  
 
LEVY,  Leo  B.  “Society  and  Conscience  in  Huckleberry  Finn.”  Nineteenth-­Century    
Fiction  18.4  (Mar.  1964):  383-­‐391.  
 
PLUMB,  J.H.  “The  New  World  of  Children  in  Eighteenth-­‐Century  England.”  Past  and    
Present  67.1  (1975):  64-­‐95.  
 
ROBINSON,  E.  Arthur.  “The  Two  ‘Voices’  in  Huckleberry  Finn.”  Modern  Language    
Notes  75.3  (Mar.  1960):  204-­‐208.  
 
SHUNAMI,  Gideon.  “The  Unreliable  Narrator  in  Wuthering  Heights.”  Nineteenth-­  
 146  
 

Century  Fiction  27.4  (Mar.  1973):  449-­‐468.  


 
WATERS,  John.  “The  ‘Voice  for  the  Voiceless.’”  Fortnight  300  (Nov.  1991):  11-­‐12.  
 
YABIKU,  Scott  T.,  William  G.  Axinn,  and  Arland  Thornton.  “Family  Integration  and    
Children’s  Self-­‐Esteem.”  The  American  Journal  of  Sociology  104.5  (Mar.    
1999):  1494-­‐1524.  
 
 
 

Consulted  Online  Sources  


 
BAINES,  Elizabeth  and  Charles  Lambert.  “Child  Narrators  in  Adult  Fiction.”    
Eng.cam.ac.uk:  http://www2.eng.cam.ac.uk/~tpl/texts/childnarrator.html  
 
BRAINARD,  Rick.  “18th  Century  Family  Life.”  History1700.com:    
http://www.history1700s.com/articles/article1015.shtml  
 
“The  Little  Voices  in  Our  Heads  Last  a  Lifetime.”  Irishtimes.com:    
http://www.irishtimes.com/newspaper/weekend/2010/0807/122427635  
8845.html  

  147  

Potrebbero piacerti anche